MCS2000 Radio Service Software User'

MCS 2000™ Radios
Radio Service Software
User’s Guide
Software Part Number: RVN-4113F
© 1997 by Motorola, Inc., Radio Products Group
8000 W. Sunrise Blvd., Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33322
Printed in U.S.A. 09/97. All Rights Reserved.
68-81081C15-E
Computer Software Copyrights
The Motorola® equipment described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer
programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other
countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs,
including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program.
Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola equipment
described in this manual may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express
permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola equipment shall not be deemed to
grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights,
patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license
to use that arises by operation of law in the sales of a product.
Licensing Restrictions
The installation program used to install MCS 2000™ Radio Service Software, INSTALL, is licensed
software provided by Knowledge Dynamics Corp., P.O. Box 1558, Canyon Lake, Texas 78130-1558
(USA). INSTALL is Copyright (c) 1987-1992 by Knowledge Dynamics Corp. which reserves all
copyright protection worldwide. INSTALL is provided to you for the exclusive purpose of installing
MCS 2000 Radio Service Software. Motorola is exclusively responsible for the support of MCS 2000
Radio Service Software, including support during the installation phase. In no event will Knowledge
Dynamics Corp. provide any technical support for MCS 2000 Radio Service Software.
Trademarks
, Motorola and PAC•RT are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
MCS 2000, Call Alert, Channel Scan, Digital Private-Line, DVI-XL, DVP, DVP-XL, FLASHport,
HearClear, Modat, Private-Line, Quik-Call, Quik-Call II, Sel Cal, Single Tone, SmartZone, Stat-Alert,
OmniLink, and VRM-500 are trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
PC XT and Personal Computer AT are trademarks of IBM Corp.
MS-DOS and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.
Computer Software Copyrights
Copyright© Motorola 1990-1997. Printed in USA. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
➠
1 - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Assembling The Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Steps to Connect the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
What’s On The RSS Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Organizing Your Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Starting The RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The Banner Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Anatomy of a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Navigating Through The RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Anatomy of a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Changing A Field Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Complete Menu Mapping at a Glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Configuring RSS Computer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
How to Read the Codeplug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Service Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Configuring Paths and Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Setting Screen Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2 - Basic Radio Programming Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Programming a Basic MCS 2000 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Desired Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Major Decisions Involved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
High-Level Programming Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Step-by-Step Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cloning Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3 - Service Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Servicing the Radio Using the RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Transmitter Alignment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Reference Oscillator Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Transmit Power Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Transmit Deviation Limit Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Transmit Deviation Limit Alignment: Reference Softpot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SECURE Transmit Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Transmit Current Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Receive Alignment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Front-End Filter Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Rated Audio Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Squelch Attenuator (12.5 kHz) Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Squelch Attenuator (20 kHz) Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Squelch Attenuator (25/30 kHz) Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
RSSI Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
SECURE Receive Discriminator Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
i
VRM500 Receive Discriminator Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Signalling Alignment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
DTMF Transmit Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Transmit Signalling: High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Transmit Signalling: MDC-1200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Controller Board Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4 - Get/Save/Program Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Get/Save/Program Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Reading Codeplug Data From Radio (Requires RIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Get Codeplug Data From Archive File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Get TCMS Codeplug Update Disk File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Clone Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Save Codeplug Data to an Archive File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Program the Radio’s Codeplug (Requires RIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Programming History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5 - Change/View Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Change/View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Radio Wide Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Radio Wide Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
VRM100 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Radio Wide SECURE Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Radio Wide Emergency Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
More Radio Wide Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Radio Wide Button Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Radio Wide Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Radio Wide Menu Item Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
DEK Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Phone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
DTMF Access/Deaccess Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Radio Wide Scan Lists and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Radio Wide Scan Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Radio Wide Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Radio Wide Display More Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Alarm Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Trunking Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Trunking Radio Wide Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
SmartZone Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Voice-On-Control (VOC) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Trunking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Channel Assignment Data (UHF/VHF models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Control Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Trunking System Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Trunking One-Touch Button Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Trunking Status Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Trunking Message Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Trunking Site Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Trunking Personality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
WAC AMSS Failsoft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Trunking Subfleets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Trunking Emergency Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Trunking Personality Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
ii
SmartZone Preferred Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OmniLink Preferred Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VRM100 Trunk Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VRM500 Trunk Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunking Call List Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventional Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventional Radio Wide Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPL List Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventional Personality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECURE Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personality MDC Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventional Personality Phone Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More Conventional Personality Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventional Personality RAC Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDC Configuration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDC Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More Emergency Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDC System Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDC System Remote Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDC Call List Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDC Repeater ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Tone Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Tone List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quik-Call II System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quik-Call II System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GE STAR System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventional Message Alias List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventional Status Alias List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zone/Talkgroup Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
190
192
195
197
198
199
201
203
209
212
215
217
221
224
225
229
230
234
236
238
239
240
242
243
246
248
251
252
253
6 - Print Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Print
Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Trunking Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Conventional Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7 - File Maintenance Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
File Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Create Directory Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Delete Archive File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
8 - FLASHport Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
FLASHport Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
View Radio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Enhancement Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
View FLASHkey Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
View Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
More Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Upgrade Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Appendix A - Computer-to-Radio Communication Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
iii
Appendix B - TPL Frequencies and Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Appendix C - DPL Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Appendix D - MCS 2000 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Appendix E - Field/Menu Navigation Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Appendix F - Trunked Radio Personality Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Appendix G - Conventional Radio Personality Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
iv
1
Introduction
Welcome to the world of two-way radio programming. This Radio
Service Software (RSS) manual is your guide to customizing and
programming a variety of features into the MCS 2000 radio.
The MCS 2000 series of Mobile radios has a unique set of features,
including unique PL/DPL codes for each channel, a variety of
signalling abilities with channel scan, and the convenience of
maintenance-free tuning due to the wide-band capability. This feature
set makes these radios ideal for commercial businesses and police and
fire protection services that typically utilize radios in their vehicles.
Modern microprocessor chip technology used to manufacture this
radio and the MCS 2000 RSS (a computer program, which when
interfaced with a radio, electronically programs a radio) make it
possible for you to personalize a radio with a unique set of features for
each individual customer. No tools are needed.
The RSS computer program resides on the diskettes you received in the
package with this manual. The radio’s customization and servicing is
accomplished using an IBM® Personal System/2® Model 30 or higher
computer.
Note: The alignment and troubleshooting sections of this manual are
intended for use by qualified communications technicians and
maintenance personnel ONLY.
Listed below are some of the major features and functions of the MCS
2000 RSS:
Programmable Features
Service Functions
Transmit (TX) frequencies
Reference oscillator alignment
Receive (RX) frequencies
Transmit deviation alignment
PL/DPL codes
Transmit power alignment
Signalling system parameters
Replaced power amplifier calibration
Phone operation
Replaced logic board calibration
FLASHport upgrade (requires
FLASHport upgrade package)
Replaced RF board calibration
1
Prerequisites
To program radios using the RSS, we recommend a basic working
knowledge of the following:
❒ Microcomputers
❒ The radio’s available features (Refer to the appropriate Radio
Operator’s Manual.)
❒ Your customers’ needs
❒ MS-DOS operating system, version 5.0 or later
This RSS requires a minimum of 510 kilobytes of free RAM to run. The
DOS MEM command can be used to determine the amount of free
memory available on your computer (that is, type c:\dos\mem and
hit Return). The location of MEM.EXE may vary from computer to
computer. DOS 5.0 is required. It is also strongly recommended that this
RSS be run on a computer with the following minimum configuration:
❒ 80386 CPU or higher
❒ DOS 5.0 or later
❒ 4 MB of RAM (1MB lower + 3MB or more extended) or greater
For complex radio configurations, it is recommended that the RSS be
executed from a RAM disk. This will reduce execution time
significantly.
Note: This application is compatible with DOS 6.0, but cannot
be run as a Double Space file.
To configure your computer with a RAM disk, you need to modify your
CONFIG.SYS file with the following statements:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\MEM386.EXE OFF
FILES=30
In order to run the RSS from the RAM disk, a .BAT (batch) file should
be used to copy the necessary files from the hard drive to the RAM disk.
Archive files are not affected and must be saved on the hard drive or
floppy drive as usual.
Note: If you are a computer beginner, refer to the DOS manual
that came with your computer for a detailed description of DOS
procedures and commands.
2
Using This Manual
The MCS 2000 RSS Manual is designed to teach basic radio feature
programming and speed up access to technical reference information.
It is intended for both beginners and advanced RSS users. This manual
contains information on all of the following:
❒ How to complete the hardware installation
❒ How to install the RSS
❒ How the RSS operates and how the screens are organized
❒ How to navigate through the menus and screens and use special
keyboard commands
❒ What the purpose of each menu and screen is, along with detailed
descriptions of the functions and data fields relevant to each
menu/screen
❒ How to program a radio as well as how to service the radio
❒ How to organize your file directories and specify directory paths
for codeplug files
❒ How to print out radio programming information
❒ How to clone (or program identical information into) a radio
To locate the information you need, use the Table of Contents and/or
the Index. Explanations of technical terms used in this manual can be
found in the Glossary.
The availability of some menus, screens or fields in the RSS are
dependent upon the model of the radio/codeplug loaded into memory
or on the values that have been assigned to certain fields in the RSS.
Conditional statements which provide this kind of information and
other important instructions are italicized throughout this manual.
Under each menu or screen title in this manual, you will find a
sequence of F-keys (or function keys) such as DCE . This
sequence represents the path from the MAIN MENU to that specific
menu or screen. To access the desired menu or screen, simply press
these keys one by one from the MAIN MENU. Paths from the MAIN
MENU to specific menus, screens and fields in the RSS can be found in
Appendix E.
Watch for WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTES which can be found
throughout this manual, the definitions of which are provided below:
!
WARNING
!
Caution
An operational procedure, practice, or condition,
etc., which may result in injury or death if not
carefully observed.
An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc.,
which may result in damage to the equipment if not
carefully observed.
Note: An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which
is important to emphasize.
3
Assembling The
Hardware
The figure below shows how to assemble the required (and optional)
equipment used to program the MCS 2000 radio.
Portable Products Test Set P/N RTX4005B or
RTX-4005A Test Set (with
rework kit RPX-4665A)
RIB Power Supply
60-82728J01 (9Vac) Power Supply
01-80357A57 (110 Vac) Power Supply
or 01-80358A56 (220 Vac) Power Supply.
It is more reliable to use the power supply
than to use a weak battery.
Smart RIB Power Supply
01-80302E27 or later (120 Vac) Power
Supply (Required for FLASHport operation
only.)
Provides the capability for
testing many transmitter and
receiver functions.
Transmitter modulation and
keying can be simulated and
receiver parameters can be
tested without opening up
the radio. The Test Set is used
in conjunction with the
programming/test cable.
RIB-to-Radio Cable
58-80385B31 Cable
RKN4062A
Smart RIB-to-Radio Cable
RKN4047A Cable (required for
FLASHport on Mobile radios only)
H/L
Home
Sel
Mon
Z
Computer
Z
Srch
Emer
Scan
Phon
Call
Dim
Menu
MCS 2000 Mobile
A
RIB
B
Radio Interface Box (RIB)-to-Computer Cable
30-80369B72 Cable for IBM Personal
Computer AT or compatible computer
(9-pin end and a 15-pin end).
or 30-80369B71 Cable for computers requiring
a 25-pin serial port connection
(25-pin end and a 15-pin end).
or Smart Radio Interface Box (SRIB) to
Computer Cable 30-80390B48 or later
cable (Required for FLASHport operation only.)
Steps to Connect the
Hardware
Radio Interface Box (RIB)
RLN4008B RIB
or Smart Radio Interface Box (RIB) RLN1015B or
later RIB (Required for FLASHport operation only.)
For laptop computer and on-the-road use only; use
a 9V battery (not included).
!
Caution
Use a fresh, 9V battery. The LED will remain lit
with a weak battery and this may cause certain
errors on the screen.
1. Connect the RIB-to-computer cable to the communications port of
the computer (9/25-pin end).
2. Connect the other end (15-pin end) to the Radio Interface Box
(RIB).
Note: If your computer has a 25-pin connections port
connector, you will need the cable 30-80369B71 to insert
between the computer and the RIB-to-computer cable.
3. Connect the 25-pin end of the RIB-to-radio cable to the RIB, and
the 9-pin end to the connector on the front side of the radio as
4
shown.
4. Plug one end of the RIB power supply into the RIB and the other
end into a wall outlet.
After you connect the hardware, switch on the radio by turning the
volume control clockwise. You will hear one of the following types of
tones.
High-pitched, short
tone
Hardware is connected correctly and the radio’s
internal firmware is operating properly.
Note: This tone may be disabled in the
codeplug and may not be heard.
Continuous low tone
Critical failure or radio’s internal software
malfunction.
You can install, start or explore the RSS using just the diskettes and
your computer if you do not have all the necessary hardware. You can
even update existing radio archive files stored on disk. What you
cannot do without the required hardware is read from or save
codeplug data to an actual radio and perform service functions.
!
Caution
When programming or calibrating a radio, DO NOT
disconnect the radio from the RIB when the computer is
communicating with the radio. If you do so, the radio
may become inoperable. The only recommended time
to disconnect the radio is while you are at the MAIN
MENU or at any of the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM screens.
Note: If you are using a laptop computer and you plan to use the RSS
while the computer is in battery mode, you may need to set the serial/
parallel adapter to run on battery power. This can be accomplished
using the application diskette supplied by the computer manufacturer.
If this action is not performed, you are likely to receive serial bus errors.
Note: If your RIB has a switch and LED, be sure to turn the switch on
before each programming session.
5
What’s On The RSS
Diskettes
Below are the files located on the diskette you received with this
manual.
File Name
File Type
Description
INSTALL.EXE
Installation file
Used to install the RSS.
INSTALL.DAT
Installation file
Contains installation data.
MCSINS.001
Compressed
executable file
File that the installation program
uncompresses when it installs the RSS
on your hard disk.
MCSINS.002
Compressed
executable file
Second part of the executable
files.
DISK.ID
Installation file
Floppy Disk ID.
README.TXT
Text file
Contains information about the
current RSS release.
The INSTALL program creates a file named MCS.BAT. This file is
located under the root directory of the hard drive, enabling the RSS to
start up from the root directory.
Experienced RSS users and computer pros can skip the “Organizing
Your Hard Disk” section and proceed to the “Starting The RSS” section.
New RSS users should read all sections.
6
It is important to spend some time early on deciding which types or
groups of files should be located together in the same file directory. File
directories can be created using the DOS MD or MKDIR command.
Organizing Your
Hard Disk
You may want to organize your directories first by customer area, then
by customer name and finally by radio model type, or perhaps in the
reverse order. Consider the different ways in which you operate your
business. Do you separate radio files by customer location, by sales
revenue, by fiscal year, or perhaps by date of purchase? When deciding
how to organize your files and directories, we suggest the following:
❒ Put as few directories as possible near the top (or root) of your
directory tree. The next level of directories would be the customer
names within each of those areas.
❒ Keep the RSS diskette contents in one directory and your archive
files in a different directory.
❒ Storing archive files for different radio models in the same
directory can cause a lot of confusion. Use a separate directory
name for each radio model and then store the archive files for that
specific model within the appropriate model directory.
Below is a sample directory tree for storing radio archive files on the
hard disk. Though your hard disk directory tree may vary depending
on your way of doing business, this setup may be a good starting
point. The installation program will automatically create the MRSS
and MCS directories for you if they do not already exist.
ROOT
SPREADSHEET
ETC.
WP
SPECTRA
DATABASE
MRSS
MCS
STX
SECURITY
ETC.
EXECUTABLE PROGRAM FILES
1994
FIRE
MTSX
SABER SI
ARCHIVE
GRAPHICS
1995
TOWING
COURIER
FIRE
SECURITY
TOWING
COURIER
7
Starting The RSS
Create a Back-up Copy of RSS
Diskette(s)
We recommend that you make a back-up copy of the RSS. To make a
back-up copy, follow these steps:
1. Insert the RSS diskette you received with this manual into drive A.
2. Type DISKCOPY A: A:
!
Caution
Accidentally reversing the insertion order of the diskettes
will erase the contents of the RSS diskette. You will be
prompted to insert the source diskette (the original RSS
diskette) and the target diskette (a newly formatted one)
respectively. When the disk copy command has been
executed, use the target diskette as the new working
copy.
3. Keep the original RSS diskettes in a safe place away from magnets,
moisture and heat.
What To Do with Previous
Versions of RSS Diskettes
It is recommended that you discard previous versions of the RSS so
that the RSS version you have is the very latest. This will also ensure
that you do not mistakenly program a radio with outdated data.
Note: The latest RSS version usually has updated codeplug
structures which cannot be read by old versions of RSS.
Installing the RSS on your Hard
Disk
Install the latest RSS version as soon as you receive it. The software
installation will take approximately three minutes, but this duration
may vary based on the processing power of your computer.
The INSTALL program will:
❒ Create the MRSS, MCS and ARCHIVE directories if they do not
already exist.
❒ Create OFP, SYSKEY, SRIB and UPGRADE directories.
❒ Write over the old version’s program files with the same name, if
they exist.
The INSTALL program will NOT write over your archive files.
You may install the RSS on several personal computers and laptop
computers at a single site depending on the terms of your license. If you
have additional sites (such as a second shop), you should purchase
additional subscriptions.
Note: The RSS is NOT a Windows program. If you have Windows
loaded, the RSS program will not operate properly.
8
To install the RSS, follow the steps below:
1. Insert the RSS diskette into drive A.
2. Type A: (press Return).
3. At the A: prompt, type INSTALL.
Note: After installing the RSS on a hard disk, you may notice
new files with CFG or ODB extensions on your hard drive. These
are configuration files used by the system and the RSS. Do NOT
delete or move these files from the C:\MRSS\MCS directory.
RSS Start-Up Procedure
After installing the RSS on your hard disk, follow the start-up
procedure below:
1. Log on to the hard drive by typing C: and pressing Return.
2. At the C:\ prompt, type MCS.
This command starts up the RSS. If the software does not start up
correctly, you may hear a tone or see an error message or error code
printed on the display. If this happens, verify that the file MCS.BAT
appears under the root directory of Drive C.
9
The Banner Screen
When the RSS has been successfully loaded in your computer, you will
see a BANNER screen similar to the one below.
MOTOROLA
RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE
for the
MCS 2000
Radios
A
<VERSION>
<DATE>
25
Press Spacebar To Continue
(C) Copyright Motorola Inc. 1992 - 1996. All rights reserved.
The Version and Date on the BANNER screen above are not shown here.
However, your RSS will show the actual version and date on the screen.
Press any key at the BANNER screen to access the MAIN MENU.
10
Anatomy of a Menu
Within the RSS, there are menus that will take you to other menus
and/or to screens where you can change the choice or value of a field.
The only difference between a menu and a screen is the nature of the
information that appears in the working area, marked by the letter C in
the figure below. A menu or screen has four areas labelled below as A,
B, C and D respectively.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
B
No System Keys Found.
A
MAIN
MAIN MENU
---------
C
F1 - HELP
F2 - SERVICE: Alignment (Requires RIB)
F3 - GET/SAVE/PROGRAM/CLONE Codeplug Data from/to Disk/Radio
F4 - CHANGE/VIEW Radio Codeplug Data
F5 - PRINT Radio Codeplug Data
F6 - FILE Maintenance
F7 F8 - FLASHport Upgrade
F9 - SETUP Computer Configuration
F10 - Exit Radio Service Software, Return to DOS
F1
HELP
F2
SERVICE
MENU
F3
GET
SAVE
F4
CHANGE
VIEW
F5
PRINT
DATA
F6
FILE
MAINT
F7
D
F8
FLASHport
UPGRADE
F9
F10
SETUP EXIT
MENU TO DOS
A RSS Location ID Area
In this area, you will find the words “MOTOROLA Radio Service
Software” and a menu or screen path name for the current menu or
screen shown on the display.
B Instruction Area
As the name indicates, this area asks you to perform specific actions
such as “Select Function, F1-F10”, “Use UP/DOWN arrows to scroll
value” and so on.
C Working Area
This area of the menu (not a screen) displays a list of functions (menu
choices) that you can execute from the current menu. Each menu item
is preceded by a function key. Pressing a function key from among the
available choices advances you to another menu or screen as the case
may be.
D F-Key (Function Key) ID
This area displays the function keys and their corresponding names for
the current menu or screen.
Area
Note: All functions (supported and unsupported) will be
displayed in the menu’s working area. The unsupported
functions (based on the radio’s model or options) will, however,
NOT be displayed in the F-key area.
11
Navigating Through
The RSS
Every action of the RSS is controlled by you through the use of
formatted displays and function keys.
Under each menu or screen title in this manual, you will find a
sequence of F-keys (or function keys) such as DCE . This
sequence represents the path from the MAIN MENU to that specific
menu or screen. To access the desired menu or screen, simply press
these keys one by one from the MAIN MENU.
The F-keys and other special keys that you can use to communicate
with the RSS are listed below along with their various functions.
F1
Used to display on-help information on every RSS screen and menu.
On-line help provides information on how to use the currently
displayed menu, screen, line or field. You may also find system setup
information in a HELP screen. In many cases, help information
provided is for the specific line of the screen that is currently
highlighted.
F2 through F9
The F2 through F9 keys perform special functions and actions which
can vary from menu to menu and from screen to screen. For instance,
on some screens, F5 will print out the current screen to your printer, F8
will save the data and options currently displayed, and so on.
F10
This key is used to exit to the previous menu or screen. The F10 key
performs this function on every menu and screen. The only exceptions
are as follows:
❒ At the MAIN MENU, the F10 key is used to exit the RSS.
A
Esc
12
❒ In sub-menus of the PRINT MENU, the F10 key is used to cancel
printing if printing is in progress.
Used to exit to the MAIN MENU. The Esc key performs this function
on every menu and screen.
Anatomy of a
Screen
The only difference between a menu and a screen lies in the contents
of the working area.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Type.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:PERS
Personality........1
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY
------------------------
Receive Only..............Disabled
Direct / Talkaround........Enabled
Time Out Timer..........360
Scan List.....................None
Hot Keypad................Disabled
Phone Operation..........Unlimited
Frequency (MHz)
Squelch Type
Code
DPL Invert
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
PERS
F3
PREV
PERS
Receive
136.06250
CSQ
F4
NEXT
PERS
F5
DELETE
PERS
Signalling.................
MDC
MDC System #...................1
PTT ID..................Disabled
Transmit
136.01250
Disabled
F6
Direct
136.06250
Disabled
F7
F8
F9
MDC
PHONE
MORE
OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
The working area of a screen contains a list of programmable features
called “fields” the values in which can be selected or changed using the
arrow, Tab or Return keys. On some screens, there are features that can
be selected for each individual channel or mode; these features are
selected on a mode-by-mode basis. On other screens, there are features
that can be selected for all modes of the radio (referred to as “radiowide” features). And still other screens list those features that perform
specific RSS functions such as servicing the radio or printing
personality data.
13
Changing A Field
Value
The keys commonly used in the RSS to change a field value and their
respective functions are listed below.
Tab or Enter
Used to accept data currently in the field and move the prompt
forward one field. If the entry is not accepted (that is, it is probably not
a valid value), an error beep will sound.
Del
Used to erase the current character in a field.
PgUp
Used to display the previous page of information on the screen.
PgDn
Used to display the next page of information on the screen.
Screen fields come in three basic types:
Information fields
Non-editable fields which cannot be altered or changed.
Scrollable fields
Contain a range of values or several options from which you can select
the desired value/option. To edit or change a choice, use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys.
Direct-entry fields
The desired value must be typed in. To edit or change a choice, type in
an acceptable value.
Changing a field’s value is typically done either by scrolling through a
list of options (in scrollable fields) or by typing in a correct or
acceptable value (in direct-entry fields). Scrolling is accomplished
using the arrow keys.
14
Complete Menu
Mapping at a
Glance
The menu map below is a guide through the entire RSS.
MAIN MENU
A
B
HELP
SERVICE
C
GET/ SAVE/
PROGRAM
D
CHANGE/VIEW
E
PRINT MENU
Refer to the
following page
B
C
E
G
H
I
B
D
Clone Radio
Radio Programming History
Reference Oscillator
Tx Power
Tx Deviation Balance (Compensation)
Tx Deviation Limit
D
SECURE Tx Deviation
Tx Current Limit
D
E
G
Front-End Bandpass Filter
Rated Audio Calibration
Squelch Attenuator (12.5 kHz)
F
Squelch Attenuator (20 kHz)
C
D
G
H
I
RSSI Alignment
SECURE Rx Discriminator Level
VRM500 Rx Discriminator Level
DTMF
High-Speed
MDC-1200
H
I
Button, Switch, Menu Items
Phone Lists and Options
Scan Lists and Options
Display Options
Alarm Options
Trunking Radio Wide Options
Trunking Systems: System ID,
Control Channels, etc.
Trunking Personality: Talk Groups,
Emergency Options, etc.
Trunking Call List Data
Control Channels (UHF and VHF only)
Conventional Systems, Personalities, MDC,
Options
B
Squelch Attenuator (25/30 kHz)
Radio Wide Options
Trunking Systems, Personalities, Call Lists,
Options
B
C
Tx Deviation Limit: Reference
PC Configuration
Screen Color Configuration
Radio Wide Buttons, Switches, Display,
Scan, Phone
B
C
D
E
F
G
Program Data into Radio Codeplug
EXIT
TO
DOS
Delete Archive File
C
G
C
J
I
SETUP
Create Directory path
Get Codeplug Data From
Archive Disk File
Save Data to Archive Disk File
H
FLASHport
UPGRADE
Read Data From Radio Codeplug
Signalling Alignments
B
C
D
I
B
E
Receiver Alignments
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
G
FILE
MAINTENANCE
Transmitter Alignments
B
C
D
E
F
H
I
C
F
Conventional Radio Wide
Configuration
Conventional Personalities, Options
MDC Systems, Options
Auxiliary Systems
Conventional Message Alias List
Conventional Status Alias List
Zone/Channel Assignment
Radio Codeplug Data Summary
Controller Board Initialization Program
15
MAIN MENU
D
CHANGE/VIEW
C
Radio Wide Buttons, Switches, Display, Scan, Phone
B
Radio Wide Options
E
F
G
I
C
E
E
D
B
I
D
Switch Configuration
Menu Item List Configuration
DTMF Access/Deaccess Codes
Dial Options
H
Scan Options
Display Options
Alarm Options
Trunking Radio Wide Options
E
SmartZone Environment
VOC Options
Trunking Systems: System ID, Control Channels, etc.
F
Control Channel/Channel Assignment
More Options
Trunking Personality: Talk Groups, Emergency Options
G
H
I
Talkgroups
Emergency Options
More Options
G
VRM Options
Trunking Call List Data
Conventional Systems, Personalities, MDC, Options
Conventional Radio Wide Configuration
B
C
D
G
Conventional Personalities, Options
G
I
H
I
MDC Options
Conventional Personality Options
G
RAC Options
MDC Systems, Options, Call List
G
H
MDC Systems
MDC Call List Data
Auxiliary Systems
B
C
D
E
16
Button/Rotary Configuration
Trunking Systems, Personalities, Call Lists, Options
C
H
More Options
Scan Lists and Options
B
C
F
Emergency Options
Phone Lists and Options
H
I
E
SECURE Options
Buttons, Switches, Menu Items
B
C
D
D
VRM100 Options
Singletone System
Singletone List
Quik-Call II Systems
GE STAR Systems
Conventional Message Alias List
Conventional Status Alias List
Zone/Talkgroup (Channel) Assignment
Configuring
RSS Computer
Defaults
Setting computer defaults eliminates the need to specify them every
time you enter the RSS or program a radio.
Read this section if you wish to do any of the following:
❒ Set a default file path name
❒ Set or change the default port used to interface with the radio and
RIB
❒ Set the default colors you see on your RSS screen
To begin configuring RSS defaults, return to the MAIN MENU by
pressing the Esc button.
From the MAIN MENU, press F9 to access the SERVICE SOFTWARE
CONFIGURATION MENU. From the SERVICE SOFTWARE
CONFIGURATION MENU, you can read on-line help (F1), set some
default computer values, or exit (F10).
Press F3 on the SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU to
bring up the CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT screen, where you can
specify the default drive and path names for future archive files, as also
select the COM port that will be used to communicate with the radio.
Press F7 on the SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU to
display the SCREEN COLORS screen. Here, you can specify the colors
for your screen’s text, lines, background, and highlighted fields.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
MAIN:CONFIGURATION
SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
F2
HELP
PC CONFIGURATION, Drives, Paths, Ports, etc.
SCREEN Color Configuration
EXIT, Return To Main Menu
F3
F4
CONFIGURE
PC
F5
F6
F7
SCREEN
COLORS
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter Path Name.
MAIN:CONFIGURATION:PC
SCREEN COLORS
CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT
MONITOR TYPE . . . . . . . . . . Color
TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yellow
STATUS TEXT . . . . . . . . . . Yellow
MESSAGE TEXT . . . . . . . . White
HIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . Blue
FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
SELECTED TEXT . . . . . . . . Yellow
POPUP BACKGROUND . . Brown
Archive Path:....C:\MRSS\MCS\ARCHIVE
Site Path:....C:\MRSS\MCS\SITE
RIB...................................COM 1
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
Use UP/DOWN arrows to Select.
MAIN:CONFIGURATION:SCREEN COLORS
F5
F6
COM
TEST
F7
F8
SAVE
F9
F10
EXIT
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
SAVE
F9
F10
EXIT
17
Setting Default Archive and
Back-up Paths
You can set the drive name and path names for archive files you will
create later. Here’s how to set the default archive and back-up file
paths:
1. Press F9 and then F3 at the MAIN MENU to bring up the
CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT screen.
2. At the CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT screen, press Tab as many
times as necessary until the Archive Path field is highlighted. Now
specify the archive file path as follows:
C:\MRSS\MCS\ARCHIVE
3. Type F8 to save the field options displayed on the screen.
Setting a Default COM Port
Use the following steps to specify the serial port to interface with the
radio and RIB. The default port is COM 1.
1. Press F9 and then F3 at the MAIN MENU to bring up the
CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT screen.
2. Go to the serial port RIB field by pressing Tab five times.
3. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the available field options and
select the appropriate port. Options are COM 1, COM 2, COM 3 or
COM 4.
4. Test the port by pressing F6 COMTEST. If the connections are
okay, you will hear a beep and the words “Communication With
the Radio Was Successful” will appear in the instruction area.
5. Press F8 to save this configuration. The message “Configuration
File Written Successfully” will appear in instruction area of the
screen.
6. Press Esc to exit this screen and go to the MAIN MENU.
Exiting The RSS
Before you exit the RSS, always ask yourself these questions:
❒ Did you apply the changes to the radio (that is, save the changes
to the radio)?
❒ Did you apply the changes to a computer file (that is, save
programming to an archive file)?
If you are not at the MAIN MENU, press the Esc key to return to this
menu, and then press F10 followed by F2 to exit to the DOS prompt.
18
Main Menu
The MAIN MENU is the top level of the program from which all
function selections start. All selections are made using the function
keys which are labeled F1 through F10 on the keyboard. All other
menus allow you to press the Esc key to return to the MAIN MENU.
For any problems not covered by this manual or the Radio Service Manual,
contact your local Motorola field technical representative.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
No System Keys Found.
MAIN
MAIN MENU
--------F1 - HELP
F2 - SERVICE: Alignment (Requires RIB)
F3 - GET/SAVE/PROGRAM/CLONE Codeplug Data from/to Disk/Radio
F4 - CHANGE/VIEW Radio Codeplug Data
F5 - PRINT Radio Codeplug Data
F6 - FILE Maintenance
F7 F8 - FLASHport Upgrade
F9 - SETUP Computer Configuration
F10 - Exit Radio Service Software, Return to DOS
F1
F2
HELP SERVICE
MENU
F3
GET
SAVE
F4
CHANGE
VIEW
F5
PRINT
DATA
F6
FILE
MAINT
F7
F8
FLASHport
UPGRADE
F9
F10
SETUP EXIT
MENU TO DOS
Function Key Descriptions
F1 - HELP
Provides additional information on this screen. Generic help is
available within any help screen in the form of the MORE HELP
function.
F2 - SERVICE
A radio must be connected to your computer using a RIB and cables and the
radio turned on before you will be permitted to access the service screens.
Brings up a multi-level menu that enables access to screens from which
radio service alignments are performed.
Note: If the radio attached to the computer via the RIB is a CBIinitialized radio, you will have to initialize the controller board
and specify the serial number from the CONTROLLER BOARD
INITIALIZATION screen (F2/F9). This process must be
completed if the new CBI controller board is to function
properly.
F3 - GET/SAVE
Brings up a menu through the sub-menus of which you can read
codeplug data from a radio and/or retrieve archived codeplug data
from a diskette/hard disk. GET/SAVE functions are also used to
program edited codeplug data back into the radio and create archive
files on disk.
F4 - CHANGE/VIEW
A codeplug must be loaded into the computer’s memory using GET/SAVE
functions before CHANGE/VIEW functions can be accessed. Brings up a
multi-level menu that is used to change or view codeplug features and
option configurations.
19
Note: An archive file can be accessed without a radio being
connected.
F5 - PRINT MENU
Prints selected codeplug data.
F6 - FILE MAINTENANCE
Brings up a menu which allows you to easily create directories and
delete files without exiting the RSS.
F8 - FLASHport UPGRADE
You must have FLASHport software installed on your computer in order to
access this menu. Brings up a menu from which you can view the radio’s
configuration, its FLASHkey contents, upgrade the codeplug, and
FLASH the radio.
F9 - SETUP
Brings up a menu which is used to configure the RSS according to
specific user requirements. Default disk drives, communication ports
and even screen colors may be customized to suit your needs.
F10 - EXIT
Used to quit the program and return to DOS. You will have to press this
key and then F2 to actually exit the program.
Note: Make sure that all desired codeplug changes have been
programmed back to the radio and that an archive copy has
been made. If this is not done, all changes will be lost since DOS
erases this data from the computer’s memory when you exit the
program.
20
How to Read the
Codeplug
Follow the procedure below to read the codeplug:
1. Start up the RSS. If you are not already at the MAIN MENU, press
any key at the BANNER screen to access the MAIN MENU.
2. From the MAIN MENU, press F3; the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU
will be displayed.
You may read the codeplug from the radio or from the archive disk.
Reading Codeplug Data from
the Radio
Turn on the radio and press F2. A series of status messages will appear
in the upper right corner of the screen. The read process will take
approximately one minute, but may vary depending on the processing
power of your computer. After the codeplug is read, the GET/SAVE/
PROGRAM MENU will be displayed.
Note: If a communication error occurs, a pop-up window will be
displayed. If no errors occur, the center of the screen will display
the progress of the codeplug read activity.
Reading Disk Codeplug Files
Press F3 at the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU. The ARCHIVE FILE
screen will be displayed. An archive path and the list of files in that
path will be displayed. By default, the archive path will be the
corresponding path specified on the CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT
screen. If you want to retrieve a file from another path, press F2, type
in the path name and press Enter. The names of the files in the new
path will be displayed.
1. Use the Enter, Tab, Shift or arrow keys to highlight a desired file
name.
2. To retrieve the highlighted file, press F8. The selected file will be
retrieved, validated and placed in computer memory. The progress
of the read process will be displayed on the screen.
21
Service Software
Configuration
I
The SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION screen can be accessed by
pressing F9 at the MAIN MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:CONFIGURATION
SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
-----------------------------F1 - HELP
F2 F3 - PC CONFIGURATION: Drives, Paths, Ports, etc.
F4 F5 F6 F7 - SCREEN Color Configuration
F8 F9 F10 - Exit, Return to Main Menu
F1
HELP
F2
F3
CONFIGURE
PC
F4
F5
F6
F7
SCREEN
COLORS
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
From this screen, you may set up the paths for archive files. You may
also set up the serial port (COM 1, COM 2, COM 3 or COM 4) that will
be used to communicate with the radio.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - CONFIGURE PC
Brings up a screen where you may set default disk drive paths for
archive and back-up files. It is also used to select the asynchronous
communications port (COM 1, COM 2, COM 3 or COM 4) to which
the RIB will be connected. The RSS will automatically determine at
what clock speed the computer is operating. No user-selectable
parameters are required.
Note: Refer to the owner’s manual that came with your
computer for a completes description of path names and
asynchronous communication ports.
F7 - SCREEN COLORS
22
Brings up a screen where you may enable or disable the color display
option and specify colors for different parts of the RSS screen (if color
display is enabled). If the computer is capable of color display, viewing
quality is greatly enhanced. The standard default configuration for the
RSS is for a monochrome display.
Configuring Paths
and Port
IC
From the MAIN MENU, press F9 and then F3 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter Path.
MAIN:CONFIGURATION:PC
CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT
-----------------------Archive Path:....
FLASH Software Path:..C:\MRSS\MCS\UPGRADE
Bootstrap Code Path & FileName:.C:\MRSS\MCS\UPGRADE\MCSBOOT.ENC
SRIB Software Path & FileName:..C:\MRSS\MCS\SRIB\SMARTRIB.ENC
System Key:......
Speed Optimization........Enabled
Memory Optimization......Disabled
TCMS Path:.......
RIB...........COM 1
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
COM
TEST
F7
F8
SAVE
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to set default disk drive paths for archive and backup files. It is also used to select the asynchronous communications
port (COM 1, COM 2, COM 3 or COM 4) to which the RIB (radio
interface box) will be connected.
Note: Refer to the owner’s manual that came with your
computer for a complete description of directory path names
and asynchronous communications ports.
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - COM TEST
(Communications Test)
Verifies if the computer is set up correctly and is able to read and
program the radio codeplug properly. After your computer and RIB are
connected according to instructions on page 4 and you have selected
the appropriate communication port, turn on your radio and perform
a COM TEST by pressing F6.
COM TEST will verify if your system is functioning properly by
sending commands to the radio and checking for the proper response.
An OK response will be displayed in the Status Window if the system
checks okay. Otherwise, error messages will be displayed. Make sure
that all cables and power supplies are connected according to
instructions provided in this manual.
Note: No codeplug changes will result from these commands.
F8 - SAVE
Used to save configuration information to a file on your program disk.
Every time you use the RSS, the configuration that you saved last will
be used. The configuration file will be named MCS.CFG. This
configuration may be altered and saved at any time.
23
Field Definitions
Archive Path
Enter the default directory path where archive files are to be located.
The GET/SAVE – SAVE FILE function will default to this path.
Note: Refer to the owner’s manual that came with your
computer for a complete description of directories and path
names.
FLASH Software Path
Enter the default directory path where FLASHport Upgrade files are
located. The default path established by the MRSS installation
program is C:\MRSS\MCS\UPGRADE. In order to ensure a successful
FLASHport Upgrade, it is strongly recommended that none of the files
installed by the MRSS installation program be moved, overwritten by the
user, or renamed.
Prior to performing a FLASHport upgrade, MRSS displays the list of
files that exist in the path entered here. You will then be asked to select
the desired FLASHport Upgrade Software Kit and press F8 to start the
upgrade process. Errors such as “UNABLE TO OPEN THE SELECTED
UPGRADE FILE”, “FILE CHECKSUM ERROR, UNABLE TO OPEN THE
SELECTED UPGRADE FILE”, or “INCORRECT UPGRADE SOFTWARE
KIT” mean that the selected file can not be accessed, the selected file
has an invalid format (the file is not MRSS compatible), or the software
kit number in the file does not match the one on your FLASHKEY
respectively. In case of such errors, make sure the selected file is the
one that was shipped to you with your upgrade kit.
Bootstrap Code Path & File
Name
Enter the default directory path and the default name for this file. The
default path established for this file by the RSS is
C:\MRSS\MCS\UPGRADE\MCSBOOT.ENC.
SRIB Software Path & File Name
Enter the default directory path and the default name for the SRIB
software file. The default path established by the MRSS installation
program is C:\MRSS\MCS\SRIB, and the default file name is
SMARTRIB.ENC. In order to ensure a successful FLASHport Upgrade, it is
strongly recommended that none of the files installed by the MRSS
installation program be moved, overwritten by the user, or renamed. Errors
such as “UNABLE TO OPEN THE SRIB SOFTWARE FILE” or “SRIB
SOFTWARE CHECKSUM ERROR, UNABLE TO CONTINUE” mean that
the SRIB Software file can not be accessed, or that the file has an
invalid format (the file is not MRSS compatible). In case of such errors,
make sure that the file entered in this field is the one that was shipped
to you with your upgrade kit.
System Key
Enter the default DOS directory path where trunking system keys are
to be located.
Speed Optimization
This field is used to control Speed Optimization for the RSS. When
enabled, Speed Optimization allows the RSS to navigate through
screen/fields and to save codeplugs in less time. There should be no
adverse side effects in the codeplug output. However, if any undesired
values arise from changing this field, disable this feature and resave
the codeplug.
The factory default is Enabled.
24
Memory Optimization
This field is used to control Memory Optimization for the RSS. When
enabled, Memory Optimization performs a memory cleanup for
successive codeplug reads. This allows computers with a limited
amount of available Random Access Memory (RAM) to perform a
greater number of codeplug reads before experiencing possible system
problems. However, this feature will cause system delays in successive
reads while the RSS performs the optimization. If your computer has
greater than 8MB of total RAM memory, it is recommended that you
leave this feature disabled.
The factory default is Disabled.
TCMS Path
Enter the DEFAULT directory path from where TCMS Update files will
be retrieved. The GET/SAVE GET TCMS file function will default to this
path. Please refer to your computer owner's manual for a complete
description of directories and path names.
RIB
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the asynchronous
communications port (COM 1, COM 2, COM 3 or COM4) to which
the RIB (radio interface box) is connected. If you are not sure how your
computer is configured or if you have two asynchronous
communications ports, first select COM 1 and use the COM TEST (F6)
function to communicate with a radio. If the test fails, select COM 2
and repeat COM TEST. Repeat the same procedure for COM 3 and
COM 4. Make sure that all cables and power supplies are connected
according to instructions provided in this manual.
25
Setting Screen
Colors
IG
From the MAIN MENU, press F9 and then F7 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CONFIGURATION:SCREEN COLORS
SCREEN COLORS
-------------
MONITOR TYPE...................Color
TEXT.........................Black
STATUS TEXT..................Black
MESSAGE TEXT.................Black
HIGHLIGHT......................Red
BACKGROUND..............Light Gray
FRAME........................Black
SELECTED TEXT................Black
POPUP BACKGROUND..............Cyan
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
SAVE
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to select the type of display monitor that you are
using with your computer – Monochrome or Color. For proper color
operation, you must have a color monitor and the appropriate color
display interface card must be installed in your computer.
Note: Refer to the owner’s manual that came with your
computer and/or contact your computer dealer if you have
questions regarding the color capability of your system.
You may also further customize your screen by selecting colors for the
screen’s text, status line, message line, highlighted text, background,
frame, selected text and pop-up background.
Note: Screen configuration changes must be saved (F8) before
you exit this screen.
Function Key Description
F8 - SAVE
26
Used to save the configuration information to a file on your program
disk. Every time you use the RSS, the configuration that you saved last
will be used. This configuration may be altered and saved at any time.
Field Definitions
Monitor Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select either monochrome or color
display depending on the display capability of your monitor.
The default is Monochrome.
Text
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for screen
text.
The default is Light Gray.
Status Text
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for status text
which appears in the lower portion of the top right-side window.
The default is Light Gray.
Message Text
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for message
text which appears in the upper portion of the top right-side window.
The default is Light Gray.
Highlight
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for
highlighted screen text.
The default is Yellow.
Background
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for the screen
background.
The default is Black.
Frame
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for the screen
outline.
The default is Light Gray.
Selected Text
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for selected
text.
The default is Light Gray.
Pop-up Background
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for the
pop-up background.
The default is Black.
27
Notes
28
Basic Radio
Programming Tutorial
2
Now that the hardware and software installation is complete, the RSS
is up and running, and you are familiar with the RSS user interface,
you are ready to personalize a radio. This section will walk you
through the procedure of programming specific features into an MCS
2000 radio.
Programming a
Basic MCS 2000
Radio
The tutorial assumes that the RSS is up and running and that you are
at the MAIN MENU. (Refer to Section 1 for the RSS installation
procedure.) Remember that F1 displays help information about the
currently highlighted field or the current screen. Press F10 to back out
of the RSS one menu level at a time.
Desired Features
Assume that the following features are desired:
❒ Transmit/Receive frequencies
❒ Tone Private-Line/Digital Private-Line (TPL/DPL) codes
❒ Two scan lists
❒ Telephone Operation enabled (for full keypad models only)
Note: For the purpose of this tutorial, we will assume that factory
defaults are suitable for most parameter values.
Major Decisions Involved
To program the above features into the radio, the major decisions to
be made are:
1. Determine the desired number of personalities (channels).
2. Determine the feature systems you wish to use (basic, scan,
signalling, etc.).
3. Determine the desired features to program radio-wide (that is, for
all channels).
4. Determine the desired features to program for each personality
(individual channels only).
29
High-Level Programming
Flow
The overview of the flow of programming in this example is as follows:
1. Read the radio.
2. Assign button/switch functions that differ from factory defaults.
3. Create a second scan list. (List members must not be filled in at this
time.)
4. Set up the phone number list.
5. Create/configure conventional personalities.
6. Assign personalities to switch positions on the ZONE/CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENT screen (F4/F8).
7. Fill in scan lists with the desired zone/channel entries.
8. Program the radio.
This programming flow was chosen because it minimizes navigation
between screens.
Step-by-Step
Programming
Instructions
30
The directions in the rest of this chapter are designed to give you an
overview of the radio programming procedure. Use the sample charts
in this chapter to record the features that you wish to program into
your radio. Refer to Appendix G for a blank form you can use in future
when programming conventional radios.
Read Current Radio’s
Personality (Codeplug)
Before you can program the MCS 2000 radio, you must first read and
access the current radio’s personality (codeplug data). Follow these
steps to read the codeplug:
1. At the MAIN MENU, press F3 to bring up the GET/SAVE MENU.
2. Press F2 to retrieve the radio’s codeplug data. A radio must be
connected to your computer when you press F2. A status bar will keep
you updated as to how much of the codeplug has been read.
Program Radio-Wide
Features
After the radio's codeplug data has been read, you will be able to access
the CHANGE/VIEW MENU by pressing F4 at the MAIN MENU. You
can now program the features you want on a specific channel and the
ones you want to be common to all channels. First, program the
common (radio-wide) features as follows:
1. From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3 twice and then F2 to bring up
the BUTTON/ROTARY CONFIGURATION screen. The two-position
concentric switch (Conventional Feature) will be highlighted.
2. Press enter to select the button which you want to put Scan on.
Press “s” or use the UP/DOWN arrows keys until “Scan” appears.
3. Press F10 twice to bring up the RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION
MENU.
4. Press F5 to access the SCAN LIST screen. Scan List will be
highlighted.
5. Press F2 to add a second scan list. Scan List members can be added
after zone/channel assignments have been made.
When you are done, press F10 to return to the RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU.
Program the Phone List
Here’s how to program the phone list:
1. Press F4 at the RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU to bring up
the PHONE LIST AND OPTIONS screen.
2. Press Tab to advance the prompt to the Phone Num Display
Format field.
3. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select USA.
4. Press Tab to advance to the Phone Number field, type in the
desired phone number, and press Enter.
5. Press Enter to access the Phone Text field and type in the desired
name.
Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add as many phone numbers and names as
necessary.
When you’re done, press Esc to return to the MAIN MENU.
31
Program Conventional
Personalities
Follow these steps to program conventional personalities:
1. From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6 and then F3 to bring up the
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen.
2. Press F2 and then F3 as many times as necessary to add the desired
number of personalities. When you are done, press F4 to return to
Personality 1.
3. Press Tab to advance to the Scan List field. Use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to select “1”.
4. Press Tab to access the Phone Operation field. Use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to scroll for choices and select None, Unlimited or List
Only.
5. Press Tab as many times as necessary until the Rx Frequency field
is highlighted. Enter frequency data directly or use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to scroll through available choices.
6. Press Tab to go to the Rx Squelch Type field. Use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to select PL, DPL or CSQ.
7. Press Tab to advance the prompt to the Code field. Use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to scroll for choices, or enter the code directly.
8. Press Tab to advance the prompt to the Tx Frequency field. Enter
frequency data directly or use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select
the desired frequency.
9. Press Tab to advance the prompt to the Tx Squelch Type field. Use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select PL or DPL.
10. Press F4 to advance to the next personality.
Repeat steps 3 through 10 for additional personalities as necessary.
11. Press F10 twice to return to the CHANGE/VIEW MENU.
32
Program Zone/Channel
Features
Now that the personalities are programmed, assign them to switch
positions on the ZONE/TALKGROUP (CHANNEL) ASSIGNMENT
screen.
1. From the CHANGE/VIEW MENU, press F8 to access the ZONE/
TALKGROUP (CHANNEL) ASSIGNMENT screen.
2. Press F6 and then F3 as many times as necessary to add the desired
number of channels.
3. Press the Pg Dn key to return to page 1 if necessary.
4. Press Tab twice to go to the Channel Name field. Enter the desired
name. The name may be up to 11 characters in length but will vary
depending on the radio model.
5. Press Enter or Tab to advance to the Personality field. Use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to assign the desired Personality Type.
6. Press Tab to go to the Personality Number field. Enter the desired
Personality number directly or use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
scroll through the available choices.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the remaining channels.
Note: A maximum of 48 modes (channels) are allowed for model I MCS
2000 radios and 160 for HHCH models and models II and III.
More may be ordered through an option upgrade.
7. When you are done, press F10 to return to the CHANGE/VIEW
MENU.
Zones can be added on the ZONE/TALKGROUP (CHANNEL)
ASSIGNMENT screen by pressing F2. The channels in a particular zone
should be grouped in some logical way, based for instance on
geographical area or work group.
Note: Each zone must contain at least one channel.
Fill in the Scan List
Here’s how to fill in the scan list:
1. At the CHANGE/VIEW MENU, press F3 and then F5 to access the
SCAN LIST screen. If “1” is not already displayed for Scan List
number, press F3 to see the previous list. If “1” is displayed,
proceed.
2. Press Tab to advance the prompt to the Member Zone field. Type
in the zone number of the channel to be scanned. For the
purposes of this tutorial, type “1”. Press Enter to select this zone
number. The cursor will now be in the Channel field. Enter the
channel number to be scanned.
Repeat step 2 until all desired channels are entered.
3. If you have created more than one scan list, repeat this list for each
scan list.
When you are done, press Esc to return to the MAIN MENU.
33
Program Personality
Into Radio Codeplug
Now that you have set values for all the features you want, it is time to
actually program them into the radio. Program data into the radio’s
codeplug only after creating or editing the radio ‘s codeplug data. Otherwise,
the changes will be lost.
From the MAIN MENU, press F3 and then F8 to bring up the
PROGRAM RADIO screen. Make sure that the radio is connected to the RIB
and that both the RIB and the radio are powered up before pressing F8.
!
Caution
Program Personality
Into Archive and
Back-up Files
When programming or tuning a radio DO NOT
disconnect the radio from the RIB when the computer
is communicating with the radio. This action may leave
the radio in an inoperable state. Disconnect the radio
only when you are in the MAIN MENU or GET/SAVE
screens.
You have just saved the personality to the radio, but it is important to
save it on disk too. Below are the steps to save the radio's personality
to archive and back-up files.
1. Press F3 and then F7 from the MAIN MENU to bring up the SAVE
CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE FILE screen. This screen displays
the archive disk drive and path name, current model number,
current radio serial number and programming information.
2. You will be prompted for an archive file path name. Change the
path name if necessary.
3. Press F8 at the SAVE ARCHIVE FILE screen to save the data in the
archive file specified above.
34
Cloning Radios
Cloning is a process by which codeplug information is copied from
one radio to another or to multiple others. In order for one radio to be
cloned with information from another, they must be of the same
model type and version.
Radio codeplugs consist of both personality and tuning data. Cloning
allows you to “merge” two codeplugs. The result of the cloning process
will be an “image” that can be programmed into a radio and/or saved
to an archive file. This image will have the personality of the “source”
codeplug. However, the tuning data of the target codeplug will remain
unchanged.
The archive file or radio with the personality chosen for cloning
purposes is referred to as the “source file” or “source radio”. The other
radio is referred to as the “target radio”.
Cloning applies predominantly to conventional-only radios. In order to
clone trunked radios, you must have a system key for each of the trunked
systems programmed into the source radio on file. Most organizations that
program trunked radios will not have access to these keys. The process
for cloning conventional and trunked radios, however, is the same.
To clone a radio, you will have to:
❒ Read into the RSS the specific archive file you have chosen as the
“source” for cloning purposes
❒ Clone that source file into the current (target) radio's codeplug
❒ Clone the remaining radios in the same manner
Follow the procedure below to clone a radio:
1. Press F3 twice from the MAIN MENU to bring up the ARCHIVE
FILES screen. A list of file names will be displayed. These file names
reflect the serial numbers that the RSS found in the archive path
specified. The name of the file that you saved in the first tutorial
should appear in this list. If not, type in the correct archive path
name in the Archive field.
2. Press Tab until the desired file is highlighted.
3. Press F8 to retrieve the highlighted file.
4. Press F10 to return to the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU.
5. Assemble the hardware and connect the radio that you wish to
clone.
6. Press F5 at the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU to bring up the
CLONE MENU.
7. Press F2 to read the serial number from the target radio.
8. Press F8 to program the current codeplug data into the target
radio. The cloning process will automatically check for
compatibility of the two radios.
35
Note: You will receive an error message if cloning cannot be
performed for any reason. Check all connections or refer to
Appendix A for error codes and their explanations.
9. Once cloning is completed, make sure you are at the GET/SAVE/
PROGRAM MENU or MAIN MENU and then disconnect the radio.
!
Caution
When programming or tuning a radio DO NOT
disconnect the radio from the RIB when the computer
is communicating with the radio. This action may leave
the radio in an inoperable state. Disconnect the radio
only when you are in the MAIN MENU or GET/SAVE
screens.
Repeat steps 6 through 10 to clone additional radios as necessary.
Note: The IDs for MDC-1200, DTMF, etc. must be changed manually
if you want to have unique IDs. You may do this from
CHANGE/VIEW sub-menus immediately after cloning each
radio.
Exit the RSS
36
Press Esc to back up to the MAIN MENU. At the MAIN MENU, press
F10 and then F2 to exit to DOS.
Service Menu Functions
Servicing the Radio
Using the RSS
3
Now that the hardware and software installation is complete and the
RSS is up and running, you are ready to personalize the radio(s). The
following pages are constructed in such a manner that a qualified
service technician can keep a radio at full capability throughout its
design life by means of correct alignments and configurations.
Note: All functions (supported and unsupported) will be
displayed in the menu’s working area. The unsupported
functions (based on the radio’s model or options) will NOT be
displayed in the F-key ID area.
Menu Map
SERVICE
B
Transmitter Alignments
B
C
D
E
F
H
I
C
Tx Deviation Balance (Compensation)
Tx Deviation Limit
Tx Deviation Limit: Reference
SECURE Tx Deviation
Tx Current Limit
Front-End Bandpass Filter
Rated Audio Calibration
Squelch Attenuator (12.5 kHz)
Squelch Attenuator (20 kHz)
Squelch Attenuator (25/30 kHz)
RSSI Alignment
SECURE Rx Discriminator Level
VRM500 Rx Discriminator Level
Signalling Alignments
B
C
D
I
Tx Power
Receiver Alignments
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
D
Reference Oscillator
DTMF
High-Speed
MDC-1200
Controller Board Initialization Program
37
Service Menu
B
Press F2 at the MAIN MENU to access the SERVICE MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
Read Radio Completed Successfully.
MAIN:SERVICE
SERVICE MENU
-----------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
F2
TX
ALIGN
-
HELP
Transmitter Alignments
Receiver Alignments
Signalling Alignments
Controller Board Initialization Program
Exit, Return to Main Menu
F3
RX
ALIGN
F4
SIGNAL
ALIGN
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
BOARD
EXIT
INITIALIZE
All radio alignment and board replacement procedures are accessed
from this menu. A radio must be connected to your computer using a RIB
and cables and the radio turned on before you will be permitted to access the
service screens.
!
Caution
Do NOT switch radios in the middle of any SERVICE
procedure. Always use the EXIT function key (F10) to
return to the MAIN MENU before disconnecting the
radio. Improper exits from service screens may leave
the radio in an improperly configured state, resulting in
seriously degraded radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for detailed service procedures.
Note: If the radio connected to the RIB is a CBI-initialized radio and
you press F2, F3 or F4 in the SERVICE MENU, the RSS will display
the following pop-up message: “!!!Warning!!! You cannot read,
program, or tune a CBI radio until you initialize it.” Press F9 to
initialize the radio.
Note: If the radio connected to the RIB is NOT a CBI-initialized radio
and you press F9 from the SERVICE MENU, the RSS will display the
following pop-up message: “!!!Warning!!! The radio attached to
the RIB is not a CBI-initialized radio.”
38
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - Tx ALIGN
(Transmitter Alignment)
Used to perform standard radio transmitter alignment procedures.
Standard periodic alignment procedures are performed from this
menu.
Note: Radio compensation/deviation adjustments must be made
prior to performing the signalling deviation adjustment. No
adjustments are required for DPL, PL or Trunking Connect Tone
deviation.
The following alignment procedures must be performed whenever any
of the modulation circuitry is replaced:
❒ Modulation Balance
❒ Modulation Limit: VCO Attenuator
❒ Modulation Limit: Reference Attenuator
In addition, all signalling modulation limit alignments (DTMF, MDC,
Single Tone, SECURE and High Speed Trunking Data) should be
checked.
F3 - Rx ALIGN
(Receive Alignment)
Brings up a menu through the sub-menus of which you can perform
standard radio receive alignment procedures.
F4 - SIGNAL ALIGN
(Signalling Alignment)
Brings up a menu through the sub-menus of which you can perform
deviation alignment for DTMF, Trunking and MDC signalling.
F9 - BOARD INITIALIZE
(Controller Board Initialization
Program)
This screen can be accessed only when a CBI-programmed radio is connected
to the computer via the RIB. Brings up the CONTROLLER BOARD
INITIALIZATION screen where you can transfer codeplug information
from the computer to the radio codeplug.
Note: A CBI radio and RIB must be properly connected to the
computer and the power turned on before you press F9.
Note: If the radio connected to the RIB is NOT a CBI-initialized
radio and you press F9 from the SERVICE MENU, the RSS will
display the following pop-up message: “!!!Warning!!! The radio
attached to the RIB is not a CBI-initialized radio.”
!
Caution
Transmitter, Receiver and Signalling Alignment AND
CBI Initialization procedures should be attempted only
by qualified service personnel. Failure to perform
alignment procedures properly may result in a seriously
degraded radio or system performance. Refer to your
Radio Service Manual for detailed service procedures.
39
Transmitter
Alignment Menu
BB
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 twice to access the TRANSMITTER
ALIGNMENT MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
...SERVICE:TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU
TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU
-------------------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
-
F2
REF
OSC
HELP
Reference Oscillator
Tx Power
Tx Deviation Balance (Compensation)
Tx Deviation Limit
Tx Deviation Limit: Reference
Secure Tx Deviation
Tx Current Limit
Exit, Return to Service Menu
F3
TX
PWR
F4
DEV
BAL
F5
DEV
LIMIT
F6
REF
ATTEN
F7
F8
SECURE
DEV
F9
CUR
LIMIT
F10
EXIT
Standard periodic alignment procedures are performed from this
menu. Refer to your Radio Service Manual for alignment procedures.
The following alignment procedures must be performed every time
the modulation circuitry is replaced:
❒ Modulation Balance
❒ Modulation Limit: VCO Attenuator
❒ Modulation Limit: Reference Attenuator
In addition, signalling deviation for DTMF, MDC, Single Tone,
SECURE and High-Speed Trunking Data should be checked every time
the radio is serviced. Prior to adjusting signalling deviation, radio
compensation/deviation adjustments must be made. No adjustments
are required for DPL, PL or Trunking Connect Tone Deviation.
!
Caution
40
These procedures should be attempted only by
qualified service personnel. Failure to perform
alignment procedures properly may result in seriously
degraded radio or system performance.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - REF OSC
(Reference Oscillator Alignment)
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Reference Oscillator
Alignment procedure. This procedure should be attempted only by
qualified service personnel.
F3 - Tx PWR
(Transmit Power Alignment)
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmitter Power
Alignment procedure. This procedure should be attempted only by
qualified service personnel.
F4 - DEV BAL
(Transmit Deviation Balance
[Compensation] Alignment)
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmit Deviation Balance
(Compensation) Alignment procedure. This procedure should be
attempted only by qualified service personnel.
F5 - DEV LIMIT
(Transmit Deviation Limit
Alignment)
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmit Deviation Limit
Alignment procedure. This procedure should be attempted only by
qualified service personnel.
F6 - REF ATTEN
(Reference Softpot)
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmitter Deviation Limit
Alignment Reference Softpot procedure. This procedure should be
attempted only by qualified service personnel.
F8 - SECURE DEV
(SECURE Transmit Deviation)
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the SECURE Transmit
Deviation Alignment procedure. This procedure should be attempted only
by qualified service personnel.
F9 - CUR LIMIT
(Transmit Current Limit)
This screen can be accessed only for VHF and UHF frequency band models.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmit Current Limit
procedure. This procedure should be attempted only by qualified service
personnel.
41
Reference
Oscillator
Alignment
BBB
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 three times to bring up the
REFERENCE OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...REFERENCE OSCILLATOR
REFERENCE OSCILLATOR
-------------------Frequency
--------177.9875
Current Value
------------155
New Softpot Value.....155
Transmitter..Off
0
255
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+X---+----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
This alignment is required immediately after the radio’s RF Board is serviced
or replaced. This alignment procedure warps the radio’s reference
oscillator (reference frequency).
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Reference Frequency
Alignment procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Key the radio by pressing F6 and then use the UP/DOWN arrow
keys to increase/decrease the frequency respectively. (A threeminute time-out timer is enabled when the radio is keyed.) The
radio’s RF output must be terminated into a 50 ohm load. To
increase the adjustment speed, use the Shift-UP/DOWN arrow
keys.
2. The radio will transmit on the Test Mode 1 frequency. A relative
adjusted value will be displayed on the status bar, but you must
determine the actual transmitter frequency from the frequency
counter or the service monitor.
3. Press F6 to de-key the radio and then press F8 to program the
selected value into the radio.
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definition
New Softpot Value
42
This is the working value of the Reference Frequency (Reference Oscillator). The status bar shows the relation of the setting to the minimum and maximum settings.
Transmit Power
Alignment
BBC
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 twice and then F3 to access the
TRANSMIT POWER ALIGNMENT screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...TRANSMIT POWER
TRANSMIT POWER
-------------Current Value
New Softpot Value
Frequency High Pwr Low Pwr
High Pwr Low Pwr
--------- -------- -------------- ------136.0125
36
61
36
61
144.0125
34
61
34
61
154.0125
30
61
30
61
160.0125
29
61
29
61
167.5125
26
61
26
61
173.9875
24
61
24
61
177.9875
22
61
Transmitter..Off
22
61
0
63
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+---X+----+----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Transmit Power Alignment is required after replacing (or servicing) the RF
Board. This alignment limits the RF power from the radio and must be
performed at multiple frequencies to allow for proper alignment
across the entire RF band. The RF band is divided into frequency
zones with a calibration point (value) in each zone.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmitter Power
Alignment procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Press F6 at the TRANSMIT POWER screen to key up the radio. (The
radio’s RF output must be terminated into a 50 ohm load.)
2. While transmitting, modify the Tx power softpot setting using the
UP/DOWN arrow keys. To increase the adjustment speed, use the
Shift-UP/DOWN arrow keys.
3. A relative Tx power value will be displayed, but you must
determine the actual transmitter power output from the service
monitor.
4. Press F6 to de-key the radio and Tab to move between frequency
points.
5. Press F8 to save the new value.
43
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definitions
New Softpot Value High Pwr
This is the high power attenuation (softpot) for this frequency. The
status bar shows this setting in relation to the minimum and maximum settings. This value determines the amount of attenuation, not the
actual level of transmitted power.
New Softpot Value Low Pwr
This is the low power attenuation (softpot) for this frequency. The
status bar shows this setting in relation to the minimum and
maximum settings. This value determines the amount of attenuation, not
the actual level of transmitted power.
44
Transmit Deviation
Balance Alignment
BBD
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 twice and then F4 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
.TRANSMIT DEVIATION BALANCE (COMPENS)
TRANSMIT DEVIATION BALANCE (COMPENSATION)
----------------------------------------Current
Frequency Value
New Softpot Value
--------- ----------------------136.0125
32
32
144.0125
32
32
154.0125
32
32
160.0125
32
32
167.5125
31
31
173.9875
29
29
177.9875
30
Transmitter..Off
30
0
63
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----X----+----+----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Balanced Attenuator Alignment is required after replacing (or servicing) the
Controller Board or the RF Board. Balanced attenuator alignment
balances the modulation contributions of the low and high frequency
portions of a baseband signal.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Proper compensation alignment is critical to the
operation of signalling schemes that have very low
frequency components (DPL for instance) and could
result in distorted waveforms if improperly adjusted.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmit Deviation Balance
Alignment (Compensation) procedure. This procedure needs to be
performed at multiple frequencies to allow for proper alignment across
the entire RF band. The transmit and receive bands are divided into
frequency zones with a calibration point (value) in each zone.
Compensation alignment will be automatically calculated when you
perform this procedure.
45
Programming Procedure
1. Press F6 to key up the radio. (The radio’s RF output must be
terminated into a 50 ohm load.)
2. Apply the appropriate signal according to instructions in your
Radio Service Manual.
3. While transmitting, modify the Balance Attenuator setting using
the UP/DOWN arrow keys. To increase the adjustment speed, use
the Shift-UP/DOWN arrow keys.
4. A relative Tx power value will be displayed, but you must
determine the actual transmitter power output from the service
monitor.
5. Press F6 to de-key the radio and Tab to move between frequency
points.
6. Press F8 to save the new value.
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definition
New Softpot Value
46
This is the balance value for this frequency. The status bar shows the
relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum
settings.
Transmit Deviation
Limit Alignment
BBE
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 twice and then F5 to access the
TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT
TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT
-----------------------Current
Value
------176
177
177
177
177
179
178
Frequency
--------136.0125
144.0125
154.0125
160.0125
167.5125
173.9875
177.9875
New Softpot Value
----------------176
177
177
177
177
179
178
Transmitter..Off
0
255
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+X---+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
VCO Attenuator Alignment is required after replacing (or servicing) the
Controlled Board or the RF Board. This alignment procedure limits the
modulation of a baseband signal. It is used for primary modulation
limiting. This procedure needs to be performed at multiple frequencies
to allow for proper alignment across the entire RF band. The RF band
is divided into frequency zones with a calibration point (value) in each
zone.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmit Deviation Limit
Alignment procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Press F6 to key up the radio. (The radio’s RF output must be
terminated into a 50 ohm load.)
2. Apply the appropriate signal according to instructions in your
Radio Service Manual.
3. While transmitting, modify the Balance Attenuator setting using
the UP/DOWN arrow keys. To increase the adjustment speed, use
the Shift-UP/DOWN arrow keys.
4. A relative Tx power value will be displayed, but you must
determine the actual transmitter power output from the service
monitor.
5. Press F6 to de-key the radio and Tab to move between frequency
points.
6. Press F8 to save the new value.
47
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definitions
New Softpot Value
48
This is the VCO softpot value for this frequency. The status bar shows
the relationship between this setting and the minimum and
maximum settings.
Transmit Deviation
Limit Alignment:
Reference Softpot
BBF
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 twice and then F6 to access the
TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT: REFERENCE SOFTPOT screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
..TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT: REFERENCE
TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT: REFERENCE
----------------------------------Current Value
Channel Spacing
--------------20kHz.......114
12.5kHz..... 87
Frequency
--------177.9875
New Softpot Value
Channel Spacing
--------------20kHz.......114
12.5kHz..... 87
Transmitter..Off
0
127
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+--X-+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Reference Attenuator Alignment is required after replacement or servicing of
the Controller Board or the RF Board. This alignment procedure limits the
modulation of the baseband signal. It is used for secondary
modulation limiting.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmit Deviation Limit
Alignment: Reference Softpot procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Press F6 to key up the radio. (The radio’s RF output must be
terminated into a 50 ohm load.)
2. Apply the appropriate signal according to instructions in your
Radio Service Manual.
3. While transmitting, modify the Reference Attenuator setting using
the UP/DOWN arrow keys. To increase the adjustment speed, use
the Shift-UP/DOWN arrow keys.
4. A relative Tx power value will be displayed, but you must measure
the actual transmitter deviation from the service monitor.
5. Press F6 to de-key the radio and Tab to move between frequency
points.
6. Press F8 to save the new values.
49
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definitions
New Softpot Value
This is the softpot value for this frequency. The status bar shows the
relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum
settings.
20 kHz
This is the working Reference Attenuator value. The status bar shows
the relationship between this setting and the minimum and
maximum settings.
12.5 kHz
This is the working Reference Attenuator value. The status bar shows
the relationship between this setting and the minimum and
maximum settings.
50
SECURE Transmit
Deviation
BBH
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 twice and then F8 to access the
SECURE TRANSMIT DEVIATION screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...SECURE TRANSMIT DEVIATION
SECURE TRANSMIT DEVIATION
------------------------Frequency
--------136.0125
Current Value
------------110
New Softpot Value.....110
Transmitter..Off
0
127
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+X---+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Secure Transmit Deviation should be checked whenever the radio is serviced
and must be adjusted after any modulation circuitry is replaced.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the SECURE Transmit
Deviation procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function
key.
2. If a field is selected, press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the
desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definitions
New Softpot Value
This is the softpot value for SECURE Transmit Deviation. The status
bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and
maximum settings.
51
Transmit Current
Limit
BBI
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 twice and then F9 to access the
TRANSMIT CURRENT LIMIT screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...CURRENT LIMIT
CURRENT LIMIT
------------Frequency
--------177.9875
Current Value
------------27
0
New Softpot Value
----------------27
(
> 14.5V)
(11.9-14.5V)
(
< 11.9V)
Transmitter..Off
0
63
MIN |----+----+----+----+----X----+----+----+----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
800/900 MHz Models Only
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...CURRENT LIMIT
CURRENT LIMIT
------------Frequency
--------136.0125
144.0125
154.0125
160.0125
167.5125
173.9875
177.9875
Current Value
------------38
38
38
38
38
38
38
New Softpot Value
----------------38
38
38
38
38
38
38
Transmitter..Off
0
63
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+X---+----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
UHF/VHF Models Only
Transmit Current Limit should be checked every time the RF Board is
replaced. This alignment procedure limits the transmitter current
drain of the radio.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmit Current Limit
Alignment procedure.
52
Programming Procedure
1. Press F6 to key up the radio. (The radio’s RF output must be
terminated into a 50 ohm load.)
2. While transmitting, measure the current drain on the first test
frequency.
3. Press F6 to de-key the radio.
4. Use the Tab key to move to the next frequency point and measure
the current again.
Repeat the above steps for each frequency.
5. Select the frequency which has the highest current reading using
the Tab key.
6. While transmitting, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to adjust the
Transmit Current Limit according to instructions in the Radio
Service Manual. This procedure needs to be performed only on a single
frequency since all other frequencies will be adjusted automatically.
7. Press F8 to save the new values.
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
Note: All new softpot values will be updated with values
programmed into the radio.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definitions
New Softpot Value
This is the current limit softpot which limits the amount of transmit
current drain at any frequency across the band. It should be tuned at
the test frequency resulting in the highest current at rated output
power for optimal performance. Therefore, output power should be
tuned first. The status bar shows the current setting in relation to the
minimum and maximum settings.
53
Receive Alignment
Menu
BC
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 and then F3 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:SERVICE:RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU
RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU
----------------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
-
F1
F2
HELP FRONT END
FILT ALGN
HELP
Front End Bandpass Filter
Rated Audio Calibration
Squelch Attenuator (12.5kHz)
Squelch Attenuator (20kHz)
Squelch Attenuator (25/30kHz)
RSSI Alignment
Secure Rx Discriminator Level
VRM500 Rx Discriminator Level
Exit, Return to Service Menu
F3
AUDIO
F4
F5
F6
F7
SQUELCH SQUELCH SQUELCH RSSI
12.5kHz 20kHz
25/30kHz ALGN
F8
F9
SECURE VRM500
DISCR
F10
EXIT
Standard periodic receiver alignment procedures are performed from
this menu. Refer to your Radio Service Manual for Receive Alignment
procedures.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - F9
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for these alignment procedures. Do
NOT attempt these procedures unless you are a qualified service person.
Note: The VRM500 Rx DISCRIMINATOR LEVEL screen can be
accessed only if the current radio model is VRM500-capable.
54
Front-End Filter
Alignment
BCB
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F3 and then F2 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...FRONT END FILTER (VHF & UHF ONLY)
FRONT END FILTER (VHF & UHF ONLY)
--------------------------------Current
Value
New Softpot Value
----------------------20
20
25
25
33
33
38
38
47
47
56
56
60
60
Frequency
--------136.0625
144.0625
154.0625
160.0625
167.5625
173.9375
177.9375
0
63
MIN |----+----+----+---X+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
This alignment procedure is required every time the RF Board is replaced or
serviced. This alignment adjusts the corner frequencies of an RF frontend bandpass filter. It needs to be performed at multiple frequencies to
allow for proper alignment across the entire RF band. The RF band is
divided into frequency zones with a calibration point (value) in each
zone.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Front-End Filter Alignment
procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Apply the appropriate RF signal to the radio.
2. Modify the Rx Front End Filter Softpot setting using the UP/
DOWN arrow keys.
3. Use the Tab key to move between frequency points.
4. Press F8 to save the new values.
Function Key Descriptions
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definition
New Softpot Value
This is the softpot value for this frequency. The status bar shows the
relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum
settings.
55
Rated Audio
Alignment
BCC
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F3 and then F3 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
..RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU:RATED AUDIO
RATED AUDIO
----------Frequency
--------167.5625
Current Value
------------Std. Audio.......230
New Softpot Value
----------------Std. Audio.......230
0
255
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+---X+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
This alignment is required every time the Controller Board or the RF Board
is replaced or serviced. This procedure adjusts for rated audio power
across the radio speaker.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Rated Audio Calibration
procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Apply the appropriate RF signal to the radio.
2. Modify the Rated Audio Volume Softpot setting using the UP/
DOWN arrow keys.
3. Press F8 to save the new values.
Function Key Descriptions
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definition
New Softpot Value
This is the softpot value for this frequency. The status bar shows the
relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum
settings.
Std. Audio
This is the working rated volume softpot value. The status bar shows
the relationship between this setting and the minimum and
maximum settings.
56
Squelch Attenuator
(12.5 kHz)
Alignment
BCD
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F3 and then F4 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...SQUELCH (12.5kHz)
SQUELCH (12.5kHz)
----------------Current
Value
------63
63
63
38
38
38
38
Frequency
--------136.0625
144.0625
154.0625
160.0625
167.5625
173.9375
177.9375
New Softpot Value
----------------63
63
63
38
38
38
38
0
63
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----X MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Rx Squelch Alignment is required every time the Controller Board or RF Board
is serviced or replaced. This screen allows you to adjust the squelch level
for each test mode frequency and adjust the RF level at which squelch
break will occur.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
This procedure needs to be performed at multiple frequencies to allow
for proper alignment across the entire RF band. The RF band is divided
into frequency zones with a calibration point (value) in each zone.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Squelch Attenuator (12.5
kHz) Alignment procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Apply the appropriate RF signal to the radio.
2. Modify the Squelch Attenuator setting using the UP/DOWN arrow
keys.
3. Use the Tab key to move between frequency points.
4. Press F8 to save the new values.
Function Key Descriptions
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definition
New Softpot Value
This is the working squelch attenuator value for this frequency. The
status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the
minimum and maximum settings.
57
Squelch Attenuator
(20 kHz) Alignment
BCE
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F3 and then F5 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...SQUELCH (20kHz)
SQUELCH (20kHz)
--------------Current
Value
------63
63
63
38
38
38
38
Frequency
--------136.0625
144.0625
154.0625
160.0625
167.5625
173.9375
177.9375
New Softpot Value
----------------63
63
63
38
38
38
38
0
63
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----X MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Rx Squelch Alignment is required every time the Controller Board or RF Board
is serviced or replaced. This screen allows you to adjust the squelch level
for each test mode frequency and adjust the RF level at which squelch
break will occur.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
This procedure needs to be performed at multiple frequencies to allow
for proper alignment across the entire RF band. The RF band is divided
into frequency zones with a calibration point (value) in each zone.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Squelch Attenuator (20
kHz) Alignment procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Apply the appropriate RF signal to the radio.
2. Modify the Squelch Attenuator setting using the UP/DOWN arrow
keys.
3. Use the Tab key to move between frequency points.
4. Press F8 to save the new values.
Function Key Description
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definition
New Softpot Value
58
This is the squelch attenuator value for this frequency. The status bar
shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and
maximum settings.
Squelch Attenuator
(25/30 kHz)
Alignment
BCF
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F3 and then F6 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...SQUELCH (25/30kHz)
SQUELCH (25/30kHz)
-----------------Current
Value
------63
63
63
38
38
38
38
Frequency
--------136.0625
144.0625
154.0625
160.0625
167.5625
173.9375
177.9375
New Softpot Value
----------------63
63
63
38
38
38
38
0
63
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----X MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Rx Squelch Alignment is required every time the Controller Board or RF Board
is serviced or replaced. This screen allows you to adjust the squelch level
for each test mode frequency and adjusts the RF level at which squelch
break will occur.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
This procedure needs to be performed at multiple frequencies to allow
for proper alignment across the entire RF band. The RF band is divided
into frequency zones with a calibration point (value) in each zone.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Squelch Attenuator (25/30
kHz) Alignment procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Apply the appropriate RF signal to the radio.
2. Modify the Squelch Attenuator setting using the UP/DOWN arrow
keys.
3. Use the Tab key to move between frequency points.
4. Press F8 to save the new values.
Function Key Description
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Program the selected value into the radio.
Field Definition
New Softpot Value
This is the squelch attenuator softpot value for this frequency. The
status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the
minimum and maximum settings.
59
RSSI Alignment
BCG
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F3 and then F7 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU:RSSI ALGN
RSSI ALIGNMENT
--------------
Frequency
--------177.9375
DEFAULT RSSI.....101
RSSI...............0
Current Value
------------95
New Softpot Value
----------------95
RSSI ( -100 dBm )
0
127
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+---X+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
READ
RSSI
F5
F6
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the RSSI Alignment procedure. This
alignment procedure tunes the Received Signal Strength Indication
(that is, strength of the RSSI value for the current signal) for RSSI rated
audio power across the radio. It should be performed at -100dbm 3kHz
injection.
!
Caution
Programming Procedure
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
1. Press F4 to read the RSSI value. Repeat this step three times to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Program the radio with the new RSSI value by pressing F8.
Function Key Description
F4 - READ RSSI
Reads the Received Signal Strength Indication (that is, the strength of
the RSSI value for the current signal).
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Program the selected value into the radio.
Field Definitions
RSSI
(Received Signal Strength
Indication)
Refers to the strength of the RSSI value for the current signal. In the
RSSI sampling scheme, RSSI values are separated into four levels: poor,
acceptable, good and excellent. The value in this field specifies the
poor/acceptable boundary and may range between 0 and 127.
The default is 0 (zero).
New Softpot Value
60
This is the softpot value for this frequency. The status bar shows the
relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum
settings.
SECURE Receive
Discriminator Level
BCH
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F3 and then F8 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...SECURE RECEIVE DISCRIMINATOR LEVEL
SECURE RECEIVE DISCRIMINATOR LEVEL
---------------------------------Frequency
--------136.0625
Current Value
------------81
New Softpot Value..... 81
0
127
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+--X-+----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the SECURE Receive
Discriminator Level procedure.
!
Caution
Programming Procedure
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
1. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function
key.
2. If a field is selected, press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the
desired choice or value.
Function Key Description
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Program the selected value into the radio.
Field Definition
New Softpot Value
This softpot value determines the SECURE signal level at the
discriminator. The status bar shows the relationship between this
setting and the minimum and maximum settings.
61
VRM500 Receive
Discriminator Level
BCI
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F3 and then F9 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...VRM500 RX DISCRIMINATOR LEVEL
VRM500 RX DISCRIMINATOR LEVEL
----------------------------Frequency
--------136.0625
Current Value
------------81
New Softpot Value..... 81
0
127
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+--X-+----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed from the RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU only
if the current radio model is VRM500-capable. Refer to your Radio Service
Manual for the VRM500 Receive Discriminator Level procedure. This
procedure tunes the receive level signal at the receive data pin for use
with the VRM500. This is done to ensure proper input levels for the
VRM500 unit.
!
Caution
Programming Procedure
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
1. Generate a 1 kHz wave at the carrier frequency shown. (Refer to
the Radio Service manual for the correct deviation to use.)
2. Measure the receive signal level at the receive data pin on the
accessory connector.
3. While generating, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to adjust the
VRM500 receive signal according to instructions in the Radio
Service manual.
4. Press F8 to program the new value into the radio.
Function Key Description
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Program the selected value into the radio.
Field Definition
New Softpot Value
62
This softpot value determines the VRM500 receive signal level at the
receive data pin on the accessory connector. The status bar shows the
relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum
settings.
Signalling
Alignment Menu
BD
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 and then F4 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
...SERVICE:SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU
SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU
------------------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
-
F2
DTMF
ALIGN
HELP
DTMF
High Speed
MDC 1200
Exit, Return to Service Menu
F3
HIGH
SPEED
F4
MDC
1200
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
Standard periodic receiver alignment procedures are performed from
this menu. Signalling deviation should be checked any time the radio is
serviced and must be adjusted whenever any of the modulation circuitry has
been replaced.
Note: All radio compensation/deviation adjustments must be
made before adjusting signalling deviation.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - F4
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for these alignment procedures.
63
DTMF Transmit
Deviation
BDB
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F4 and then F2 to access the DTMF
TRANSMIT DEVIATION screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...DTMF TRANSMIT DEVIATION
DTMF TRANSMIT DEVIATION
----------------------Frequency
--------136.01250
Current Value
------------21
New Softpot Value..... 21
Transmitter..Off
0
31
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----X----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
DTMF deviation should be checked every time the radio is serviced and must
be adjusted whenever the Controller Board or RF Board is replaced. It is also
required following Modulation balance and Modulation Limit (VCO or
Reference) alignments.
Note: All radio compensation/deviation adjustments must be
made before adjusting DTMF deviation.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the DTMF Transmit Deviation
Alignment procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Press F6 to key up the radio. (The radio’s RF output must be
terminated into a 50 ohm load.)
2. While transmitting, modify the DTMF Attenuator setting using
the UP/DOWN arrow keys.
3. Press F6 to de-key the radio.
4. Press F8 to save the new values.
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definitions
New Softpot Value
64
This is the working DTMF Attenuator value. The status bar shows the
relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum
settings.
Transmit
Signalling: High
Speed
BDC
From the MAIN MENU, press F2, F4 and then F3 to access the
TRANSMIT SIGNALLING: HIGH SPEED screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...TRANSMIT SIGNALLING: HIGH SPEED
TRANSMIT SIGNALLING: HIGH SPEED
------------------------------Frequency
--------136.01250
Current Value
------------17
New Softpot Value..... 17
Transmitter..Off
0
31
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+-X--+----+----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
Transmit Signalling: High Speed should be checked any time the radio is
serviced and must be adjusted whenever any of the modulation circuitry is
replaced. It is also required following Modulation balance and Modulation
Limit (VCO or Reference) alignments. This alignment procedure limits
the modulation of the Trunking: High Speed signal.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the Transmit Signalling: High
Speed procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Press F6 to key up the radio. (The radio’s RF output must be
terminated into a 50 ohm load.)
2. While transmitting, modify the High Speed Attenuator setting
using the UP/DOWN arrow keys.
3. Measure the actual Tx deviation with a service monitor.
4. Press F8 to save the new values.
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
Field Definitions
New Softpot Value
This is the working High Speed Attenuator value. The status bar shows
the relationship between this setting and the minimum and
maximum settings.
65
Transmit Signalling:
MDC-1200
BDD
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 and then F4 twice to access the DTMF
TRANSMIT SIGNALLING: MDC 1200 screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot.
...TRANSMIT SIGNALLING: MDC 1200
TRANSMIT SIGNALLING: MDC 1200
----------------------------Frequency
--------136.01250
Current Value
------------21
New Softpot Value..... 21
Transmitter..Off
0
31
MIN |----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----X----+----+----+----| MAX
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TOGGLE
PTT
F7
F8
PROGRAM
VALUE
F9
F10
EXIT
MDC deviation should be checked any time the radio is serviced and must
be adjusted whenever any of the modulation circuitry has been replaced. It is
also required following Modulation balance and Modulation Limit (VCO or
Reference) alignments. This alignment procedure limits the modulation
of a MDC-1200 signal.
Note: All radio compensation/deviation adjustments must be
made before adjusting MDC deviation.
!
Caution
This procedure should be attempted only by qualified
service personnel. Failure to perform alignment
procedures properly may result in seriously degraded
radio or system performance.
Refer to your Radio Service Manual for the MDC Signalling Deviation
Alignment procedure.
Programming Procedure
1. Press F6 to key up the radio. (The radio’s RF output must be
terminated into a 50 ohm load.)
2. While transmitting, modify the High Speed Attenuator setting
using the UP/DOWN arrow keys.
3. Measure the actual Tx deviation with a service monitor.
4. Press F6 to de-key the radio.
5. Press F8 to save the new values.
Function Key Descriptions
F6 - TOGGLE PTT
Alternately keys and de-keys the radio being serviced.
F8 - PROGRAM VALUE
Programs the selected value into the radio.
66
Field Definitions
New Softpot Value
This is the working MDC-1200 Attenuator value. The status bar shows
the relationship between this setting and the minimum and
maximum settings.
67
Controller Board
Initialization
BI
From the MAIN MENU, press F2 and then F9 to access the
CONTROLLER BOARD INITIALIZATION screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
MAIN:SERVICE:CBI
CONTROLLER BOARD INITIALIZATION
------------------------------Serial Number............###ABC?###
Model Number...........XXXXXXXXXXXX
FLASHcode.............XXXXX-XXXXX-X
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
PROGRAM
RADIO
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed from the SERVICE MENU only when a CBIprogrammed radio is connected to the computer via the RIB. If not, the RSS
will display an error message. This screen allows you to transfer codeplug
information from the computer to the radio codeplug. Enter a valid
serial number and press F8 to proceed.
Note: A CBI radio and RIB must be properly connected to the
computer and the power turned on before you press F8.
Note: If the radio connected to the RIB is NOT a CBI-initialized
radio and you press F9 from the SERVICE MENU, the RSS will
display the following pop-up message: “!!!Warning!!! The radio
attached to the RIB is not a CBI-initialized radio.”
!
Caution
68
DO NOT turn off the radio or disconnect the radio
from the computer while it is attempting to program
the codeplug. Interrupting the programming process
will destroy codeplug contents and completely disable
the radio.
Function Key Descriptions
F8 - PROGRAM RADIO
Programs the selected value into the radio. The RSS will display the
following message: “!!!Warning!!! Continue to program the following
serial number into the CBI radio: <Serial Number>.” Press F2 to proceed
with the initialization and F10 to cancel.
Note: If communication with the radio fails, the RSS will display
a pop-up error message. Check you cable connections and try
again.
!
Caution
Once the radio is programmed with the serial number
you provided, you will NOT be able to reprogram the
radio with a different one.
Field Definitions
Serial Number
Enter the serial number of the radio you wish to initialize. This
number can be found on the outside casing of the radio.
Note: You will NOT be able to initialize the CBI radio unless you
enter a valid serial number.
!
Caution
Once the radio is programmed with the serial number
you provided, you will NOT be able to reprogram the
radio with a different one.
Model Number
This is a read-only field. It displays the model number of the radio
currently attached to the computer using the RIB. The model number
is retrieved from the radio’s controller board and is displayed for
verification purposes only.
FLASHcode
This is a read-only field. It displays the FLASHcode of the radio currently
attached to the computer using the RIB. The FLASHcode is retrieved
from the radio’s controller board and is displayed for verification
purposes only.
69
Notes
70
Get/Save/Program
Menu Functions
4
This section describes all the functions available from the GET/SAVE/
PROGRAM MENU. To guide you through these functions, GET/SAVE/
PROGRAM-related menus and screens are shown with their respective
programming procedures from the MAIN MENU, function key
descriptions and field definitions.
Note: All functions (supported and unsupported) will be
displayed in the menu’s working area. The unsupported
functions (based on the radio’s model or options) will NOT be
displayed in the F-key ID area.
Menu Map
GET/ SAVE/
PROGRAM
B
C
D
E
G
H
I
Read Data From Radio Codeplug
Get Codeplug From Archive Disk File
Get TCMS Codeplug Update Disk File
Clone Radio
Save Codeplug Data To Archive Disk File
Program Data Into Radio Codeplug (Requires RIB)
Radio Programming History
71
Get/Save/Program
Menu
C
At the MAIN MENU, press F3 to bring up this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:GET/SAVE/PROG
GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU
--------------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
F2
READ
RADIO
-
HELP
Read Data from Radio Codeplug (Requires RIB)
Get Codeplug Data from Archive Disk File
Get TCMS Codeplug Update Disk File
Clone Radio
Save Codeplug Data to Archive Disk File
Program Data into Radio Codeplug (Requires RIB)
Radio Programming History
Exit
F3
GET
ARCHIVE
F4
F5
CLONE
RADIO
F6
F7
F8
F9
SAVE
PROGRAM VIEW
ARCHIVE RADIO HISTORY
F10
EXIT
GET/SAVE/PROGRAM functions are used to transfer codeplug data
from your radio or an archive file into your computer so that you can
change, view or print the data. These functions also permit you to
program modified data back into your radio and save a copy of the
codeplug data in an archive file.
!
Caution
Do NOT turn off the radio or disconnect it from the
computer while attempting to program the codeplug.
Interrupting the programming process will destroy the
codeplug contents and completely DISABLE the radio!
Note: You CANNOT read, clone or program a CBI-initialized
radio from this menu. If you try to do so, you will receive a
message informing you that you must initialize the controller
board
first.
Bring
up
the
CONTROLLER
BOARD
INITIALIZATION screen (F2/F9) to initialize the radio.
72
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - READ RADIO
(Read Radio Codeplug)
Reads the information (data) stored in the radio codeplug (EEPROM)
and transfers it to computer memory. A radio and RIB must be properly
connected to the computer and power turned on before you press this key. The
status of the READ operation will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
Note: The time required to read a codeplug will depend directly
on your computer type and the size of the codeplug you are
reading.
F3 - GET ARCHIVE
Retrieves an archive file from a disk and loads the data into computer
memory. Once it is retrieved, the file may be modified using CHANGE/
VIEW functions or programmed into a radio.
F4 - MERGE TCMS
This function is used to update the codeplug information with
trunking information from the TCMS (Trunking Code Management
System). The required changes must first be entered into the TCMS
database through a TCMS terminal, and then downloaded using a
modem and the TCMS On-Line Field Programming (OFP) software
package.
F5 - CLONE RADIO
Copies codeplug information from one radio to another. Only radios
with the same model number may be cloned. The screen summarizes the
individual ID information for both MDC and Trunking so that both
can be changed easily from the same screen. Trunked radios cannot be
cloned unless System Keys have been loaded for each Trunking system ID.
F7 - SAVE ARCHIVE
Creates (or updates) an archive copy of the codeplug information on a
disk. It is strongly recommended that you retain an archive copy of
every radio installed or serviced. You will then be able to quickly
restore customer information in case of a codeplug failure.
F8 - PROGRAM RADIO
Transfers codeplug information from the computer to the radio
codeplug. A radio and RIB must be properly connected to the computer and
power turned on before you attempt this function. The status of the
programming operation is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Note: The time required to program a codeplug will depend
directly on your computer type and the size of the codeplug you
are programming.
F9 - VIEW HISTORY
Provides all the information about the last time the radio was
programmed. This includes data on when and how the radio was
programmed.
!
Caution
If software versions of the radio and the current data are
not compatible, read the radio codeplug and enter the
data again. Conventional data can be entered from the
RSS screens or cloned from another radio.
73
Reading Codeplug
Data From Radio
(Requires RIB)
CB
From the MAIN MENU, press F3 and then F2 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
MAIN:GET/SAVE/PROG:READ RADIO
READ RADIO CODEPLUG
------------------Reading Codeplug Block 1 of 9
0%
100%
|----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----|
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
You may read the codeplug from the radio or from the archive disk.
Refer to the following page for instructions on reading codeplug data from an
archive disk.
When you access the READ RADIO CODEPLUG screen, a series of
status messages will appear in the upper right corner of the screen. If
communication with the radio fails, a pop-up window will be
displayed with an error message. If no errors occur, the center of the
screen will display the progress of the codeplug reading activity. This
process will take approximately one minute. After the codeplug is
read, you will automatically be returned to the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM
MENU.
Note: The time taken to read the codeplug may vary depending
on the type of computer being used and the size of the codeplug
being read.
Field Definition
Reading Codeplug Blocks
74
This is the number of blocks that have been read. The status bar shows
the relative value of the number of blocks read so far compared to the
total number of blocks to be read.
Get Codeplug Data
From Archive File
CC
From the MAIN MENU, press F3 twice to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Press Enter to Select File Name.
Press F8 to Load Codeplug File.
MAIN:GET/SAVE/PROG:GET FILE
Archive:C:\MRSS\MCS\ARCHIVE
ARCHIVE FILES
------------A466ASNO.331
A467ASNO.361
A469ASNO.431
F1
HELP
F2
CHANGE
ARCHIVE
F3
F4
F5
DELETE
SELECTED
F6
CHDIR
UP
F7
CHDIR
DOWN
F8
GET
ARCHIVE
F9
F10
EXIT
The GET ARCHIVE function is used to retrieve an archive file from a
disk. Once retrieved, the file may be modified using the CHANGE/
VIEW functions or programmed into a radio.
Note: Upper case names represent sub-directories and lower case
names represent file names.
Programming Procedure
1. Press Tab to select the serial number of the radio to be retrieved.
2. Press the F8 function key to retrieve the selected file.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - CHANGE ARCHIVE
Used to specify the directory path where the archive file will be
located. The default archive path will always be the default path
specified in the CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT screen (F9/F3).
F5 - DELETE SELECTED
Allows you to delete the selected archive file. You will be prompted
before the file is deleted.
F6 - CHDIR UP
Used to move one level up the directory structure.
F7 - CHDIR DOWN
Used to move one level down the directory structure. Press Tab to
select a directory. The contents of the directory will be displayed.
F8 - GET ARCHIVE
Retrieves the highlighted archive file. The computer will read the radio
serial number and search the specified directory path for an archive file
corresponding to that serial number. Only the specified path will be
searched. Once the file is located, the computer will retrieve the file
and return you to the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU.
75
Get TCMS
Codeplug Update
Disk File
CD
From the MAIN MENU, press F3 then F4 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter Path
MAIN:GET/SAVE/PROG:MERGE
TCMS Path
S/N: ....................
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
MERGE FORM
----------
F5
F6
F7
F8
Update
Data
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to update the codeplug information with trunking
information from the TCMS (Trunking Code Management System).
The required changes must first be entered into the TCMS database
through a TCMS terminal, and then downloaded using a modem and
the TCMS On-Line Field Programming (OFP) software package.
Field Definition
TCMS Path
Enter the directory path for the directory which contains the TCMS
Merge files.
The default archive path will always be the specified default path from
the SETUP Menu (See MAIN MENU, F9).
TCMS Merge Procedure:
1.
Enter the changes into the TCMS database.
2. Download a DOS file with this new trunking information. [Refer
to the TCMS On-Line Field Programming (OFP) software manual].
3. Use the GET/SAVE functions to either Read the radio codeplug or
Get the archive file for the radio to be updated.
4. Access the MERGE TCMS screen and press F8 to update the
codeplug information.
76
Clone Radio
CE
From the MAIN MENU, press F3 and then F5 to access the TRUNKED
CLONING screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:GET/SAVE/PROG:CLONE RADIO
NEW TRUNKING IDS
----------------
Serial Number............
Pers #
-----01
F1
HELP
System Key
---------Disabled
F2
READ
SER NUM
F3
CONV
ID
Type
---II
System
#
ID
-----01 0001
F4
LIMITED
CLONE
F5
Flt/ATG
------None
F6
DUPLICATE
II/IIi ID
Type I
Indv ID
-------
F7
SAVE
FILE
II/IIi
Indv ID
------0001
F8
PROGRAM
RADIO
F9
F10
EXIT
The CLONE radio function is used to copy codeplug information from
one radio to another. Only radios with the same model number may be
cloned.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - READ SER NUM
(Read serial number)
Allows you to read the serial number of the “target” radio.
F3 - CONV ID
(Conventional ID)
Brings up a screen where you can assign MDC IDs. This function will be
active only when a Trunking-capable radio is being cloned.
F4 - LIMITED CLONE
Clones the Conventional and radio wide sections of the codeplug. This
deletes the Trunking data and reads the serial number from the radio.
In order to perform Limited Clone:
❒ Trunking system keys (or an FTR Key) are required to clone Trunking
System data.
❒ The target radio must be connected to the computer so that its serial
number can be determined.
F6 - DUPLICATE II/IIi ID
Duplicates the selected Type II/IIi ID (the one under the cursor) into
all other Type II/IIi personalities for which system keys are present.
F7 - SAVE FILE
Creates or updates an archive copy of the codeplug information on a
disk or hard disk.
Note: An archive copy of every radio installed or serviced is
strongly recommended. You will then be able to quickly restore
customer information in case of a codeplug failure.
F8 - PROGRAM RADIO
Programs the “target” radio using saved codeplug data.
77
Full Cloning
System keys for all Trunked Systems in the radio are required to perform a
full clone. Follow the steps below for Full Cloning:
1. Press F2 at the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU to read the radio
codeplug to be cloned. That is the “source” codeplug. An archive
file may also be used as the “source”. A radio and RIB must be
properly connected to the computer and power turned on before you
attempt the READ function.
2. Enter the serial number of the radio to be cloned on the TRUNKED
CLONING screen, or press F2 to read the serial number from the
connected radio. System keys are required to change the serial number.
3. Change the Trunking individual IDs to those required by the new
radio on this screen. If MDC IDs are also used, they can be
changed on the MDC ID screen by pressing F3.
4. Connect the “target” radio to the computer and press F8 to
program the “source” codeplug into the “target” radio. A radio and
a RIB must be properly connected to the computer and the power turned
on before you press F8.
Limited Cloning
A limited clone may be performed when all the system keys required
to perform a full clone are not available.
!
Caution
When a limited clone is performed, all Trunking
information which existed in the “source” radio will be
deleted or modified to default data. Re-entry of
Trunking information will be required.
Follow the steps below to perform a limited clone:
1. Press F2 at the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU to read the radio
codeplug to be cloned. That is the “source” codeplug. An archive
file may also be used as the “source”. A radio and RIB must be
properly connected to the computer and power turned on before you
attempt the READ function.
Note: The time required to read a codeplug will vary based on
the processing power of your computer and the size of the
codeplug being read.
2. Press the Limited Clone function key (F4) on the TRUNKED
CLONING screen. At this point all the Trunking data in the “source”
codeplug will be deleted or defaulted. This includes all Trunking
system and Trunking personality data. Zone/Channel,
Conventional, Phone List, Call list and Scan List data will however
be preserved.
!
Caution
78
Do NOT program this image into the original radio
unless you want all the Trunking data to be deleted.
3. Enter the serial number of the radio to be cloned or press F2 to
read the serial number from the connected radio. At this point,
you will have a codeplug image for the “target” radio which
contains Conventional data and Radio wide data from the
“source” radio and no Trunking data. Like any other codeplug file,
this codeplug image may be archived, edited or programmed into
the “target” radio. Normally you will proceed to step 4.
Note: The serial number cannot be read prior to step 2 unless system
keys are present.
4. Program the target radio by pressing F8 from the PROGRAM
RADIO CODEPLUG screen (F3/F8) or the TRUNKED CLONING
screen (F3/F5). A radio and a RIB must be properly connected to the
computer and the power turned on before you attempt this function.
5. Archive the “target” codeplug image.
79
Save Codeplug
Data to an Archive
File
CG
From the MAIN MENU, press F3 and then F7 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter Archive Path.
..GET/SAVE/PROG:CLONE RADIO:SAVE FILE
Archive:
SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE FILE
---------------------------------Archive Filename......A466ASNO.331
Model Number..........M01KHH9PW5AN
Serial Number.....................
Last Programmed.........9510021641
Program Source.................RSS
F1
HELP
F2
CHANGE
ARCHIVE
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
SAVE
ARCHIVE
F9
F10
EXIT
The SAVE ARCHIVE function is used to create (or update) an archive
copy of the codeplug information on a disk.
Note: You are strongly encouraged to make an archive copy of
every radio installed or serviced. You will then be able to quickly
restore customer information in case of codeplug failure.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - CHANGE ARCHIVE
Used to specify the directory path where the archive file is to be
located. The default archive path will always be the default path
specified in the CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT screen (F9/F3).
F8 - SAVE ARCHIVE
Saves the archive file to the path specified (or to the default path if no
path is specified). Do NOT press F8 until you have entered the archive file
name and customer identification information.
80
Field Definitions
Archive File Name
This is the DOS name of the archive file which defaults to the serial
number of the radio. The standard DOS file naming convention must
be used, that is, the file name must be a one- to eight-character
alphanumeric name with a one- to three-character alphanumeric
extension (xxxxxxxx.yyy).
Model Number
The radio model number stored in the codeplug. This number should
correspond to the model number printed on the label under the radio's
battery.
Serial Number
The radio serial number stored in the codeplug. This number should
correspond to the serial number printed on the label under the radio's
battery.
Last Programmed
This is the time and date the radio was last programmed. The format
is YYMMDDHHMM (where Y refers to year, M to month, D to day, H
to hour and M to minute). Time is in military format (for instance,
1:30 PM is referred to as 1330).
Program Source
This field describes the source of the most recent codeplug
programming:
RSS
Programmed by a standard RSS.
Factory
Programmed in the factory.
Labtool
Programmed using a special development RSS.
FTR Key
Programmed using a FTR (Field Technical
Representative) hardware key.
81
Program the Radio’s
Codeplug (Requires
RIB)
CH
From the MAIN MENU, press F3 and then F8 to bring up this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
MAIN:GET/SAVE/PROG:READ RADIO
PROGRAM RADIO CODEPLUG
---------------------Programming Codeplug Block 1 of 34
0%
100%
|----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----+----|
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
This screen allows you to program the radio. A radio interface box (RIB)
is required to perform this operation. If the programming process is
successfully completed, you will see the following message: “Radio
Was Successfully Programmed”. You will then be returned to the GET/
SAVE/PROGRAM screen automatically.
Programming Steps:
Trunking Radios Only
If you do not have the necessary System Key files and are programming
a radio, the serial number of the attached radio must be identical to
the one in the serial number field on the RSS and the PROGRAMMING
HISTORY screen (F3/F9). To program a radio, you must first read its
codeplug information by pressing F2 on the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM
MENU. A radio and RIB must be properly connected to the computer and the
power turned on before any attempt is made to program the radio’s codeplug.
Note: If the serial numbers of the “source” codeplug and the
“target” radio are different, programming will be aborted.
Field Definition
Programming Codeplug Blocks
82
This is the number of blocks that have been programmed. The status
bar shows a relative value of the number of blocks programmed so far
compared to the total number of blocks to be programmed.
Programming History
CI
From the MAIN MENU, press F3 and then F9 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Information Only. These Fields Cannot
be Changed.
MAIN:GET/SAVE/PROG:HISTORY
PROGRAMMING HISTORY
-------------------
Model Number.........M01KHH9PW5AN
Software Option...............H38
Serial Number....................
Radio Software Version...........
Radio Codeplug Version.......000B
Programmed Date........9510021641
Program Source................RSS
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen shows the historical statistics of the radio and the RSS such
as serial number, model number, last programmed date, programming
source, etc. All the fields in this screen are view-only fields.
Field Definitions
Model Number
This is a view-only field. Displays the radio model number stored in the
codeplug. This number should correspond to the model number
printed on the label under the radio's battery.
Software Option
This is a view-only field. Displays any software options programmed,
but applies to Private System model numbers only.
Serial Number
This is a view-only field. Displays the radio serial number stored in the
codeplug. This number should correspond to the serial number
printed on the label under the radio's battery.
Radio Software Version
This is a view-only field. Displays the version of operator software
running in the radio.
Radio Codeplug Version
This is a view-only field. Displays the codeplug description version
number. It determines which versions of RSS the codeplug is
compatible with.
Programmed Date
This is a view-only field. Displays the time and date the radio was last
programmed. The format is YYMMDDHHMM (where Y refers to year,
M to month, D to day, H to hour and M to minute). Time is in military
format (that is, 1:30 PM will be denoted by 1330).
83
Program Source
84
This is a view-only field. Displays the source of the most recent internal
codeplug programming:
RSS
Programmed by a standard RSS.
Factory
Programmed in the factory.
Labtool
Programmed using a special development RSS.
FTR Key
Programmed using a FTR (Field Technical
Representative) hardware key.
5
Change/View Menu
Functions
This section describes all the functions available from the
CHANGE/VIEW MENU. To guide you through these functions,
CHANGE/VIEW-related menus and screens are shown with their
respective RSS locations from the MAIN MENU, function key
descriptions and field definitions.
Note: All functions (supported and unsupported) will be
displayed in the menu’s working area. The unsupported
functions (based on the radio’s model or options) will NOT be
displayed in the F-key ID area.
Menu Map
MAIN MENU
D
CHANGE/VIEW
C
Radio Wide Buttons, Switches, Display, Scan, Phone
B
Radio Wide Options
E
F
G
I
C
E
Emergency Options
More Options
Button/Rotary Configuration
Switch Configuration
Menu Item List Configuration
DEK Configuration
Phone Lists and Options
H
I
E
SECURE Options
Buttons, Switches, Menu Items
B
C
D
E
D
VRM100 Options
DTMF Access/Deaccess Codes
Dial Options
Scan Lists and Options
H
Scan Options
Display Options
I More Options
E
Alarm Options
Continued on the next page
85
D
Trunking Systems, Personalities, Call Lists, Options
B
Trunking Radio Wide Options
B
C
SmartZone Environment
VOC Options
C Trunking Systems: System ID, Control Channels, etc.
F Control Channel/Channel Assignment
I More Options
D Trunking Personality: Talk Groups, Emergency Options
G Talkgroups
H Emergency Options
I More Options
F Preferred Sites
G VRM100 or VRM500 Trunk Options
E Trunking Call List Data
F
Conventional Systems, Personalities, MDC, Options
Conventional Radio Wide Configuration
B
B MPL List Configuration
C
D
G
Conventional Personalities, Options
G
I
H
86
Conventional Personality Options
G
RAC Options
MDC Systems, Options, Call List
C
D
E
MDC Systems
MDC Call List Data
MDC Repeater ID List
Auxiliary Systems
B
C
D
E
H
I
MDC Options
Singletone System
Singletone List
Quik-Call II Systems
GE STAR Systems
Conventional Message Alias List
Conventional Status Alias List
Zone/Talkgroup (Channel) Assignment
Change/View Menu
D
Press F4 at the MAIN MENU to access the CHANGE/VIEW MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW
CHANGE/VIEW MENU
---------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
F2
-
HELP
Radio Wide Buttons, Switches, Display, Scan, Phone
Trunking Systems, Personalities, Call Lists, Options
Conventional Systems, Personalities, MDC, Options
Zone/Channel Assignment
EXIT, Return to Main Menu
F3
RADIO
CONFIG
F4
TRUNK
DATA
F5
F6
CONV
DATA
F7
F8
ZONE/CHN
ASSIGN
F9
F10
EXIT
The CHANGE/VIEW MENU is a multi-level menu. Its sub-menus are
used to change or view codeplug features and option configurations.
All codeplug parameters are classified as either Radio Configuration,
Conventional or Trunking. The CHANGE/VIEW MENU functions
permit access to each category.
A codeplug must be loaded into your computer’s memory (using GET/SAVE/
PROGRAM MENU functions) before you can access the CHANGE/VIEW
screens. You may change or view an archive file without having a radio
connected.
Note: If your radio model does not contain a specific feature,
you will not be permitted to access the corresponding data field
or screen for that feature. Refer to your Radio Catalog Sheets or
Radio Service Manual for radio model descriptions and features.
The CHANGE/VIEW MENU does NOT actually modify the radio’s
codeplug data. Instead, it modifies a copy of the data retrieved from
the codeplug or archive file using GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU
functions.
After all change/view modifications are completed, you MUST return
to the GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU and program the changes back
into the radio or save them to a new archive file. Otherwise, the
modifications will be lost when you turn off your computer or load another
codeplug into memory.
87
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - RADIO CONFIG
(Radio Wide Configuration)
Used to change or view radio parameters and options that affect
overall radio operation (including Conventional and Trunking) such
as button and volume default settings. Typically, when you begin to
edit a codeplug, you should come to this menu and configure Radio
wide options first by working your way through the screens below this
menu. This will allow the options on other screens to reflect Radio
wide options. Some fields will not be visible if the radio does not support
that option.
F4 - TRUNK DATA
(Trunking Data Configuration)
A multi-level menu used to change or view Trunking personalities,
systems, etc. All lists (call, scan, phone) may be modified. This function
key will NOT be visible for radio models that support Conventional
operation only.
F6 - CONV DATA
(Conventional Data
Configuration)
Used to change or view Conventional parameters such as
personalities, buttons, and MDC signalling. This function key will NOT
be visible for Trunking-only radio models.
F8 - ZONE/CHN ASSIGN
(Zone/Channel Assignment)
Used to assign a group of channels (or talkgroups) to a particular zone
based on some common characteristic such as geographic location,
job function, signalling type, etc.
88
Radio Wide
Configuration Menu
DC
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 and then F3 to access this menu.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG
RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU
----------------------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
-
HELP
Radio Wide Options
Buttons, Switches, Menu Items
Phone Lists and Options
Scan Lists and Options
Display Options
Alarm Options
EXIT, Return to Change/View Menu
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
RADIO FEATURE PHON.TX SCAN
DISPLAY ALARM
OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU may be used to change or
view features, parameters and options that affect both Trunking and
Conventional operation. Typically, when you start editing a codeplug,
you should access this menu and configure the Radio wide
configuration options first by working your way through the submenus of this menu. This will allow the options on other screens to
reflect Radio wide options. Some fields will not be visible if the radio does
not support the options that they pertain to.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - RADIO OPTIONS
Brings up a menu through the sub-menus of which you can edit
general options that affect operation of the radio as a whole such as
alert tones, keypad parameters, etc. The options on this screen should be
correctly edited and verified before you proceed to edit personality data.
F3 - FEATURE OPTIONS
Brings up a screen where you can define the functions that each
button, switch, and menu item performs.
F4 - PHON. Tx OPTIONS
Brings up a screen where you can edit phone interconnect
configuration for the radio, including stored phone numbers and
aliases. These parameters are radio wide and affect both Conventional
and Trunking operation. This screen will be visible only if the radio
supports this option.
F5 - SCAN OPTIONS
Brings up a screen where you can configure the Channel Scan and
enter the Scan List. If a given scan list number is chosen on the
appropriate personality screens, it may be used for either
Conventional or Trunking operation as the case may be.
F6 - DISPLAY OPTIONS
Brings up a screen where you can edit display information for the radio
to customize it for specific user applications. The features and options
displayed here are applicable to all systems and personalities.
F7 - ALARM OPTIONS
Used to enable or disable the radio’s Horn & Lights Alarm option.
89
Radio Wide Options
DCB
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3 and then F2 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:RADIO OPTIONS
RADIO WIDE OPTIONS
-----------------Alert Tones...............Enabled
Control Station Equipped.Disabled
Min Alert Tone Volume.........128
VRM100 Capable............Enabled
Alert Tone Vol Offset (dB).-12.0
VRM500 Capable...........Disabled
Self Test Alert Tone....Disabled
Block Pending CA/PC......Disabled
Selectable Keypad Mute....Enabled
Auto Power-Off (hrs)...........14
Long Press/Emer Duration (ms).250
Maximum Channels (Talkgroups).160
Out Of Range........No Indication
Home Mode Selection.......Enabled
Zone....1
Chan....1
Secure Equipped...............Yes
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
VRM100 SECURE
EMERG
OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS
F8
F9
MORE
OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to set up various options that affect Radio wide
operation. The options on this screen should be correctly edited and verified
before you proceed to edit personality data.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Note: The Control Station Equipped, VRM100 Capable, and
VRM500 Capable features are mutually exclusive. If you want to
enable one of these options, the other two MUST be disabled.
Function Key Descriptions
F5 - VRM OPTIONS
This option will be active only when the VRM100 Capable field on this
screen is set to Enabled. Brings up a screen where you can define and
modify VRM100 radio options.
F6 - SECURE OPTIONS
This option will be active only when the SECURE Equipped field is set to Yes.
Brings up a screen where you can modify Radio Wide SECURE option
settings.
F7 - EMER OPTIONS
(Emergency Options)
This option will be visible only if the radio supports Emergency features.
Brings up a screen where you can edit Radio wide Emergency feature
parameters.
F9 - MORE OPTIONS
Brings up a screen where you can view and modify additional Radio
wide data.
90
Field Definitions
Alert Tones
Enables or disables the radio’s Alert Tones.
The default is Enabled.
Min Alert Tone Volume
This field will be visible only if the Alert Tones field is set to Enabled. Enter
or scroll to select the desired volume level. This is the minimum alert
tone volume level the radio will use. If the volume setting is above the
level you specify, the actual volume setting will be used to sound an
alarm. Otherwise, the Minimum Alert Tone Volume specification will
be used. Valid entries range from 0 (zero) to 255.
The default is 128.
Alert Tone Vol Offset (dB)
This field will be visible only if the Alert Tones field is set to Enabled. Use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Alert Tone Volume Offset that
the radio will use. The Alert Tone Volume Offset is the value by which
the alert tone volume will be raised or lowered with reference to the
current user-selected volume. This offset can range from -24 dB to +24
dB in increments of 1.5 dB.
The default is -12 dB.
Auto Power-Off
This feature allows the radio to be automatically turned off after a
pre-determined time period of inactivity from the user. Any keypress
or user input will reset the timer. During the last two minutes before
the timer expires, the radio shall generate audible and visual warnings
until the timer expires or resets.
The Automatic Power-Off feature can be disabled or set from 2 to 14
hours in 2 hour increments.
The factory default is Disabled.
Self Test Alert Tone
This field will be visible only if the Alert Tones field on this screen is set to
Enabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the PowerUp Self Test Alert Tone. If this feature is enabled, an alert tone beep will
sound each time the radio is turned on and self-test is completed.
The default is Disabled.
Rotary Alert (not shown)
Out of Range
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the type of Rotary Alert for
Continuous Rotary control models. The type of Continuous Rotary
Alerts are:
Rollover Alert
Turning the Rotary control past all programmed
channels in either direction will result in an alert tone
(beep) and the display will indicate “UNPROG.”
Elec. Stop
Turning the Rotary control past the first channel
position in either direction will result in an alert tone.
None
Turning the Rotary control will cause no alert tone.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired type of indication.
This field determines how the radio will indicate an Out of Range
91
condition on a Trunked system. When the radio can no longer
communicate with the base station, the radio can be programmed to
give an out-of-range alert tone, display an out-of-range message, or
both. This feature can be disabled by setting the field to No Indication.
The default is No Indication.
Control Station Equipped
This option will be accessible only for radios equipped with Control Station
hardware. It is not compatible with the VRM100 and VRM500 features. The
VRM100 Capable and VRM500 Capable fields on this screen must be set
to Disabled if the Control Station Operation is to be used.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Control Station
Operation for radios equipped with control station hardware. This
option re-configures some of the I/Os on the radio options connector
to allow the radio to be used as a control station. It allows for
connection to desk sets, interconnects, etc.
The default is Disabled.
IMPORTANT NOTE: This feature is planned for a future RSS
release. As of the date of this release, enabling or disabling the
Control Station Equipped feature will have no effect whatsoever
on the operation of the radio.
VRM100 Capable
This option is not compatible with the VRM500 Capable and Control
Station Equipped features. The VRM500 Capable and Control Station
Equipped fields must be set to Disabled if the VRM100 feature is to be
enabled. Similarly, if this field is set to Enabled, you will not be able to set
the VRM500 and Control Station Equipped fields to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable VRM100 capabilities.
When the VRM100 modem is connected to the MCS 2000 radio, it can
be used to transfer data between remote units and a single central unit
by utilizing the Trunking network. The data transfer is completed on
voice channels using standard Trunking/Conventional signalling,
which includes Call Alert, Channel Request, and Channel Grant. The
radio supports both voice and data users. The interface between the
radio and the modem is implemented by pin assignment on the
accessory connector.
Note that:
❒ To enable VRM100 modem capabilities, you must enable the VRM100
option in the RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F2).
❒ To enable the VRM100 feature in Trunking mode, you must enable the
VRM100 option in the TRUNKING PERSONALITY OPTIONS screen
(F4/F4/F4/F9).
❒ To enable the VRM100 feature in Conventional mode, you must enable
the VRM100 option in the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS
screen (F4/F6/F3/F9).
The default is Disabled.
VRM500 Capable
92
This option is not compatible with the VRM100 Capable and Control
Station Equipped features. The VRM100 Capable and Control Station
Equipped fields must be set to Disabled if the VRM500 feature is to be
enabled. Similarly, if this field is set to Enabled, you will not be able to set
the VRM100 and Control Station Equipped fields to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the radio’s VRM500
capabilities. If the VRM500 Capable feature is enabled, the radio can
be connected to the VRM500 modem which operates in ‘data near
trunking’ mode on RD-LAP, MDC and MMP data systems.
Block Pending CA/PC
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable blocking of Pending
Call Alerts or Private Calls. When this feature is enabled, the radio will
ignore all successive Call Alerts (or Private Calls) after receiving a Call
Alert (or Private Call) with a different ID than the one originating the
pending call.
The default is Disabled.
Selectable Keypad Mute
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable blocking of Selectable
Keypad Muting. When this field is enabled, the user may mute the
keypad chirps from the radio menu. A mute selection must also be
selected on the MENU ITEM LIST CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F3/
F3/F4).
The default is Enabled.
Long Press/Emer Duration (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to change the timing duration for a
Long Keypad Keypress. A long keypress involves pressing and holding
a key for a period of time to enable a specific radio function or feature.
This means that the user must press and hold the key down for the
time specified by this field.
Long press buttons can be programmed for SCAN list, PHONE list
programming, PAGE, CALL, MONITOR (for Conventional channels
only), FORCED SITE SEARCH (for AMSS/SmartZone only), and SECURE
(Secure menu - key load, key erase) Valid entries range from 250 to 3750
ms in 250-ms increments.
The default is 250 ms.
The setting in this field also influences the length of button press required to
activate the radio’s Emergency feature. Emergency button press time is
one-half times the value you specify in this field for Long Keypress
Duration. This setting will affect both the control head button, or
external emergency (i.e. foot switch or push-button) activation time.
For instance, if the Long Press/Emer Duration is set to two seconds, it
will take a one-second button press to activate the Emergency feature.
Therefore, if you want the emergency feature to be activated after the
user has depressed the emergency button for 250 ms (for example),
you should set this field to 500 ms.
!
Warning
Programming of Silent Emergency provides the
user NO indication visible or audible indication
that the emergency has been sent.
If you program silent emergency in conjunction
with the Long Press Emergency feature users
should be trained to LONG PRESS the emergency
press button for an extended duration to ensure
that the emergency will be sent.
93
Note: If this field is set to less than one second, the other Long
Press buttons will still take one second to activate.
RSS Setting for Long Press
Button Duration Field
Long Press Button Timer
Emergency Activation Timer
250 ms
1000 ms
125 ms
500 ms
1000 ms
250 ms
750 ms
1000 ms
375 ms
1000 ms
1000 ms
500 ms
1250 ms
1250 ms
625 ms
1500 ms
1500 ms
750 ms
1750 ms
1750 ms
875 ms
2000 ms
2000 ms
1000 ms
2250 ms
2250 ms
1125 ms
2500 ms
2500 ms
1250 ms
2750 ms
2750 ms
1375 ms
3000 ms
3000 ms
1500 ms
3250 ms
3250 ms
1625 ms
3500 ms
3500 ms
1750 ms
3750 ms
3750 ms
1875 ms
Maximum Channels
(Talkgroups)
This is a view-only field. It indicates the maximum number of channels/
talkgroups that a radio can access. This value varies according to the
model number and options purchased.
Radio Cloning (not shown)
This field is visible only for radio models that permit direct radio cloning
with a special cloning cable. If this feature is not desired, use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to select Disabled.
Home Mode Selection
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Home Mode
Selection. If this field is Enabled, the Zone/Channel specified here will
be selected when the HOME button is pressed.
The default is Disabled.
Zone
This field will be visible only when Home Mode Selection is enabled. Use the
UP/DOWN arrow keys to make your selection or enter the desired
value directly. This option allows the specification of a particular zone
to which the radio “homes” when the Home key is pressed. The valid
range of values is 1 to 50.
The default is 1.
Channel
94
This field will be visible only when Home Mode Selection is enabled. Use the
UP/DOWN arrow keys to make your selection or enter the desired
value directly. This option allows for the specification of a particular
channel to which the radio “homes” when the Home key is pressed.
The valid range of values is 1 to 255. The default is 1.
SECURE Equipped
This field will not be visible unless a SECURE-capable radio has been read.
This field is used to enable SECURE operation for radios equipped with
the SECURE hardware option. Setting this field to Yes will allow you to
access the SECURE OPTIONS screen.
!
Caution
The user must make sure that SECURE hardware is
installed in the radio when setting this field to “Yes “.
If not, this field setting will lead to improper operation
of the radio.
95
VRM100 Options
DCBE
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3, F2 and then F5 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...CONFIG:RADIO OPTIONS:VRM OPTIONS
VRM100 OPTIONS
-------------Disconnect On Data................Disabled
Data On Failsoft...................Enabled
Speaker Unmute On Data............Disabled
Transmit Enable Polarity.......Active High
Channel Grant Polarity.........Active High
Data Mode Request Polarity......Active Low
MLU Operation.....................Disabled
Data Overrides Voice..............Disabled
Ignore Data Display...............Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed only when the VRM100 capable field is set to
Enabled on the RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F2). This screen
allows you to define and modify VRM100 radio options. Press Tab to
select the desired field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10).If a
field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired
choice or value.
Field Definitions
Disconnect On Data
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this option. If this
field is enabled, the radio will send a disconnect tone at the end of data
transmission.
The default is Disabled.
Data On Failsoft
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this option. If this
field is enabled, the radio will permit data transmit/receive on Failsoft.
The default is Enabled.
Speaker Unmute On Data
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this option. If this
feature is enabled, the speaker will unmute while data is being
received.
The default is Disabled.
Transmit Enable Polarity
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select Active High or Active Low.
This value in this field determines the polarity of the output signal
TXE.
The default is Active High.
96
Channel Grant Polarity
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select Active High or Active Low. The
value in this field determines the polarity of output signal CG.
The default is Active High.
Data Mode Request Polarity
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select Active High or Active Low. The
value in this field determines the polarity of the input signal DMR.
The default is Active Low.
MLU Operation
If this field is enabled, the radio will allow conventional channels to
be used for both voice and data operation. If disabled, conventional
channels are used for either voice or data operation (voice and data are
mutually exclusive).
Data Overrides Voice
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable the VRM100 Data Overrides
Voice feature.
When enabled, VRM100 data transmissions will have priority over all
voice transmissions (data messages will interrupt voice calls) except
Emergency Voice transmissions.
When disabled, data messages will NOT interrupt voice calls.
The factory default is Disabled.
Ignore Data Display
This field is used to enable/disable the Ignore Data Display feature.
When the Ignore Data Display feature is enabled, the radio will not
display 'DATA TRANSFER' when in data mode; instead, the normal
mode alias is displayed.
The factory default is Disabled.
97
Radio Wide SECURE
Options
DCBF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3, F2 and F6 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
..CONFIG:RADIO OPTIONS:SECURE OPTIONS
RADIO WIDE SECURE OPTIONS
-------------------------
XL IC Present........................Yes
Tx Clear Alert Tones.............Enabled
Periodic Keyfail Alert Tone......Enabled
Non-XL Scan Unsquelch Duration (ms)..275
XL Scan Unsquelch Duration (ms)......875
Secure Punch Thru.............. Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed only when the SECURE Equipped field is set to
Yes on the RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F2). This screen allows
you to set up various SECURE options that affect Radio wide operation.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
XL IC Present
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to specify whether or not an XL chip is
present. This field should be set to Yes if the radio is equipped with an
XL chip.
The default is No.
Tx Clear Alert Tones
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Tx Clear Alert Tones
for the radio. When this field is set to Enabled, an alert tone will be
generated every time the user keys up the radio in the Clear mode.
The default is Enabled.
Periodic Keyfail Alert Tone
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Periodic Keyfail Alert
Tones for the radio. When this field is set to Enabled, a periodic alert
tone will be generated whenever the radio has lost key and one of the
following conditions is met:
❒ SECURE/Clear Strapping is set to SECURE
❒ SECURE/Clear Strapping is set to Select and the user has selected
SECURE position
The default is Enabled.
98
Non-XL Scan Unsquelch
Duration (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Non-XL Scan Unsquelch
Duration. When scanning for coded transmissions, this field
determines the period of time that the radio will wait for a Non-XL
(Cipher Feedback) encrypted signal to be detected following a Carrier
Detect. The valid range is 0 (zero) to 6375 ms in 25-ms increments.
The default is 275 ms.
XL Scan Unsquelch Duration
(ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the XL Scan Unsquelch
Duration. When scanning for coded transmissions, this field
determines the period of time the radio will wait for a Non-XL (Cipher
Feedback) or XL encrypted signal to be detected following a carrier
detect. The range is 0 (zero) to 6375 in 25-ms increments.
The default is 875 ms.
Secure Punch Thru
Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll or directly enter the desired value.
The RSS allows the user to set the Secure Punch Thru feature to one of
the following settings: Disabled, Always On, or Variable Volume
Position (that is, the feature will become active when the volume knob
is set to a level greater than this programmed volume position).
The valid range of the variable volume position is 1 to 254. (The latter
figure corresponds to the absolute position of the radio volume knob.)
SECURE Punch Thru is a feature intended to reduce high volume
distortion in the SECURE receive mode by removing much of the
distortion-producing low frequency content (from amplifier clipping
and speaker/housing overload), and improve intelligibility in high
background noise environments (when the radio is at high volume),
by boosting the high frequency content that tends to get washed out
in such conditions.
The SECURE Punch Thru feature is activated when the radio is
receiving in the SECURE mode and the volume knob is beyond an RSS
programmable position. The feature turns off the de-emphasis filter in
the receive SECURE audio path, leaving the audio pre-emphasized
from the transmitter (that is, the lower frequencies are reduced and the
higher frequencies are increased).
Note that this feature requires the transmitting radios to use preemphasis, which is normally the case. Also, the Secure Punch Thru
feature activation point can be anywhere from the volume knob's
lowest position (turned on all the time when receiving SECURE) to its
highest position (turned off all the time when receiving SECURE).
The default is Disabled.
99
Radio Wide
Emergency Options
DCBG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3, F2 and then F7 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...CONFIG:RADIO OPTIONS:EMERG OPT
RADIO WIDE EMERGENCY OPTIONS
---------------------------Silent Alarm.............Enabled
Unmute Option..........Enabled
Channel Delay (sec)............2
Emergency Power Up......Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed only if the radio supports this option.
Emergency operation must be enabled on the CONVENTIONAL
PERSONALITY screen (F4/F6/F3) and/or the TRUNKING
PERSONALITY screen (F4/F4/F4). In addition, the Emergency button
must be configured from the RADIO WIDE BUTTON screen (F4/F3/
F3/F2). The Emergency parameters listed on this screen apply to both
Conventional and Trunking signalling.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is selected, press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select
the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
Silent Alarm
This feature is not compatible with Emergency Receive. To enable Silent
Alarm, make sure Emergency Receive is disabled on the RADIO WIDE
DISPLAY OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F6). Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
enable/disable this feature. If this feature is enabled, the radio will
operate silently when transmitting an emergency signal. No audible or
visual indication of the transmission will occur.
The default is Disabled.
Emergency operation must be enabled on the CONVENTIONAL MDC
SYSTEMS screen (F4/F6/F4/F3) and/or the TRUNKING PERSONALITY
EMERGENCY OPTIONS screen (F4/F4/F4/F8). In addition, the
Emergency button must be configured from the RADIO WIDE
BUTTON screen (F4/F3/F3/F2).
Unmute Option
100
This feature is an optional ADDITION to the Emergency Silent Alarm
feature. Enabling this feature will cause the radio to UNMUTE on the
emergency talkgroup (for trunking) or frequency (for conventional)
for voice traffic when the radio is in SILENT ALARM EMERGENCY
mode. The Unmute Option will allow the dispatcher to provide
feedback to the person initiating the emergency state via code words,
without drawing undesirable attention.
The factory default is Disabled.
Channel Delay (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Emergency Channel Delay
or enter a value directly. The radio must be on a channel for the time
specified here before it can transmit an emergency signal. For
Emergency operation, this delay is sometimes desired to prevent the
radio from sending an emergency signal on an undesired channel
(which may occur while the user is changing channels and pressing
the emergency button). The valid range is 0 (zero) to 7 seconds.
The default is 2 seconds.
Emergency Power Up
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable the Emergency Power Up
feature.
If this feature is enabled, and the user presses the emergency button/
switch when the radio is off, the unit will power up and send an
emergency signal. After sending the emergency signal the radio
remains powered up.
Note: This feature cannot be assigned to control head buttons.
It is only available for the external emergency button or
footswitch.
The factory default is Disabled.
101
More Radio Wide
Options
DCBI
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3, F2 and then F9 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...CONFIG:RADIO OPTIONS:OPTIONS
RADIO WIDE OPTIONS
-----------------Mic AGC..................Disabled
Car Radio Mute............Enabled
Car Radio Mute Timer (sec)....10
Direct Mode...Operator Selectable
Num
--1
2
3
4
F1
HELP
Time Out Timer Table (sec)
-------------------------Infinite
30
60
120
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
The option parameters listed on this screen apply both to
Conventional and Trunking operation. Press Tab to select the desired
field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is
highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice
or value.
Field Definitions
Mic AGC
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select which microphones will use
Automatic Gain Control. The Automatic Gain Control (AGC) feature
will automatically raise or lower the gain of the microphone to keep
the audio level near a pre-determined level. The choices are Internal,
External, Internal and External, and Disabled.
The default is Internal and External.
Car Radio Mute
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the Car Radio Mute
operation. If this field is enabled, the Car Radio Mute feature allows
the mobile radio to be used in conjunction with a car radio/cassette to
mute the car radio/cassette when the mobile radio user initiates or
receives a voice call (that is, Dispatch Call, Private Call, Selective Call,
or Phone) while the car radio/cassette is on.
The default is Disabled.
IMPORTANT NOTE: This feature is planned for a future RSS
release. As of the date of this release, enabling or disabling the
Car Radio Mute feature will have no effect whatsoever on the
operation of the radio.
102
Car Radio Mute Timer (sec)
This field is visible only if the Car Radio Mute field is set to Enabled. Use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys or directly enter a value for the Car Radio
Mute Timer. When this feature is enabled, the car radio/cassette
remains muted after a voice transmit or receive is completed for the
period of time specified in this field in order to avoid unmuting in the
middle of a conversation.Valid values range from 1 to 60 seconds in
one-second increments.
The default is 10 seconds.
IMPORTANT NOTE: This feature is planned for a future RSS
release. As of the date of this release, specifying a value for the
Car Radio Mute Timer will have no effect whatsoever on the
operation of the radio.
Time-Out Timer Table (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys select the four Time-Out Timer (TOT)
values available to each personality. Each Conventional or Trunking
personality may reference one of the four values that are defined on
this screen. TOT values range from 15 to 465 seconds in 15-second
increments. A value of Infinite is also available.
If the radio is transmitting and the TOT time expires, the radio is
automatically de-keyed and a continuous alert tone is generated as
long as the PTT button is pressed. To continue transmitting, the PTT
button must be released and the radio re-keyed.
The default values are Infinite, 30, 60 and 120 seconds respectively.
Direct Mode
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the settings of Direct Mode.
Operator Selectable - Setting this field to Operator Selectable will allow
radio users to program any buttons set to DM (Direct Mode) to the
currently selected mode via a long press of the button. Once the
button is programmed with a mode, a short press of the button will
switch the radio to the programmed mode.
Fixed - If this field is set to Fixed, the user can use the DM buttons to
change to the mode these buttons were previously programmed to.
However, the user will not be able to re-assign the buttons to a
different mode. These buttons will NOT be end-user programmable.
IMPORTANT NOTE
If this field is set to Fixed, the user of the radio will not be able to
reprogram any buttons set to DM (Direct Mode). Before setting this
field to Fixed, be sure to follow the steps below.
1. Select Operator Selectable for this field and program the radio.
2. Go to the desired mode.
3. Long press the DM button to which you want this mode
programmed until a good key tone is heard.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all DM buttons.
5. Verify programming of the buttons by short pressing each
DM button on the control head.
103
6. Read the radio using the RSS.
7. Set this field to Fixed.
8. Reprogram the radio using the RSS.
9. Save the codeplug as an archive file.
10.You may now clone the codeplug to all radios in your fleet.
The factory default is Operator Selectable.
104
Radio Wide
Features
Configuration Menu
DCC
At the MAIN MENU, press F4, and then F3 twice to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:FEATURES
RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIGURATION MENU
-------------------------------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
F2
BUTTON
CONFIG
-
HELP
Button/Rotary Configuration
Switch Configuration
Menu Item List Configuration
DEK Configuration
EXIT, Return to Radio Wide Configuration Menu
F3
SWITCH
CONFIG
F4
MENU
ITEM
F5
DEK
CONFIG
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is a multi-level menu that is used to change, view, or
modify codeplug features and option configurations that affect both
Conventional and Trunking operation. Typically, when you begin to
edit a codeplug, you must access this menu and configure Radio wide
options first by working your way through the screens located below
this menu. This will allow the options on other screens to reflect Radio
wide options. Some fields will not be visible if the radio does not support
the options that they relate to.
The radio is shipped from the factory with a preset feature and option
configuration, including the configuration of the control buttons,
switches, and menu (display models). The function (and location) of
most of these operator controls may be modified if necessary to
provide more user flexibility and/or permit access to other userdefined features and options.
Note: Do NOT duplicate a function on multiple controls (on a
button and a switch, or a button and a menu, or a switch and a
menu for instance). This may cause the radio to malfunction
and may confuse the operator.
F2 - BUTTON CONFIG
(Button Configuration)
Brings up a screen where you can edit button assignments for the
radio.
F3 - SWITCH CONFIG
(Switch Configuration)
Brings up a screen where you can edit switch assignments for the
radio.
F4 - MENU ITEM
(Menu Item Configuration)
Brings up a screen where you can configure menus that appear on the
radio’s display. Menu items are supported only on front-display models.
F5 - DEK Config
(DEK Configuration)
Brings up a screen where you can edit DEK (Direct Entry Keypad)
button assignments for the radio.
105
Radio Wide
Button
Configuration
DCCB
At the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3 twice, and then F2 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01KHH9PW5AN
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
..CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:FEATURES:BUTTONS
_ PWR ___[Unpr]___[Unpr]_____
HAND HELD
CONTROL HEAD
/
|
|
PTT|
|
|
TOP BUTTONS
Ctrl Head Display
[Unpr]
\
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
<MIC>
VolUp
VolDn
[ChUp]
[ChDn]
SIDE
BUTTONS
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
1 [Unpr] 2 [Unpr] 3 [Unpr]
4 [Unpr] 5 [Unpr] 6 [Unpr]
7 [Unpr] 8 [Unpr] 9 [Unpr]
__*________0________#________
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
Hand-Held Control Head Button Configuration Screen
There are four screens in the RSS which pertain to Radio Wide button
configuration. You may or may not be able to access some or all these
screens based on the model of the current radio (or codeplug) and the options
ordered with it.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01KHL9PW4AN
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
..CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:FEATURES:BUTTONS
CONTROL HEAD - C
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
|
|
|--------------------------------|
[ChUp]
|
|
|
|
|
| PWR
|
CONTROL HEAD BUTTONS
|
|
|
|
|
[ChDn]
|
|
|--------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
[Menu]
[ Sel]
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|
UP
MIDDLE
DOWN
|
| MICROPHONE BUTTONS
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
[Unpr]
|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
Control Head C Button Configuration Screen
This screen is used to assign the features to specific buttons. Use the
UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired function for this button
and then use the Enter (Carriage Return) or Tab key to advance to the
next button position. Use Shift-Tab to back up to the previous button
position.
106
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01KHM9PW5AN
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
..CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:FEATURES:BUTTONS
CONTROL HEAD - E
[ChDn]
[ChUp]
[ZnUp]
____
PWR
CONTROL HEAD BUTTONS
/
\
| CHAN |
\____/
[ZnDn]
[Unpr] [Unpr] [Unpr] [Unpr] [Unpr] [Unpr] [Unpr]
[ Sel]
[Menu]
MICROPHONE BUTTONS
1 [Unpr] 2 [Unpr] 3 [Unpr]
UP [Unpr]
4 [Unpr] 5 [Unpr] 6 [Unpr] MIDDLE [Unpr]
7 [Unpr] 8 [Unpr] 9 [Unpr]
DOWN [Unpr]
*
0
#
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
Control Head E Button Configuration Screen
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01KHN9PW5AN
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
..CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:FEATURES:BUTTONS
CONTROL HEAD - J
1
2
3
[Unpr] [Unpr] [Unpr]
4
5
6
[Unpr] [Unpr] [Unpr]
7
8
9
[Unpr] [Unpr] [Unpr]
*
0
#
[ZnUp]
PWR
CONTROL HEAD BUTTONS
[ZnDn]
[ Sel]
[Menu]
[ChDn]
[ChUp]
[Unpr][Unpr][Unpr][Unpr][Unpr][Unpr][Unpr]
MICROPHONE BUTTONS
F1
HELP
F2
F3
UP
[Unpr]
F4
MIDDLE
[Unpr]
F5
DOWN
[Unpr]
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
Control Head J Button Configuration Screen
The availability of certain button functions described below depends on your
radio model and the options you have selected for this radio. You may
therefore not be able to select some of these functions/choices for the radio
currently being configured.
For digit keys (1-9), the zero key serves as a function key. To activate a feature
programmed on a digit key, first press the zero key, then the digit key (1-9)
on which the desired feature is programmed.
107
Button Function
Description
Blank
This button is not assigned to any feature of the radio.
CA
The Direct Call Alert (CA1, CA2, ...) buttons allow instant access to the radio's Call
Alert feature. When the user presses a button programmed to CA #, the radio will
enter the Call Alert feature and transmit the list member corresponding to the
button's Index field. The Call List used will be the MDC Call List for MDC
Personalities, or the Call List assigned to the current Trunking Personality. [1]
Call
Used to program the Call button for use with Trunking Private Call and/or
Conventional MDC Call.
Chan
The channel button allows the user to select a channel in the radio with the keypad.
The button becomes a shortcut to the 'Chan' menu item.
ChUp
Used to advance upward through the channels in the radio.
ChDn
Used to proceed downward through the channels in the radio.
Del
Used to delete the digits or, in Conventional or Trunking Scan, used as Scan
Nuisance Delete.
Dim
Used to change the display brightness to one of four levels: from off to high, high to
medium, medium to low, or low to off.
Dir
Used on a Conventional mode to choose a Repeater or Direct Transmit Frequency
and Coded Squelch.
DM
The Direct Mode buttons (DM1, DM2, ...) allow instant access to a specific mode. A
short press of a Direct Mode button takes the radio to the mode assigned to that
button. A long press of a Direct Mode button assigns the currently selected mode to
that button.
Note:
If the Direct Mode field on the RadioWide More Options Screen (MAIN MENUF4-F3-F2-F9) is set to Fixed,the user will be able to use the DM buttons to change to the
mode that these buttons were previously programmed to. However, the user will not be
able to reassign the buttons to a different mode. The mode selection for each Direct
Mode button will, in essence, be fixed. The default mode for a Direct Mode button is
Zone 1, Channel 1. [1]
Dyn
Used for dynamic Priority Scan assignment.
Emer
Used with the Conventional and/or Trunking Emergency option to initiate
Emergency operation.
FScn
The Spectrum Scan button is used with SmartZone to initiate/continue a Full
Spectrum CC Scan. When pressed, the radio will scan the spectrum for a control
channel with a system ID that matches the system that the radio is currently using. If
the radio finds a control channel, it will stop. If the button is pressed again, the radio
will pick up where it left off in the spectrum and continue scanning. The radio
automatically stops scanning if it does not locate a control channel before the Full
Spectrum CC Scan Timer expires. The Timer duration can be set in the SmartZone
Environment screen (MAIN-F4-F4-F2-F2). The radio operator can manually stop the
scanning by changing the radio's mode.
IMPORTANT
Full Spectrum CC Scan must be enabled on the SmartZone Environment screen for
this feature to function properly.
108
H/L (Horn & Lights)
Used with the Conventional and/or Trunking External Alarm option to turn the
external alarms ON/OFF and to configure the alarms. These alarms are activated
when individual calls (Private Call, Call Alert Page, Phone, etc.) are received.
Home
Used to exit a feature such as Scan.
LPwr
Toggles the transmitting power from low to high.
Menu
Used to pick functionalities which are not programmed into a designated button.
MG
The Direct Message (MG1, MG2, ...) buttons allow instant access to the radio's
Message feature. When a button programmed to MG # is pressed, the radio will
check to see if it is currently in a personality which has Message enabled. If so, it will
transmit the Message number which is specified in the button's Index field. If the
current mode is Conventional, the Message List used will be the Conventional
Message Alias List. Otherwise, the Message Alias List assigned to the current
Trunking Personality will be used. If the personality does not have Message enabled,
no Message will be sent. [1]
Mon/Srch
The monitor button is valid only for conventional modes. Used to monitor channel
traffic; either take the microphone off-hook or press the MON button momentarily.
MON ON display indicates that the radio is monitoring.
On Coded Squelch modes, this turns off Receive-Coded Squelch operation and
allows monitoring of all the activity on the channel. The busy indicator will also be
illuminated when channel activity is present or the radio is unsquelched.
The search button is valid only on AMSS or SmartZone trunked modes. A momentary press
of the SRCH button will display the current site and its RSSI (Received Signal
Strength Indication) value. A long press of the search button will cause the radio to
attempt to change sites.
MPL
Used with the User-Selectable PL feature, also known as Multiple PL (MPL). A short
press displays the name of the currently selected MPL. A long press will allow the
currently selected MPL to be changed via the mode selector. After the radio is
programmed by the RSS, the radio's currently selected MPL will be reset to the first
entry in the MPL List.
Msg
Used with the Conventional MDC-1200 Message option and/or the Trunking
Message option to enter or exit the Message function.
Mute
Enable/disable keypad beeps.
MS1, MS2, MS3, MS4
The Mode Select features (MS1, MS2,...) allow instant access to a specific mode. A
long press of a button programmed for a Mode Select feature, assigns the currently
selected mode to the button. A short press, however, causes the radio to switch from
the currently selected mode to the zone/channel assigned to the Mode Select Button.
The default mode for the Mode Select feature is Zone 1, Channel 1.
One-Touch Buttons
A control head or mic/handset button programmed for one-touch button allows
Trunking features such as Status, Message, Private Call, Call Alert and Phone to
operate with the touch of a single button.
(1T1, 1T2, 1T3, and
1T4)
❒ When a button is programmed for one-touch Call Alert, Message, and Status,
pressing the control head button will cause the radio to automatically enter the
selected feature and transmit the list member corresponding to one-touch button
index.
❒ When a button is programmed for one-touch Phone, pressing the button will
cause the radio to send a phone request and transmit a pre-programmed phone
list number. The index field indicates which phone list number to transmit.
❒ When a button is programmed for one-touch Selective Call, pressing the button
will cause the radio to enter the Selective Call feature at the list member
corresponding to the one-touch button index.
Note: Pressing a one-touch button while the radio is already in the feature
corresponding to the one-touch button will cause the radio to abort the
feature.
Page
Used with the Conventional MDC-1200 Page option and/or the Trunking Page (Call
Alert) option to select a Page ID and to send a page.
109
PC
The Private Call (PC1, PC2, ...) buttons allow instant access to the radio's Private Call
feature. Pressing a button programmed to PC # will cause the radio to enter the
Private Call feature at the list member corresponding to the button's Index field. The
PTT must be pressed to initiate the private call. The Call List used will be the MDC
Call List for MDC Personalities, or the Call List assigned to the current Trunking
Personality. [1]
PH
The Direct Phone (PH1, PH2, ...) buttons allow instant access to the radio's Phone
feature. Pressing a button programmed to PH # will cause the radio to send a phone
request and transmit a pre-programmed number from the Radio Wide Phone List
(F4->F3->F4). The button's Index field indicates which phone list number to
transmit. [1]
Phon
Used with the Conventional Phone option and/or the Trunking Phone option to
select phone numbers and place a phone call.
Pwr
Used to turn on the radio.
Rab1
Repeater Access Button One. Used to send a repeater access code word.
Rab2
Repeater Access Button Two. Used to send a repeater access code word.
RCL
To recall the last mode visited for more than 3 seconds.
Resp
Call Response to the Phone Receive or Call Receive.
Rpgm
The Re-program Request button is used on Trunking modes with the Dynamic
Regrouping option to show the current dynamic regrouping state and to send in a
Re-program Request.
Scan
Used with the Conventional Scan option and/or the Trunking Scan option to select
scan lists and turn scan ON/OFF.
Sec
The SECURENET button is used with the SECURENET option to switch between
Clear (Off) and Coded (On) operation.
Sel
Select.
Site
Used with the Automatic Multiple Site Switching (AMSS) option or the SmartZone
option to display the lock status and toggle between lock and unlock status.
ST
The Direct Status (ST1, ST2, ...) buttons allow instant access to the radio's Status
feature. When a button with ST # is pressed, the radio will check to see if it is
currently in a personality that has Status enabled. If so, it will transmit the Status
number which is specified in the button's Index field. If the current mode is
Conventional, the Status List used will be the Conventional Status Alias List.
Otherwise, the Status Alias List assigned to the current Trunking Personality will be
used. If the personality does not have Status enabled, no Status will be sent. [1]
Sts
Used with the Conventional MDC-1200 Status option and/or the Trunking Status
option to enter or exit the status function.
Unpr
This button is not assigned to any feature of the radio.
ZnDn
Used to scroll downward through the zones in the radio, if Zone operation is enabled.
ZnUp
Used to advance upward through the zones in the radio, if Zone operation is enabled.
Zone
Used to select a Zone in the radio, if zone is selectable.
Note
[1] Only one button can be programmed with a given list member. For example, you can have a button
programmed with ST1, another button programmed with MG1, and another button programmed with ST2, b
cannot have two buttons both programmed with ST1.
110
Radio Wide
Switch
Configuration
DCCC
At the MAIN MENU, press F4 and then F3 three times to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...CONFIG:FEATURES:SWITCHES
RADIO WIDE SWITCH CONFIGURATION
-------------------------------
F1
HELP
F2
Switch Labels
-------------
Feature
-------
Ignition Switch
Blank
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to assign features to specific switches. Press Tab
to select the desired field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10).
If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll
through all the ignition switch options.
Field Definitions
Ignition Switch
The valid options for Ignition Switch are:
PTT Tx Inhibit
PTT transmission will be inhibited when the ignition
is off.
Tx Inhibit
All transmission will be inhibited when the ignition is
off. This includes emergency alarms.
Soft Power Off
The radio will power down when the ignition is turned
off.
Blank
Transmissions will not be inhibited when the ignition
is off.
The default is Blank.
111
Radio Wide
Menu Item
Configuration
DCCD
At the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3 twice, and then F4 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:FEATURES:MENUS
RADIO WIDE MENU ITEM CONFIGURATION
---------------------------------#
1
F1
HELP
Conv Item
--------ZONE
F2
ADD
CNV ITM
#
1
F3
F4
DELETE
CNV ITM
F5
F6
Trunk Item
---------ZONE
F7
ADD
TRK ITM
F8
F9
DELETE
TRK ITM
F10
EXIT
Radio models with the front display utilize a menu which appears on
the radio display to simplify radio operation. By pressing the
appropriate radio button to choose this menu, the sub-options or
features for this menu item will appear on the menu. From here the
features can be accessed easily. For example, pressing View might
display Phon, Call or Scan.
This RSS screen is used to customize the radio for the required feature
set. Depending on your radio version and model number, you will be able to
choose from all or some of the functions listed below. Features listed here but
that are disabled in the personality will not be shown on the RADIO WIDE
CONFIGURATION MENU. The menu items are displayed in the order in
which they are placed in the list.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired function.
Function Key Definitions
F2 - ADD CNV ITM
Adds a Conventional item.
F4 - DELETE CNV ITM
Deletes a Conventional item. You will be prompted before the item is
actually deleted.
F7 - ADD TRK ITM
Adds a Trunked item.
F9 - DELETE TRK ITM
Deletes a Trunked item. You will be prompted before the item is
actually deleted.
112
Field Definitions
Conv Item
CALL
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired menu function.
Press F2 to add and F4 to delete the highlighted Conventional item.
Depending on your radio version and model number, you will be able to
choose from some or all of the functions listed below.
Select Private Call ID and send Private Call.
For the radio to function properly, the Selective Call feature must be enabled on the PERSONALITY
MDC OPTIONS screen (F4/F6/F3/F7) and the Signalling Type must be set to MDC.
CHAN
Select/change Channels.
DIM
Change the display brightness to one of four levels: from off to high, high to medium, medium to
low, or low to off.
DIR
Enable/disable Talkaround.
For the radio to function properly, this feature must also be enabled on the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY
screen (F4/F6/F3).
H/L
Enable/disable Horn and Lights.
This feature must also be enabled on the ALARM OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F7).
HAND
Toggle between Handset and Microphone operation. In Handset operation, the audio is re-routed to
the Handset speaker for a private conversation when the handset is removed from its hang-up clip. In
Microphone operation, the audio is always routed through the speaker.
This feature is not compatible with the Hand Held Control Head (HHCH) feature.
MSG
Display the last acknowledged message to be transmitted and send a message.
MUTE
Enable/disable keypad beeps.
PAGE
Select Call Alert ID and send a Call Alert.
For the radio to function properly, this feature must also be enabled on the PERSONALITY MDC OPTIONS
screen (F4/F6/F3/F7).
PHON
Select DTMF Phone Number to be transmitted.
For the radio to function properly, this feature must also be enabled on the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY
screen (F4/F6/F3).
PROG
Change Phone/Scan lists.
For the radio to function properly, the Phone and/or the Scan feature must also be enabled on the
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen (F4/F6/F3).
PSWD
Change Radio Lock Password.
For PSWD to show on the RADIO WIDE MENU ITEM CONFIGURATION screen. RADIO LOCK must
be enabled on the RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F6).
PWR
Enable/disable Tx Low Power.
SCAN
Enable/disable Channel Scan.
For the radio to function properly, a scan list must be specified on the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY
screen (F4/F6/F3).
STS
Display the last acknowledged status to be transmitted and send status.
TX IN
Enable/disable Tx Inhibit.
VIEW
View Phone/Scan/Call lists.
For the radio to function properly, the Phone, Scan or Call List features must also be enabled on the
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen (F4/F6/F3).
ZONE
Select/change Zones.
113
Note: Do NOT duplicate a function on multiple controls (on a button
and a switch, or a button and a menu for instance). This may cause
the radio to malfunction and confuse the operator.
114
Trunk Item
CALL
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired menu function.
Use F7 to add, and F9 to delete, Trunking Menu functions. Depending
on your radio version and model number, you will be able to choose from all
or some of the functions listed below.
Select Private Call ID.
For the radio to function properly, this feature must also be enabled on the TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen
(F4/F4/F4).
CHAN
Select/change Channels.
DIM
Change the display brightness to one of four levels: from off to high, high to medium, medium to
low, or low to off.
FScn
The Spectrum Scan menu item is used with SmartZone to initiate/continue a Full Spectrum CC Scan.
When selected, the radio will scan the spectrum for a control channel with a system ID that matches
the system that the radio is currently using. If the radio finds a control channel, it will stop. If the
menu item is selected again, the radio will pick up where it left off in the spectrum and continue
scanning. The radio automatically stops scanning if it does not locate a control channel before the
Full Spectrum CC Scan Timer expires. The Timer duration can be set in the SmartZone Environment
screen (MAIN-F4-F4-F2-F2). The radio operator can manually stop the scanning by changing the
radio's mode.
IMPORTANT
Full Spectrum CC Scan must be enabled on the SmartZone Environment screen for this feature to
function properly.
H/L
Enable/disable Horn and Lights.
This feature must also be enabled on the ALARM OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F7).
HAND
Toggle between Handset and Microphone operation. In Handset operation, the audio is re-routed to
the Handset speaker for a private conversation when the handset is removed from its hang-up clip. In
Microphone operation, the audio is always routed through the speaker.
This feature is not compatible with the Hand Held Control Head (HHCH) feature.
MSG
Display the last acknowledged message to be transmitted and send a message.
MUTE
Enable/disable keypad beeps.
PAGE
Select Call Alert ID.
For the radio to function properly, this feature must also be enabled on the TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen
(F4/F4/F4).
PHON
Select DTMF Phone Number to be transmitted.
For the radio to function properly, the Phone Interconnect feature must also be enabled on the TRUNKING
PERSONALITY screen (F4/F4/F4).
PROG
Change Phone/Scan lists.
For the radio to function properly, the Phone and/or the Scan feature must also be enabled on the TRUNKING
PERSONALITY screen (F4/F4/F4).
PSWD
Change Radio Lock Password.
For PSWD to show on the RADIO WIDE MENU ITEM CONFIGURATION screen. RADIO LOCK must
be enabled on the RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F6).
PWR
Enable/disable Tx Low Power.
RPGM
Request Dynamic Regrouping.
SCAN
Enable/disable Channel Scan.
For the radio to function properly, this feature must also be enabled on the TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen
(F4/F4/F4).
115
SITE
Change AMSS or SmartZone Site.
For the radio to function properly, this feature must also be enabled on the TRUNKING SYSTEM screen
(F4/F4/F3).
STS
Display the last acknowledged status to be transmitted and send status.
TX IN
Enable/disable Tx Inhibit.
VIEW
View Phone/Scan lists.
For the radio to function properly, the Phone and/or Scan features must also be enabled on the TRUNKING
PERSONALITY screen (F4/F4/F4).
ZONE
Select/change Zones.
Note: Do NOT duplicate a function on multiple controls (on a button
and a switch, a button and a menu, or a switch and a menu for
instance). This may cause the radio to malfunction and confuse the
operator.
116
DEK Configuration
DCCE
At the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3 twice, and then F5 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:FEATURES:DEK
Number of DEK boxes...3
DEK BUTTON CONFIGURATION
DEK C
[Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ]
DEK B
[Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ]
DEK A
[Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ] [Blnk ]
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
DEK BOX
F3
F4
F5
DELETE TOP
DEK BOX
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
DEK Configuration Screen
The Direct Entry Keypad (DEK) screen is used to specify the number of
DEK boxes that are connected to the radio and to program each DEK
button to have a specific function.
DEK boxes allow the radio to effectively have more programmable
features and to access these features with a single button press.
Function Key Definitions
F2 - ADD DEK BOX
ADD DEK BOX allows you to add a DEK Box with 8 buttons. A
maximum of three DEK boxes may be added.
F5 - DELETE TOP DEK BOX
Delete Top Dek Box deletes the top DEK Box. In other words, if there
are two DEK Boxes, pressing F5 will delete DEK B, regardless of where
the cursor is currently positioned.
Field Definitions
Number of DEK Boxes
Number of DEK Boxes is a view-only field that displays the number of
DEK boxes connected to the radio. Each DEK box represents a group
of eight DEK buttons. This field will change as DEK boxes are added or
deleted by using the F2 and F5 function keys. The minimum number
of DEK boxes is 0. The maximum number of DEK boxes is 3.
The factory default is 0.
DEK Buttons
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired function for this
button and then use the Enter (Carriage Return) or Tab key to advance
to the next button position. Use the Shift Tab to backup to the
previous button position. The features available on the DEK buttons
are the same as those available on the Control Head Buttons ( see the
Radio Wide Button Configuration Screen).
117
Phone
Configuration
DCD
At the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3 and then F4 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:PHONE
PHONE CONFIGURATION
------------------Man Acc Live Dialing......Disabled
Phone Num Display Format......None
Num
--1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
NUMBER
F3
Phone Number
------------
F4
F5
DELETE
NUMBER
Phone Text
-----------PHONE 1
PHONE 2
PHONE 3
PHONE 4
PHONE 5
PHONE 6
PHONE 7
PHONE 8
F6
F7
F8
F9
ACCESS
DIAL
DEACCESS OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
This menu allows you to edit telephone interconnect configurations
for a radio including stored telephone numbers and aliases. These
parameters are radio wide and apply to both Trunking and
Conventional signalling.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If the field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value. Enter the phone number directly.
Use the PgUp and PgDn keys to view additional pages of phone lists.
Function Key Definitions
F2 - ADD NUMBER
Adds a new phone number entry.
F5 - DELETE NUMBER
Deletes an existing phone number. You will be prompted before the
number is actually deleted.
F8 - ACCESS/DEACCESS
Takes you to a screen where you can modify DTMF access codes.
F9 - DIAL OPTIONS
Takes you to a screen where you can modify DTMF timing parameters.
Field Definitions
Man Acc Live Dialing
Manual Access Live Dialing will function only on personalities with
unlimited phone access. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable
this feature. If this feature is enabled, the user will be able to dial phone
numbers and access codes directly from the keypad during
transmission.
Note: When enabled, this selection will override the phone
dialing selection on the DIAL OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F4/F9).
The default is Disabled.
118
Phone Num Display Format
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the format for displaying
telephone numbers. Valid choices are USA and None. If set to USA, the
phone numbers will be assumed to be in the format (area) code/
number.
The default is None which means no special formatting is required.
Phone Number
Enter a phone number of up to 16 characters. The digits 0 through 9
are all valid, and so are the special characters “P”, “*” and “#”. The “P”
entry causes the radio to pause momentarily during dialing. The
length of the pause is programmable from the DIAL OPTIONS screen
(F9 from the PHONE CONFIGURATION screen).
Numbers can be added and deleted using the F2 and F5 keys
respectively. New numbers will be added at the end of the list. A total
of 19 numbers are allowed for HHCH models and models II and III and 10
numbers for all other models.
Phone Text
Enter the alphanumeric name that will appear on the radio display for
this phone number. The maximum number of characters will be
determined by the radio model.
119
DTMF Access/
Deaccess Codes
DCDH
At the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3, F4 and then F8 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter Code.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:PHONE:CODES
DTMF ACCESS/DEACCESS CODES
-------------------------Num
--1
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
CODE
F3
Access Code
----------*1P#
F4
F5
DELETE
CODE
Deaccess Code
------------*1P#
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows the user to define Access/Deaccess Code pairs used
for DTMF phone option. The Access Code is used to keep unauthorized
users from using the interconnect system on the repeater. The
Deaccess Code is used to inform the system about the end of a call and
thus minimize wasted air time. The valid symbols are 0 (zero) through
9, “*”, “#” and “P” (for pause).
Note: These codes can be selected in the Auto Access Code field
on the PHONE OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F4/F9). Up to 19 code
pairs may be defined.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, enter the Access or Deaccess Code
directly.
Function Key Definitions
F2 - ADD CODE
Adds another Access/Deaccess Code pair.
F5 - DELETE CODE
Deletes the highlighted Access/Deaccess Code pair from the list. You
will be prompted before the code pair is actually deleted.
120
Field Definitions
Access Code
Enter the code that will be used to access the phone line. Some
Conventional interconnect systems require a “*” to access the
telephone line. Other systems require a multi-digit Access Code which
consists of 1 to 4 digits and may or may not contain a “*”. Multi-digit
Access Codes are used to prevent unauthorized subscriber units from
accessing the interconnect system.
Note: To enter pause (P) from the keypad, press “*” and then
“#”.
Codes can be added and deleted using the F2 and F5 keys respectively.
New codes will be added at the end of the list.
Note: A total of 19 unique Access pairs are allowed.
Deaccess Code
Enter a one- to four-digit release code to deaccess the phone line. Some
Conventional interconnect systems require a “#” to release
(disconnect) the telephone line when the user has finished using it.
Release codes are used for system management purposes to improve
system loading by eliminating dead air time after interconnect calls are
completed.
Note: To enter pause (P) from the keypad, press “*” and then
“#”.
Codes can be added and deleted using the F2 and F5 function keys.
New codes will be added to the end of the list.
Note: A total of 19 unique Deaccess pairs are allowed.
121
Dialing Options
At the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3, F4 and then F9 to access this screen.
DCDI
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:PHONE:DTMF
DIALING OPTIONS
--------------Phone Dialing. Delayed Buffered
DTMF Digit Hangtime (ms)....1000
Num
--1
2
3
4
F1
HELP
F2
Initial Delay
(ms)
------------1000
250
350
350
F3
F4
DTMF Pause Time (ms)........1000
Digit Duration
(ms)
-------------125
150
125
125
F5
F6
Interdigit Delay
(ms)
---------------75
100
75
75
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to modify DTMF phone-wide parameters such
as timing and phone dial operation. Each Conventional system uses
one of these parameter sets which are selected in the Auto Access Code
field on the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen (F4/F6/F3).
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
Phone Dialing
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the type of Dialing operation
from among the following:
Immediate Live
Automatically connects the radio to the system when entering
phone mode (live dial).
Immediate Buffered
Automatically connects the radio to the system when entering
phone mode (buffered dial).
Delayed Buffered
Automatically connects the radio to the system when PTT is
pressed (buffered dial). Allows the user to enter the phone
number in the radio and then transmit the phone number after
pressing PTT.
DTMF Digit Hangtime (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to specify the amount of time the radio
continues transmitting after completion of a DTMF digit transmission.
Valid selections are 25 to 6375 ms in 25-ms increments.
The default is 1 second (1000 ms).
DTMF Pause Time (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to select the length of time that the carrier
is transmitted before the radio begins to transmit DTMF digits. Valid
selections are 500 to 4000 ms in 500-ms increments.
The default is 1000 ms (1 second).
122
Initial Delay (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to select the pre-time for DTMF signalling
or the length of time that carrier is transmitted before the DTMF digit
is transmitted. Valid selections are 0 (zero) to 6375 ms in 25-ms
increments.
The default is 250 ms.
Digit Duration (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to select the length of time that the DTMF
digit will be transmitted. Valid selections are 25 to 6375 ms in 25-ms
increments.
The default is 150 ms.
Interdigit Delay (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to select the time delay between
transmission of digits in a DTMF digit transmission sequence. Valid
selections are 0 (zero) to 250 ms in 25-ms increments.
The default is 100 ms.
123
Radio Wide Scan
Lists and Options
DCE
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3 and then F5 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Page 1 of 2
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:SCAN
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
Scan List.............1
SCAN LIST
--------Mem Zn
Scan Type.............Conventional --- -1
2
Dynamic Priority..........Disabled
3
Priority 1 Type..............Fixed
4
Priority 1 Member............None
5
Priority 2 Type..............Fixed
6
Priority 2 Member............None
7
NonPriority Members..........Fixed
8
Designated Tx Mem....
Talkback
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
LIST
F3
PREV
LIST
F4
NEXT
LIST
F5
DELETE
LIST
Chn
---
F6
DELETE
MEMBER
Zone
----
F7
F8
SCAN
OPTIONS
Channel
-------
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to configure the Channel Scan feature and to enter
the scan list. Each personality selects a scan list by choosing the scan
list number. Both Conventional and Trunking personalities may use
these scan lists by choosing the appropriate scan list number on the
CONVENTIONAL AND TRUNKING PERSONALITY screens. However,
the scan list type must be compatible with the capability of the personality;
for instance, a Conventional personality cannot choose a Trunking Type II
list.
Note: All systems, personalities and zone/channel assignments
must be completed before you attempt to create a scan list.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value. Use the PgUp/PgDn keys to view
additional pages of the scan list if any.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD LIST
Adds a scan list. You may have up to 20 scan lists.
F3 - PREV LIST
Displays information for the previous scan list.
F4 - NEXT LIST
Displays information for the next scan list.
F5 - DELETE LIST
Delete the current scan list.
F6 - DELETE MEMBER
Deletes the currently highlighted member from the scan list.
F8 - SCAN OPTIONS
Brings up the SCAN OPTIONS screen where you will be able to
customize the Channel Scan feature for specific applications.
124
Field Definitions
Scan List
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select a specific scan list, or use the
F3/F4 function keys to scroll through the lists. Each mode has a
unique scan list. Each Conventional and Trunking personality may
have a unique scan list. The scan lists defined on this screen are
assigned on the CONVENTIONAL and TRUNKING PERSONALITY
screens. Lists may be added by pressing the F2 key and the currently
highlighted list can be deleted using the F5 key.
The default is 1.
Scan Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the type of scan list. The
choices are:
Conventional
May contain only Conventional personalities (up to 15 members).
Talkgroup
May contain both Conventional and Trunked personalities from different
systems (up to 10 members).
Priority Mon(itor)
May contain only Trunking personalities from the same Type II system (up
to 10 members).
If the SMARTNET Type I feature has been purchased, this type may contain
Trunking personalities from the same Type I system (up to 10 members).
Subfleet
May contain only Trunking personalities from the same Type I system (up
to 10 members).
The default is Conventional.
Dynamic Priority
This field will be visible only if Scan Type is set to Conventional. When this
feature is enabled, the Priority 2 Type field will not be visible. Use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Dynamic Priority. The last
channel transmitted on will become (and remain) the Second Priority
Channel until a new channel is transmitted on or scan is disabled. The
priority of the First Priority channel is not affected.
The default is Disabled.
Priority 1 Type &
Priority 2 Type
This field is visible only if the Scan Type field is set to Conventional or
Priority Monitor. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the type of
Priority Scan the radio will use from among the following:
Selected Chan
The radio will use the last selected channel as the Priority Member. First
priority and second priority may not both refer to the selected channel.
Fixed
The radio uses a selected member of the scan list, set from the RSS, as the
Priority Channel. This member is fixed and cannot be programmed from the radio.
OP/SEL
(Operator
Selectable)
The radio uses a selected member of the scan list as the Priority Channel. The
user must select the member of the scan list to be used as the priority member.
This member can be programmed both from the RSS and the radio.
Disabled
No Priority Channel will be allowed.
The default is Disabled.
125
Priority 1 Member
This field is visible only when the Priority 1 Type field is set to Fixed or OP/
SEL. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Scan member which
has First Priority in scan selection. The channel number may also be
entered directly. When assigned, the Priority 1 Member is typically
Member 1 in the Scan List. Select None for no First Priority channel.
The default is None.
Priority 2 Member
This field is visible only when the Priority 2 Type field is set to Fixed or OP/
SEL. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Scan Member which
has Second Priority in scan selection. Select None for no Second
Priority channel.
Note: The member selections for Priority 1 Member and Priority
2 Member must be different.
The default is None.
Non-Priority Members
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the non-priority scan type
from among the following:
Fixed
The radio uses a selected member of the scan list configured from the RSS as
the Priority Channel. This member is fixed and cannot be programmed from the
radio.
OP/SEL
The radio uses a selected member of the scan list as the Priority Channel. The
user must select the member of the scan list to be used as the priority member.
This member can be programmed both from the RSS and the radio.
(Operator
Selectable)
The default is Fixed.
Designated Tx Mem
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Designated Transmit
Talkback channel. For Conventional scan lists, this may be the number
of the scan member which will serve as designated transmit channel
during scan operation. Enter the number of the scan member to have
a fixed channel. This channel may not be a receive-only channel. The
other options are:
Selected Chan
Transmission will occur on the last user-selected channel.
Talkback
Transmission will occur on the same channel that the scanner stopped on.
Note: If the channel is a receive-only channel, the radio will
issue a warning to inform you that transmission is not possible.
The default is Talkback.
Zn
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Zone (or System) for this
member of the scan list. The Zone (System) name from the ZONE/
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen (F4/F8) will be shown to the right.
Chn
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Channel (or Subfleet) for
this member of the scan list. The Zone (System) name from the ZONE/
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen (F4/F8) will be shown to the right.
126
Note: If the field displays “???”, an invalid channel condition
exists.
Trunking System ID (not shown)
This field is visible only if the Scan Type field is set to Priority Monitor or
Subfleet. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Trunking System
this personality is to use. (The System ID is shown according to system
number.)
Note: The Trunking System should be set up in the TRUNKING
SYSTEM screen (F4/F4/F3) before personality information is
entered since some fields in this screen depend on system
information.
The default is 1-0001.
Trunking System Type (not
shown)
This field is read-only and is visible only if the Scan Type field is set to
Priority Monitor or Subfleet. The value in this field is derived from
settings in the TRUNKING SYSTEM screen (F4/F4/F3).
127
Radio Wide Scan
Options
DCEH
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3, F5 and then F8 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:SCAN:OPTIONS
SCAN OPTIONS
-----------RADIO WIDE
CONVENTIONAL
--------------------Nuisance Mode Delete......Disabled
Carrier Detect Required...Disabled
Priority Scan Alert.......Disabled
Priority Chan Marking.....Disabled
Rx Hold Time (sec)...............3
Monitor Hold Time (sec)..........6
HUB Suspends Scan..........Enabled
Voting Scan...............Disabled
Suspend All Scan.........Disabled
TRUNKING
-------Failsoft Hold Time (sec).........6
System Search Time (sec).........1
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to customize the Channel Scan feature for specific
applications. Options and parameters that affect Radio wide,
Conventional and Trunking operations are available. Press Tab to
select the desired field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10). If
a field is highlighted, press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the
desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
Nuisance Mode Delete
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. The
Nuisance Mode Delete setting allows the user to temporarily delete
from the scan list non-priority channels that are constantly busy. Such
activity may cause the radio to be constantly locked onto a channel. A
channel deleted using this option will remain deleted until scan is turned off.
When scan is turned on, all channels that were previously deleted will be
replaced.
The default is Enabled.
Priority Scan Alert
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If this
option is enabled, the radio will audibly alert you in one of two ways
described below when it unmutes on a priority channel while
scanning:
❒ One beep is generated for the priority talkgroup/subfleet in a
Trunked scan list or for the first priority channel in a
Conventional scan list.
❒ Two beeps are generated for the second priority channel in a
Conventional scan list.
The default is Disabled.
128
Rx Hold Time (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the amount of time the radio
remains on a channel after a message has been received before
scanning resumes. Valid entries range from 0 (zero) to 255 seconds in
one-second increments.
The default is 3 seconds.
HUB Suspends Scan
This field is used to enable/disable the HUB (Hang Up Box) Suspends
Scan feature.
When enabled, this feature operates as follows:
- If using either a Conventional channel in non-Talkback scan
mode or a Trunking channel in non-Talkback scan mode, scan
operation is suspended while the microphone is removed from the
hang up box. This allows the user to complete a conversation
during this time.
- If using a Conventional channel in Talkback scan mode or a
Trunking Priority Monitor channel in Talkback Scan mode,
standard scan operation is suspended while the microphone is
removed from the hang up box. However, scan will continue to
look at priority members for activity. If activity occurs on priority
members, the radio will scan to the active member and
unmute.
- The Suspend All Scan field will become available to the user.
When enabled, Suspend All Scan enhances the HUB Suspends Scan
operation by suspending ALL scan operation (including scan to
priority members in Conventional or Priority Monitor Talkback
Scan mode).
The factory default is Disabled.
Suspend All Scan
This field is used to enable/disable the HUB (Hang Up Box) Suspend All
Scan feature. When enabled, this feature enhances the HUB Suspends
Scan operation. If using a Conventional channel in Talkback scan
mode or Trunking Priority Monitor channel in Talkback scan mode,
ALL scan operation, including scan to priority members, is suspended
while the microphone is removed from the hang up box. This allows
the user to complete a conversation during this time without the
possibility of interruption by scanning to a priority channel.
Note: The setting of HUB Suspend All Scan does not affect the
way the HUB Suspends Scan feature operates for Talkgroup or
Sub-Fleet scan.
The factory default is Disabled.
Carrier Detect Required
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. When
this option is enabled, the radio will stop scanning and operate on the
priority channels based on carrier squelch detect, but will only
unmute on the standard signalling conditions programmed for that
channel.
The default is Disabled.
129
Priority Chan Marking
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. When
this option is enabled and the radio is in Priority Scan mode, the radio
checks the channel for activity and proper PL. If the channel has
Carrier but the wrong PL or no PL, the channel is marked so that the
radio will not check a second time for the proper PL. The radio will not
unmute on this channel until carrier is dropped. This is done to
eliminate time spent checking for proper PL and thus minimize audio
holes.
Note: Care should be exercised in using this feature. It is possible
for messages to be missed especially if long repeater hangtimes
are used.
The default is Disabled.
Monitor Hold Time (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the length of time that the
radio will remain on a Conventional channel during scan after the
monitor button has been released. Valid entries range from 0 (zero) to
255 seconds in one-second increments.
The default is 6 seconds.
Voting Scan
Conventional Voting Scan is used to select the best repeater to use in
a multi-frequency simulcast conventional system. Enabling this field
will cause all conventional personalities using a conventional scan list
with Auto Scan enabled (Main-/F4/F6/F3/F9) to perform conventional
voting scan.
!
Caution
Having more that 7 list members in a conventional scan list
used for Conventional Voting Scan may degrade
performance, resulting in missed transmissions.
Before using Conventional Voting Scan, you must first create a
conventional scan list which contains all repeaters in the
Conventional Voting Scan wide area network. Each conventional
personality in this list must have Auto Scan enabled.
The default is disabled.
Failsoft Hold Time (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select Trunking Failsoft Activity
Time. This value determines how long the radio will stay unmuted on
a failsoft channel if failsoft is found while in talkgroup scan. Valid
values range from 1 to 255 seconds in one-second increments. You
may also select Disabled.
The default is 6 seconds.
System Search Time (sec)
This timer applies only to systems which do not employ the scan marker
feature. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Trunk
Activity Search Time. This timer determines how long the radio will
stay on the control channel searching for voice activity before
scanning the next system. Valid entries range from 0 (zero) to 255
seconds in increments of one second each.
The default is 10 seconds for SMARTNET models and one second for
Privacy Plus models.
130
Radio Wide Display
Options
DCF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3 and then F6 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:DISP DATA
RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS
-------------------------Text Justification....... Left
Alt Display Time (ms).........1000
Temp Msg Display Time (ms)....1000
Channel Text Size...........14
Zone Text Size..............14
Emergency Receive.........Disabled
Slow Scroll Rate (ms).....1000
Fast Scroll Rate (ms)......250
Slow Scroll Count............3
Radio Lock................ Enabled
Mandatory Password.......Disabled
Max Password Length.............8
Password.........................
Save Dim State........Disabled
Native Language........English
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
MORE
OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
This screen permits modifications to display options to customize the
radio to specific user applications. The features and options shown
here apply to all systems and personalities. Press Tab to select the
desired field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is
highlighted, press the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired
choice or value.
Field Definitions
Text Justification
This is a read only field. This setting applies to Channel and Zone
names, Phone aliases, Private Call List aliases, Call Alert aliases, Status
aliases and Message aliases.
The default is Left.
Channel Text Size
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Channel (Subfleet) Text
Size. Valid entries range from 1 to 14 characters in length depending on
the radio model. The Channel Text size will vary inversely with the Zone
(System) Text size since both must be displayed at the same time.
For eight -character, one-lie display models, the default is three. For 14character, one-line display models, the default is 11. For two-line display
models, the channel text size field will be a read-only field with a fixed value
of 14.
Zone Text Size
This is a read-only field. The value in this field is automatically
calculated based on the value you specified in the Channel Text field.
This is because both must Channel and Zone Text must be displayed
at the same time. Valid entries are 0 (zero) to 13 characters in length
depending on the radio model.
For eight-character, one-line display models, the default is five. For 14character, one-line display models, the default is three. For two-line display
models, the zone text size field will be a read-only field with a fixed value of
14.
131
Slow Scroll Rate (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Slow Scroll Rate, the rate
at which the display will slow scroll through a list. The radio will first
slow scroll and then fast scroll after the slow scroll count expires. Valid
entries are 250 to 6250 ms in 250-ms increments.
Note: The Slow Scroll Rate should be greater than or equal to
Fast Scroll Rate but less than or equal to 6250 (that is, 250 <= Fast
Scroll Rate <= Slow Scroll Rate <= 6250).
The default is 1000 ms.
Fast Scroll Rate (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Fast Scroll Rate, the rate at
which the display will fast scroll through a list. The radio will first slow
scroll and then fast scroll after the slow scroll count expires. Valid
entries range from 250 to 6250 ms in 250-ms increments.
Note: The Fast Scroll Rate should be greater than or equal to 250
but less than or equal to Slow Scroll Rate (that is, 250 <= Fast
Scroll Rate <= Slow Scroll Rate <= 6250).
The default is 250 ms.
Slow Scroll Count
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the number of menus to be
scrolled before the radio switches to the Fast Scroll Rate. Valid entries
range from 0 (zero) to 255.
The default is 3 menus.
Save Dim State
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this option. If this
field is enabled, display brightness will to be saved to the EEPROM for
use during power-up initialization.
The default is Disabled.
Native Language
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the language for radio display.
Valid entries are English, Spanish, French, German, Italian and
Portuguese.
The default is English.
Alt Display Time (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the length of time that an
Alternate message will be displayed. Valid entries range from 250 to
6250 ms in 250-ms increments.
The default is 1 second (1000 ms).
Temp Msg Display Time (ms)
This refers to the length of time that a Temporary message will be
displayed. Valid entries range from 250 to 6250 ms in 250-ms
increments.
The default is 1 second (1000 ms).
Emergency Receive
132
This feature is not compatible with Silent Emergency. To enable this feature,
Silent Alarm must be disabled (F4/F3/F2/F7). Use the UP/DOWN arrow
keys to enable/disable the Emergency Receive Display option. If this
feature is enabled, the radio display will alternate between Emergency
Receive and the current channel when it unmutes on an emergency
call. For eight-character display models, “EMER RCV” will be
displayed. Emergency must be enabled on each Trunking personality on the
EMERGENCY DATA CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F4/F4/F8) if your radio
supports the emergency feature.
The default is Disabled.
WARNING
Radio Lock
Do not enable this feature for radios without keypads. If you do so,
the radio will become inoperable since you cannot unlock the
radio by entering the password.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable the Radio Lock feature.
When this field is enabled, the user will be required to enter the Radio
Lock Password on power up before using the radio.
The factory default is Disabled.
Mandatory Password
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable the Mandatory Password
option.
When this field is enabled, the user must enter a password each time
the radio is turned on. If this option is disabled, the user may avoid
entering a password by changing it to NULL. (See Radio Operator's
Manual.)
The factory default is Disabled.
Max Password Length
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Maximum Password
Length. Valid entries are 1 to 8 characters.
This is the maximum length a password is allowed to be. The radio
uses this value only when the password function is enabled on a
menu. This field is only applicable when the Radio Lock feature is
enabled.
The factory default is 8.
Password
Enter the numeric Password directly from the keyboard. The password
is the numeric value which must be entered when the radio is turned
on when the radio lock feature is enabled.
The factory default is NULL.
133
Radio Wide Display
More Options
DCFI
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3, F6, and then F9 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...CONFIG:DISP DATA:MORE OPTIONS
RADIO WIDE DISPLAY MORE OPTIONS
------------------------------Caller ID.............. Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen permits modification of display options to customize the
radio to specific user applications. The features and options shown
here apply to all systems and personalities.
Field Definitions
Caller ID
The Caller ID feature displays ID information of the last radio to
initiate a call that the radio unmuted upon. This information is
automatically displayed.
-
ID Only - The radio will display the ID of the last radio which
initiated the current call
-
Alias Text - The radio will attempt to match the Caller ID with
a member of the current Cal List and display a name instead
of a number.
The default is Disabled.
134
Alarm Options
DCG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F3, and then F7 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONFIG:ALARM OPTIONS
ALARM OPTIONS
------------Horn And Lights............ Enabled
Permanent Horn & Lights...Disabled
Alarm Rearm Option.........Disabled
Ext Alarm Delay (Sec).............7
Horn & Light Duration.............4
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
The ALARM OPTIONS screen is used to program and enable Horn and
Light features. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired
function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
Horn and Lights
This field is used to enable the radio’s Horn and Lights Alarm option.
The default is Disabled.
Permanent Horn & Lights
This field will be visible only if the Horn and Lights option is enabled. If this
feature is enabled, there will be no repetitive Horn and Lights display
and the radio powers up with alarm armed.
The default is Disabled.
Alarm Rearm Option
This field will be visible only if the Horn and Lights option is enabled. If this
option is enabled, Horn and Lights will remain armed even after the
user responds to a call. In this case, the only way to disarm Horn and
Lights is by pressing the H/L button. If this option is disabled, the
alarm is disarmed on receipt of an incoming call.
The default is Disabled.
Ext Alarm Delay (sec)
This field will be visible only if the Horn and Lights Option is enabled. This
value in this field represents the time delay before horn and lights are
activated. The valid range is 0 (zero) to 15 seconds.
The default value is 7 seconds.
Horn & Light Duration
This field will be visible only if the Horn and Lights Option is enabled. This
field represents the maximum length of time the horn will stay on
before the user responds to a call. Valid values range from 1 to 255. A
value of Infinite is also available.
The default is 4 seconds.
135
Notes
136
Trunking Menu
DD
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING
TRUNKING MENU
------------F1 - HELP
F2 - Trunking Radio Wide Options
F3 - Trunking Systems: System ID, Control Channels, etc.
F4 - Trunking Personality: Talk Groups, Emergency options, etc.
F5 - Trunking Call List Data
F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 - EXIT, Return to Change/View Menu
F1
HELP
F2
F3
TRUNK
TRUNK
WIDE OPT SYS
F4
TRUNK
PERS
F5
TRUNK ID
LIST
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to navigate to the Trunking edit screens. The
options in these menus pertain only to Trunking radio features.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - TRUNK WIDE OPT
(Trunking Radio Wide Options)
Brings up a screen that permits access to options relating to Trunking
operation.
F3 - TRUNK SYS
(Trunking Systems)
Brings up a screen used to change and view Trunked system
parameters. A Trunking system refers to a specific repeater site, system
ID, individual radio ID for that system, control channel frequencies
and the connect tone required to operate on that system.
F4 - TRUNK PERS
(Trunking Personality)
Brings up a screen used to change and view the parameters for a
Trunking personality. A Trunking personality refers to the type of
features and options that are used on a Trunking channel or talkgroup.
Multiple personalities may use the same system and multiple
talkgroups may use the same personality.
F5 - TRUNK ID LIST
(Trunking Call List)
Brings up a screen used to edit the list of Trunking Call IDs and their
corresponding names (or aliases).
137
Trunking Radio
Wide Options
DDB
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice and then F2 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
...CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:WIDE OPTIONS
TRUNKING RADIO WIDE OPTIONS
--------------------------Telephone Interconnect.......Half Duplex
ISW Window Adjust................... 9B
Auto Dial Holdoff (ms)..............2000
RF Modem........................Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
SMRTZN
ENV
F3
VOC
OPT
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
The options and parameters on this menu apply to all Trunking
operation independent of system, personality or talkgroup. Other
radio wide options that apply to both Conventional and Trunking
operation are located on the RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/
F2). Conventional options are located on the CONVENTIONAL
RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen (F4/F6/F2).
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - SMRTZN ENV
(SmartZone Environment)
This function will be visible only when a radio with the SmartZone software
option has been read. Displays the screen where SmartZone operating
environment parameters are defined.
F3 - VOC OPT
(Voice-On-Control Options)
This function will be visible only when a radio with the Voice-On-Control
option has been read. Displays the screen which allows you to specify
Voice-On-Control option parameters.
138
Field Definitions
Telephone Interconnect
ISW Window Adjust
Mobile products supported by this RSS support half-duplex phone
communication ONLY. This option allows the radio to initiate and
receive land-to-mobile telephone calls and specifies the type of
interconnect.
Half duplex
Implies that communication can take place in one
direction at a time only.
Full duplex
Permits communication in both directions
simultaneously.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a code or enter the code
directly.The ISW Window Adjust value is a timing parameter that is
used to fine-tune Trunking system performance. The valid range of
values is 0 (zero) to FFFF in increments of 1.
The default varies according to radio bandsplit.
!
Caution
Auto Dial Holdoff (ms)
Do NOT modify this field unless you are a Motorola
Field Technical Representative or unless you understand
Trunking system timing and are absolutely certain that
your modification is correct. Changing the ISW Window
Adjust may actually degrade Trunking system
performance.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the amount of time the radio
will wait after gaining access to the phone channel before a prequeued phone number will be dialed. It ensures that the fixed end is
ready for dialing to commence. Valid entries range from 0 (zero) to
6375 in the increments of 25 ms.
The default is 2000 ms.
RF Modem
If RF Modem is enabled, the radio will be able to function only as an
RF Modem (that is, for use with system watch). When RF Modem is
disabled, the radio operates normally.
The default is Disabled.
139
SmartZone
Environment
DDBB
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice and then F2 twice to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
..WIDE OPTIONS:SMARTZONE ENVIRONMENT
SMARTZONE ENVIRONMENT
----------Failsoft Inactivity (sec).....120
Filter Constant K1..............7
Busy Override Delay (sec).......4
Filter Constant K2..............6
Aff. Hold Off (sec)...........255
Filter Constant K3..............5
Busy Override Chirp Ack........ON
Filter Threshold Constant T1...14
Display Site Trunking..........ON
Filter Threshold Constant T2...1A
Full Spectrum CC Scan..........ON
Filter Threshold Constant T3...20
Full Spectrum CC Scan Timer...10
RSSI OSW Counter...............80
RSSI Acceptable Threshold......61
RSSI Good Threshold............66
RSSI Excellent Threshold.......69
VC RSSI Accpt Threshold..Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to change and view parameters for the
SmartZone environment. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press
the desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
Failsoft Inactivity (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value
directly. If a radio remains inactive while operating in failsoft for this
time specified in this field, the radio will momentarily leave failsoft
and attempt to find a control channel. A value of zero in this field
indicates that the radio will not leave failsoft. The valid range is 0
(zero) to 255 seconds in one-second increments.
The default is 120 seconds.
Busy Override Delay (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value
directly. This is the time interval (in seconds) during which the user
must depress the PTT button in order for the radio to issue a busy
override signal. The valid range is 2 to 6 seconds in one-second
increments.
The default is 4 seconds.
Aff. Hold Off (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value
directly. This is the time that the radio should delay before affiliating
to a new site when leaving a site which just incurred a failure. Valid
entries are 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127 and 255 seconds.
The default is 255 seconds.
140
Busy Override Chirp Ack
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection. If this field is set to
On, the radio will produce a chirping sound after a busy override has
been issued.
The default is On.
Display Site Trunking
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection. If this field is set to
On, the radio will display the Site Trunking message when the user is
locked onto a site that is in Site Trunking mode.
The default is On.
Full Spectrum CC Scan
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection. If this field is set to
On, the radio will perform a Full Spectrum Control Channel (CC) scan
when the radio goes out of range of all its programmed control
channel information.
The default is Off.
Full Spectrum CC Scan Timer
(sec)
This field will be visible only if Full Spectrum CC Scan is set to On. Use the
UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value directly.
This is the amount of time that is available to the radio to perform a
full spectrum CC scan before returning to the normal CC scan. The
valid range of values is 5 to 31 seconds.
The default is 10 seconds.
RSSI (Received Signal Strength
Indication) OSW Counter
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value
directly. This is the number of OSWs (in 23-ms intervals) for which the
radio must remain inactive on the control channel before a set of RSSI
samples is taken. Domain: {n: 60 <= n <= 255}.
Note: RSSI or Received Signal Strength Indication refers to the
strength of the current signal. Although the MCS 2000 is a
companion to the MTS 2000 portable, the RSSI threshold constants
and site switching characteristics are not the same.
RSSI Acceptable Threshold
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value
directly. In the RSSI sampling scheme, RSSI values are separated into
four levels -- poor, acceptable, good and excellent – as shown (i.e.: all
values below the acceptable constant fall into the POOR level, values
between the acceptable and good constants fall into the ACCEPTABLE
level, etc.). The value in this field specifies the POOR/ACCEPTABLE
boundary. Domain {L: 00 <= L <= FF}.
FF
Excellent
Good
L
00
Acceptable
Poor
141
RSSI Good Threshold
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value
directly. In the RSSI sampling scheme, RSSI values are separated into
four levels: poor, acceptable, good and excellent. This value specifies
the acceptable/good boundary. Domain {L: 00 <= L <= FF}.
RSSI Excellent Threshold
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value
directly. In the RSSI sampling scheme, RSSI values are separated into
four levels: poor, acceptable, good and excellent. This value specifies
the good/excellent boundary. Domain {L: 00 <= L <= FF}.
VC RSSI Accpt Threshold
(Voice Channel RSSI Acceptable
Threshold)
While in a voice call, RSSI samples will be compared against the Voice
Channel RSSI Acceptable Threshold. If samples fall below this
threshold, the radio will initiate an attempt at site switching, causing
an interruption in the voice call. Valid RSSI values range from 1 to FF.
Selecting Disabled will set the threshold to 0, disabling voice channel
RSSI site switching.
The factory default is Disabled.
Special Note On RSSI
Threshold Constant
Settings
The default values for the RSSI (received signal strength indication)
threshold constants programmed in your radio may not be optimal for
your system. These values are critical for proper site switching. Please
review the following information to set the RSSI threshold constants
for your SmartZone system configuration and desired site switching
performance.
RSSI ranking levels are as follows:
Acceptable Threshold
The acceptable Threshold sets the minimum audio quality level. A
signal with an RSSI value lower than the acceptable threshold will
switch to any site with a better audio quality rating.
Increase this level to always require a better signal. Decrease this
threshold level to prevent switching back and forth between two
weak sites. POOR designates unacceptable or unintelligible audio
quality. ACCEPTABLE designates intelligible, but undesirable, audio
quality. If the signal is above the acceptable threshold level, the radio
will site switch if an excellent site is found. Otherwise, the radio will
remain at the current site because allowing changes to sites with
similar signal levels can cause the radio to switch back and forth,
causing undesirable delays in speech.
Good Threshold
Sets the maximum signal level/audio quality that will site switch.
Radios receiving stronger signals will not site switch. GOOD
designates audio quality that is good enough that no site switching is
necessary. This level of audio quality is also used as a buffer to prevent
switching back and forth between two sites with similar signal level.
Excellent
Sets the desired Audio quality. The radio receiving an ACCEPTABLE
signal will only switch to a site with excellent audio quality.
EXCELLENT designates excellent audio quality or the desired audio
142
quality. All levels except GOOD will try to switch to a site of this
audio quality.
Audio Quality Level
Excellent
Excellent Threshold
RF
Level
Audio
Quality
Good
Good Threshold
Acceptable
Acceptable Threshold
Poor
switches to:
Note: If preferred sites are programmed in your radio, the radio
will always search for and switch to a preferred site with an
ACCEPTABLE or higher RSSI. Preferred sites override the site
switching characteristics described in the table above
For most systems with fairly good coverage overlap, the default values
are the optimal threshold constants. These values should differ under
the following conditions:
1. You are programming preferred sites that the radio should use
until the signal is very weak. In this case, the acceptable constant
should be lowered.
2. You desire radios to operate only on strong, clear signals. The
constants should be higher, keeping the same difference between
the thresholds.
3. If you desire a large signal quality difference, or are experiencing
too many site switches, raise the Excellent Threshold and reduce
the Acceptable Threshold.
Note: If you change the constants from those recommended,
you should conduct a field test to verify and adjust the site
switching performance of your test radios BEFORE
programming and installing your radios.
Filter Constants K1, K2, and K3
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value
directly. The threshold constants K1, K2, and K3 are designed to reduce
filter damage as time between sampling increases.
The RSSI filter has the following characteristic:
Filter Val. = (Filter Val. * K + Current Reading * (10 - K)) / 10
143
where the domain of K is {K: K = K1, K2, K3} and 0 (no filter) <= K3 <=
K2 <= K1 <= 9 (heavily damped filter).
Filter Threshold Constants T1,
T2, and T3
K1
Used when less than 8 seconds elapse between RSSI samples.
K2
Used when between 8 and 16 seconds elapse between RSSI
samples.
K3
Used when more than 16 seconds elapse between RSSI samples.
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value
directly. The threshold constants T1, T2, and T3 create a window that
RSSI samples must fall into in order to be considered valid. The
window is centered around the current RSSI Filter Value. The window
size is twice the value of the threshold constant.
The values (T1, T2, T3) are expressed as hexadecimal numbers ranging
from 0 (zero) to FF and should only be modified in accordance with
the following:
00 <= T1 <= T2 <= T3 <= FF
T1
Used when less than 8 seconds elapse between RSSI samples.
T2
Used when between 8 and 16 seconds elapse between RSSI
samples.
T3
Used when more than 16 seconds elapse between RSSI samples.
Note: Modification of filter threshold constants should be performed
only under the direction of a qualified radio engineer.
144
Voice-On-Control
(VOC) Options
DDBC
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice, F2 and then F3 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...TRUNKING:WIDE OPTIONS:VOC OPTIONS
VOC OPTIONS
----------VOC Capable.....................Disabled
RSSI Acceptable Threshold.............61
VOC Site Lock Time (sec)..............60
VOC Pended Emer Time (ms)............500
VOC Activation Time (ms).............500
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen defines the necessary data fields for operation on a Voiceon-Control capable site. When a site enters VOC Mode, its control
channel is surrendered for a voice call. All radios that are not VOC
capable will go out of range at that time.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
VOC Capable
(Voice-On-Control Capable)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. When a
radio is VOC-capable, it is able to handle the transition of a site going
into and out of VOC mode without entering an out-of-range state.
The default is Disabled.
RSSI Acceptable Threshold
Enter the desired value in hexadecimals or use the UP/DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through the available choices. This field defines the
minimum signal strength (RSSI value) for a radio to determine that it
is in range of a valid Voice On Control channel. If a site enters Voice
On Control, the radio will remain locked on to that site.
One of the possible conditions that would cause the radio to roam to
another site (or possibly enter an out-of-range state) is when the radio
determines there is about five seconds of low signal strength (that is,
RSSI below this threshold) on the last active control channel. Valid
entries range from 0 (zero) to $FF.
The default is $61.
145
VOC Site Lock Time (sec)
Enter the desired value directly or use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
scroll through the available choices. This field defines the maximum
time that a radio will remain locked onto a Voice-on-Control Site
before it will attempt to lock on to another site (and possibly enter an
out-of-range state). Valid entries range from 15 to 255 seconds in onesecond increments.
The default is 15 seconds.
VOC Pended Emer Time (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select a value for this timer or enter
a value directly. This is the maximum length of time that the radio will
delay before a certain subset of ISWs will be sent while the radio is in
VOC mode. Valid entries range from 500 to 6000 ms in 25-ms
increments.
Note: Most ISWs are not permitted to be sent in while the radio
is in VOC mode (the exceptions being Emergency and Phone
Reject requests).
The default is 500 ms.
VOC Activation Time (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select a value for this timer or enter
a value directly. This field determines the maximum length of time
that the radio will delay before sending in ISW requests upon receiving
a system status OSW indicating the site is exiting VOC Mode. The
valid range is 500 ms to 6000 ms in 25-ms increments.
The default is 20.
146
Trunking Systems
DDC
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice and then F3 to access these
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01UGN6PW6AN
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:SYSTEM
System.............1
TRUNKING SYSTEM
--------------System Key ..............Disabled
System Type.....................I
UNIVERSAL ID.................. 1
System ID....................0001
Size Code......................A
Fleet ID.....................001
Connect Tone (Hz)#.......0-105.88
Individual ID................000
Coverage Type............Disabled
Access Type.................Slow
Site ID........................0
Conversation Type........Message
Tx Defeat...............Disabled
Dynamic Regrouping........Disabled
Remote Monitor ...........Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
SYSTEM
F3
PREV
SYSTEM
F4
NEXT
SYSTEM
F5
DELETE
SYSTEM
This Call ID..............000016
F6
CONTROL
CHANNEL
F7
F8
F9
MORE
OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
TRUNKING SYSTEM screen, Type I (800 MHz)
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01WGM4PW6AN
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:SYSTEM
System.............1
TRUNKING SYSTEM
--------------System Key...............Disabled
OmniLink.................Enabled
System Type................II/IIi
System ID....................0001
Alias...................Disabled
Individual ID..............1-0001
Connect Tone (Hz)#.......0-105.88
Coverage Type...........SmartZone
Affiliation Type........Automatic
Dynamic Regrouping........Enabled
Zone....Blank
Chan....Blank
Remote Monitor........... Enabled
RM Base Time (sec)...........15
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
SYSTEM
F3
PREV
SYSTEM
F4
NEXT
SYSTEM
F5
DELETE
SYSTEM
F6
CONTROL
CHANNEL
F7
F8
F9
MORE
OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
TRUNKING SYSTEM screen, Type II/IIi (900 MHz)
This screen is used to program the Trunking System configuration for
your radio. The fields on this screen will vary for Type I and Type II/IIi
systems as shown in the screens above.Press Tab to select the desired field,
or press the desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
A Trunking System refers to a specific repeater site, the system ID, the
individual radio ID for that system, the control channel frequencies
and the connect tone required to operate on that system. Each system
that the radio is programmed to operate on is linked to one or more
Trunking personalities. The personality defines the features available
to the radio while operating on that system. Each radio is uniquely
identified on each system by its individual ID.
147
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD SYSTEM
Adds a Trunking system. You cannot add a system unless a system key or
a hardware key present.
F3 - PREV SYSTEM
Accesses the previous system.
F4 - NEXT SYSTEM
Accesses the next system.
F5 - DELETE SYSTEM
Deletes the current system. You will be prompted before the system is
actually deleted.
F6 - CHAN ASSIGN (for UHF/
VHF) or CONTROL CHAN (for
800/900 MHz)
Brings up a screen where you can change and view the control
channels for the system.
F9 - MORE OPTIONS
Brings up a screen where you can configure other options for Trunking
system operation.
Field Definitions
System
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available systems.
Alternatively, you can use the F3/F4 function keys to navigate through
the available systems.
System Key
An FTR or System Key is required to access this field. It holds the system
key status for the current Trunking system.
System Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Trunking system type. If
the Trunking system is Type I, the range of the ID changes for different
size codes and the ID is a three-digit hexadecimal number. If the
Trunking System is Type II or IIi, the individual ID is a four-digit
hexadecimal number.
Type I
The original MOTOROLA Trunked signalling protocol.
Type II
An enhanced version of the original protocol that provides
additional fleet management flexibility for a given system
via an expanded signalling format.
Type IIi
A hybrid of Type I and II that permits a radio to operate as a
Type II unit on a Type I system.
Each radio has a single individual ID per system, independent of the
number of talkgroups, user groups, or personalities it is affiliated to on
that system. The fields on this screen will vary for Type I and Type II/IIi
systems.
Note: If you have more than one fleet on a system, you may
want to use a Universal ID so that people calling the radio can
use a single ID.
System ID
148
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. This field contains
the four-digit hexadecimal number which identifies the Trunked
system.
Alias
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the System Alias
feature. If Alias is enabled, the upper eight bits of the System ID are
ignored.
The default is Disabled.
Individual ID
This field will be accessible only for Type I radios. Enter the three-digit ID
for this system. Examples are 001, 02A, 1FF and 200. An actual ID must
be entered, not a personality number.
The default is 1-0001.
Connect Tone (Hz) #
Coverage Type
This field is not applicable to SmartZone systems. Use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to make your selection or enter the desired value directly.
The Connect Tone is a sub-audible tone required on the voice channel
to access the Trunked repeater. The function is similar to the
Conventional Repeater Access Tone.
0 - 105.88 Hz
4 - 97.3 Hz.
1 - 76.60 Hz
5 - 116.13 Hz
2 - 83.72 Hz
6 - 128.57 Hz
3 - 90.00 Hz
7 - 138.46 Hz
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. The choices for this
field are:
WAC AMSS
Wide Area Coverage Automatic Multiple Site Select.
Local AMSS
Local Automatic Multiple Site Select.
SmartZone
Motorola system for wide area roaming.
Disabled
Disable wide area coverage.
Up to four control channels are used for standard trunking operation
and up to eight are used for WAC AMSS, regardless of the number
listed on the Control Channel Screen (F4/F4/F3/F6).
In an AMSS system, multiple sites are linked together to form a larger
Trunked system. Radios programmed for Wide Area AMSS can use the
site that they are within range of, and when they move between sites,
they can switch sites without interruption of communications that are
in progress. Up to eight control channels can be used for Wide Area Systems.
If WAC AMSS is selected and WAC AMSS Failsoft is selected on the
TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen (F4/F4/F4), the F6 key on the
TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen will be used to view and modify
failsoft channel information. Radios programmed for Local AMSS are
allowed to use only one site. This site is entered as the Site ID below the
Coverage Type field.
The default is Disabled.
Site ID
This field will be visible only if the Coverage Type field is set to Local AMSS.
Enter the Site ID directly or use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to make
your selection.
149
Affiliation Type (Type II/IIi Only)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Affiliation Type.
Automatic
The radio will immediately affiliate with the central controller as
soon as it is turned on and will automatically re-affiliate each
time the talkgroup is changed (that is, if the selected talkgroup
does not match last affiliated talkgroup).
On PTT
The radio will affiliate only when PTT is pressed.
SmartZone radios MUST use Automatic Affiliation. These radios always
affiliate on power-up and on site switches (in addition to affiliating on
Talkgroup changes).
The default is On PTT.
Dynamic Regrouping
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature for the
current system. A Dynamic Regrouping Talkgroup position (DYN)
must be assigned on the ZONE/CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen (F4/
F8). Enabling Dynamic Regrouping will automatically add DYN to the
list of talkgroups on that screen. Dynamic Regrouping allows the
dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios operating in separate
fleets and/or talkgroups into a single group. The default is Disabled.
Note: Only one DYN position may be assigned for each system.
Zone
This field will be visible only if Dynamic Regrouping is enabled. Use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to make your selection or enter a number directly.
This is the zone position used when a radio is dynamically regrouped.
This is used in conjunction with the channel position to determine
which zone/channel talkgroup will be used during Dynamic
Regrouping.
Chan
This field will be visible only if Dynamic Regrouping is enabled. Use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to make your selection or enter a number directly.
This is the channel position used when a radio is dynamically
regrouped. This is used in conjunction with the zone position to
determine which zone/channel talkgroup will be used during
Dynamic Regrouping.
Remote Monitor
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Radio Trace (remote
monitor) for this system.
The default is Disabled.
RM Base Time
This field will be visible only if Remote Monitor is enabled. Use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to select the base time in seconds or enter a value
directly. The radio will transmit during a Radio Trace for this system.
Valid options are 15, 30, 45 and 60 seconds.
The default is 15 seconds.
OmniLink
This field will be visible only if the Coverage Type is SmartZone. When an
OmniLink feature is enabled, the radio will be allowed to roam from
one SmartZone System within an OmniLink System to another
SmartZone System within the same OmniLink System.
The factory default is Disabled.
150
Universal ID (Type I Only)
Enter the desired ID directly. When Trunking Type I is selected, a
Universal ID is used. All individual calls (Phone, Private Call, and Call
Alert) will be received if they are addressed to the Universal ID, even
though the operator might have selected another personality in that
system. This simplifies individual communications with the radio. In
addition, the radio will initiate all Private and Phone Calls with the
Universal ID. Therefore, only one ID must be enabled for each radio at
the Central Site Controller. The radio will also respond to Dynamic
Regrouping commands to the Universal ID, making it easier for a
regrouping console to regroup a radio.
The default is 1.
Size Code
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. Use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to choose the Size Code for this fleet. The Size Code
determines the maximum number of fleets, subfleets and individual
IDs allowed. Valid size codes are: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, M, O and
Q.
Note: The size code and fleet ID chosen must match the
programming of the Central Controller.
Fleet ID
Size Code
Prefix
Fleet
Subfleet
Individual
ID
A
0-7
00 - 7F
A-C
000 - 00F
B
0-7
00 - 0F
A-G
000 - 03F
C
0-7
00 - 07
A-G
000 - 07F
D
0-7
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 1FF
E
0-7
00 - 3F
A-C
000 - 01F
F
0-7
00 - 1F
A-G
000 - 01F
G
0-7
00 - 1F
A-C
000 - 03F
H
0-7
00 - 0F
A-C
000 - 07F
I
0-7
00 - 07
A-C
000 - 0FF
J
0-7
00 - 03
A-G
000 - 0FF
K
0-7
00 - 01
A-O
000 - 0FF
M
0-3
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 3FF
O
0-1
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 7FF
Q
0-0
00 - 00
A-O
000 - FFF
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. The Fleet ID is a
three-digit hexadecimal number where the first digit is the prefix and
the second two digits refer to the fleet. For any size code, the subfleets
for Fleetwide and Dynamic Regrouping are always available.
The valid range for the Fleet I depends on the size code chosen. Examples of
Fleet IDs are 300, 402, 001, and 703.
151
Individual ID
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. Enter the Trunking
Individual ID in hexadecimals. The Individual ID is a number that
uniquely identifies an individual radio on a system (or personality for
Type I). Type I systems have a unique ID for each personality.
For Type II/IIi radios, valid IDs range between 1 and FFFF. The decimal
equivalent of the Individual ID is used for the radio's Private
Conversation Call ID (7+ID#), interconnect land-to-portable unit calls
(7+ID#) and interconnect land-to-portable talkgroup calls (7+ID#).
Type II systems have a single Individual ID per radio, independent of
the number of talkgroups, user groups or personalities that radio has
on that system.
Access Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Trunking Access type:
Slow
The original Trunking signalling protocol with
acknowledgments (high speed) for all channel grants.
(Rx = Slow, Tx = Slow)
Fast
An enhancement to the original protocol that eliminates the
channel grant acknowledgments, thus improving the channel
access time. (Rx = Fast, Tx = Fast)
Note: This information must be coordinated with your system
manager to ensure proper operation of the system.
Conversation Type
Tx Defeat
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Trunking Conversation
type. The options are:
Message
After the initiator de-keys the radio, the voice channel
stays active (hangtime) so that other members of the
talkgroup can respond on the same channel. If a radio in
the talkgroup transmits during another user's
transmission, he or she will interrupt the ongoing
transmission.
Transmission
No hangtime and no talk-over. When a radio is de-keyed,
the channel is immediately de-allocated and reassigned. If
the user tries to talk over an active channel, the radio will
not respond until the channel is clear.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. When
this feature is enabled, the radio will use the PFI instead of the
Universal ID to initiate individual calls.
The default is Disabled.
This Call ID
152
A system key or FTR key is needed to access this field. This is the Type I call
ID which is calculated from the Size Code, Fleet ID and Individual ID.
Channel
Assignment Data
(UHF/VHF models
only)
DDCF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice, F3 and then F6 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select System.
...TRUNKING:SYSTEM:CHAN ASSIGN
System............ 1
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT DATA
----------------------Rx Channel Ranges - MHz
------------------------------
# Status
- -----1 Enable
2 Blank
3 Blank
F1
HELP
Spacing
(kHz)
Start
----------6.25
136.00000
F2
F3
PREV
SYS
Tx Channel Ranges - MHz
----------------------------------
Spacing
End
Status
(kHz)
-------- ------136.00000 Enable
6.25
Blank
Blank
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
F6
CONTROL
CHANNEL
F7
Start
End
------136.00000 136.00000
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to enter the Channel Assignment Data used for
Other Band Trunking or OBT. Three different frequency splits may be
defined for each system. After the receive and transmit ranges are
defined, press F6 to enter Control Channel frequencies.
Note: This information must match the Central Controller exactly or
the system will not work.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV SYSTEM
Accesses the previous system.
F4 - NEXT SYSTEM
Accesses the next system.
F6 - CHAN ASSIGN (for UHF/
VHF) or CONTROL CHANNEL
MENU (for 800/900 MHz)
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. Brings up a screen
where you can enter the control channels for, or assign channels to,
the system.
153
Field Definitions
System
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available systems.
Alternately the F3/F4 function keys can be used to navigate through
the available systems.
Status
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable this frequency split. Three
different frequency splits may be defined for each system.
Spacing (kHz)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Channel Spacing for this
frequency range. This field allows the user to select from a range of
channel spacing values (expressed in kHz). The valid range of values is
5.00 to 50.00 kHz.
End Frequency minus Start Frequency must be evenly divisible by the
channel spacing so the range can be divided into an integer value to
assign the control channel number properly.
Start (Channel Range)
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. Enter the frequency
range Start point directly in MHz. Do NOT use the UP/DOWN arrow
keys.
Note: This information must match the Central Controller exactly or
the system will not work.
The start frequency and end frequency must both be within the
allowed frequency range of the radio. End Frequency minus Start
Frequency must be evenly divisible by the channel spacing so the
range can be divided into an integer value to assign the control
channel number properly. The number of channels per range is
calculated with the following formula:
# = (End Frequency - Start Frequency)/Channel Spacing + 1
Note: A maximum of 380 receive channels can be assigned.
End (Channel Range)
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. Enter the frequency
range End point directly in MHz. Do not use the UP/DOWN arrow keys.
The End frequency must be larger than the Start Frequency and they
must both be within the allowed frequency range of the radio.
Note: This information must match the Central Controller exactly or
the system will not work.
154
Control Channels
DDCF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice, F3 and then F6 twice to access
this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select System.
...SYSTEM:CHAN ASSIGN:CONTROL CHANNEL
System............ 1
Number
-----1
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
CHAN
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
CONTROL CHANNELS
---------------Frequency
--------136.00000
F5
DELETE
CHAN
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to specify the control channel frequencies for
the current system. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the
desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Note: It is beneficial to sort the control channel frequencies in
ascending order in a SmartZone system. The advantage to doing
this in a Failsoft situation (if Failsoft by Talkgroup is NOT used) is
that the radio goes to its control channel list and uses the first
channel as its Failsoft channel. If channels are sorted (or at least
sorted in an order designed to facilitate Failsoft operations),
potential problems such as having multiple radios on different
Failsoft channels can be avoided.
In the case of Failsoft by Talkgroup, if a radio goes to its
Talkgroup Failsoft frequency and that particular repeater is
down (perhaps the very condition which caused the Failsoft
situation to occur), it will then go to the control channel list as
before for Failsoft frequencies. Thus, it is beneficial to sort the
control channels under Failsoft by Talkgroup usage as well.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD CHAN
Adds a channel.
F3 - PREV SYSTEM
Accesses the previous system.
F4 - NEXT SYSTEM
Accesses the next system.
F5 - DELETE CHAN
Deletes the current system. You will be prompted before the system is
actually deleted.
155
Field Definitions
System
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys or the F3/F4 keys to scroll through the
available systems.
Tx Frequency
Enter the Control Channel Transmit frequency directly in MHz. Four
Control Channel Frequencies are standard (eight if Wide Area AMSS is
enabled and one for Local AMSS). Control channels must be entered in
ascending (increasing) order.
Rx Frequency
Enter the Control Channel Receive frequency directly in MHz. Four
Control Channel Frequencies are standard (eight if Wide Area AMSS is
enabled and one for Local AMSS). Control channels must be entered in
ascending (increasing) order.
156
Trunking System
Options
DDCI
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice, F3 and then F9 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: MO1UGN6PW6AN
Enter or Scroll to Select System.
..CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:SYSTEM:OPTIONS
System............ 1
TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS
-----------------------
Tx Power Select...............High
Trunk Repeater Offset.......45 MHz
Channel Assgn. Type.......Domestic
Splinter Channel..........Disabled
Channel Bandwidth.........25.0 kHz
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
ONE
TOUCH
Phone DTMF Timing................1
Initial Delay (msec).........1000
Digit Duration (msec).........125
Inter Digit Delay (msec).......75
Hot DTMF Timing..................1
Initial Delay (msec).........1000
Digit Duration (msec).........125
Inter Digit Delay (msec).......75
Status Aliasing............Enabled
Message Aliasing...........Enabled
Site Aliasing..............Enabled
F6
STATUS
ALIAS
F7
MSG
ALIAS
F8
SITE
ALIAS
F9
F10
EXIT
Trunking System Options for System 1, Type I (800 MHz)
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: MO1WGN4PW6AN
Enter or Scroll to Select System.
..CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:SYSTEM:OPTIONS
System............ 1
TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS
-----------------------
Tx Power Select...............High
Trunk Repeater Offset.......39 MHz
HearClear..................Enabled
Phone DTMF Timing................1
Initial Delay (msec).........1000
Digit Duration (msec).........125
Inter Digit Delay (msec).......75
Hot DTMF Timing..................1
Initial Delay (msec).........1000
Digit Duration (msec).........125
Inter Digit Delay (msec).......75
Channel Bandwidth.........25.0 kHz
Status Aliasing............Enabled
Message Aliasing...........Enabled
Site Aliasing..............Enabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
ONE
TOUCH
F6
F7
STATUS MSG
ALIAS ALIAS
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
Trunking System Options for System 1, Type II/IIi (900 MHz)
The TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS screen lets you access additional
features and options to further customize the radio configuration to a
customer’s communication needs.
!
Caution
Caution should be observed when changing
parameters on this screen. System parameter changes
can substantially degrade performance if they are not
made system wide.
157
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01RFL9PW4AN
Enter or Scroll to Select System.
..CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:SYSTEM:OPTIONS
System............ 1
TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS
-----------------------
Tx Power Select...............High
Phone DTMF Timing................1
Initial Delay (msec).........1000
Digit Duration (msec).........125
Inter Digit Delay (msec).......75
Hot DTMF Timing..................1
Initial Delay (msec).........1000
Digit Duration (msec).........125
Inter Digit Delay (msec).......75
Channel Bandwidth.........12.5
Status Aliasing............Enabled
Message Aliasing...........Enabled
Site Aliasing..............Enabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
ONE
TOUCH
F6
STATUS
ALIAS
F7
MSG
ALIAS
F8
SITE
ALIAS
F9
F10
EXIT
Trunking System Options for System 1, Type II/IIi (UHF/VHF)
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV SYS
Accesses the previous system.
F4 - NEXT SYS
Accesses the next system.
F5 - ONE TOUCH
This function will be visible only when a radio ordered with the One-Touch
feature has been read. Brings up a screen where you can assign functions
to one-touch features.
F6 - STATUS ALIAS
This function will be visible only when a radio containing the SMARTNET
or SmartZone software option has been read and the Status Aliasing field is
set to enabled. Brings up a screen where you can change and view the
parameters associated with Trunking system Status Alias.
F7 - MSG ALIAS
(Message Alias)
This function will be active only when a radio containing the SMARTNET
or SmartZone software option has been read and the Message Aliasing field
is set to enabled. Brings up a screen where you can assign a number and
name alias to a particular message.
F8 - SITE ALIAS
This function will be active only when the Site Aliasing field is set to enabled.
Brings up a screen where you can change and view the parameters
associated with Trunking System Site Alias.
Field Definitions
System
158
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Trunking system
You may also enter the system number directly or select it using the
F3/F4 function keys.
Note: Refer to the Radio Catalog Sheets for the maximum
number of systems allowed for this model.
Tx Power Select
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select either High or Low transmit
power operation for the radio on this system.
The transmit power may be reduced using this field.
The factory default for this feature is High.
Trunk Repeater Offset
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select a value or enter the desired
value directly. The value must be set to the frequency separation
between the Tx and Rx frequencies used at the central repeater site.
The default is 45 MHz for 800 band and 39 MHz for 900 band models.
HearClear (900 MHz only)
This option allows HearClear during voice operation. HearClear is a
feature used primarily in the 900 MHz band to reduce noise caused by
the smaller bandwidth used in the 900 band.
The default is Enabled for 900 MHz models and Disabled for other models.
Channel Assgn. Type
Splinter Channel
(800 MHz Only)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select Domestic or International.
Domestic
25 kHz channel spacing used in the USA
International
12.5 kHz channel spacing used outside the USA
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. The
control channels will be shifted down 12.5 kHz and the radio will
interpret the channel numbers received over the air as splinter
channels as well. Channels in the 821 band will not be affected.
The default is Disabled.
Rx Modulation (not shown)
This field applies only to SECURE radios. The value in this field should be
based on the expected receive data format for the personality. This
field allows the user to configure the radio's personality for:
❒ Strictly binary (two-level) receive operation;
❒ Strictly multi-level (four-level) receive operation; or
❒ Both binary and multi-level receive operation (Auto Receive).
When operating in Auto Receive mode, the radio will automatically
detect the received signal type and process the data accordingly. Twolevel sensitivity is reduced when operating in the Auto Receive mode and thus
should not be used on channels or systems that are strictly binary (two-level).
Channel Bandwidth
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Channel Bandwidth. This
value must be set to the Channel Bandwidth of the system the radio is
to operate on. Strapping fields for Announcement Group, Fleet ID,
Talkgroup, etc. will be forced to “Clear” if 12.5 kHz is selected.
The default is 25.0 kHz.
159
Phone DTMF Timing
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the set of DTMF timing
parameters for the current personality. Timing may be changed for
Initial Delay, Digit Duration and Interdigit Delay. The radio contains a
table with four sets of values of these parameters. The actual parameters
are entered on the RADIO WIDE PHONE CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F3/
F4).
The default is 1.
Initial Delay (ms)
This is a view-only field. The value here can be adjusted by modifying
the value in the Phone DTMF Timing or Hot DTMF Timing fields as the
case may be.
Digit Duration (ms)
This is a view-only field. The value here can be adjusted by modifying
the value in the Phone DTMF Timing or Hot DTMF Timing fields as the
case may be.
Interdigit Delay (ms)
This is a view-only field. The value here can be adjusted by modifying
the value in the Phone DTMF Timing or Hot DTMF Timing fields as the
case may be.
Hot DTMF Timing
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the set of DTMF timing
parameters for this personality. Timing may be changed for Initial
Delay, Digit Duration and Interdigit Delay. The radio contains a table
with four sets of values of these parameters. The actual parameters are
entered on the RADIO WIDE PHONE CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F3/
F4).
The default is 1.
Status Aliasing
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Status Aliasing. This
option allows you to customize the Status number and assign an alias
name to each message (F6). The Status Alias feature must be enabled on
the TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen (F4/F4/F4), and the status
mnemonic (STS) must be assigned on the RADIO WIDE MENU
CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F3/F3/F4).
Message Aliasing
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Message Aliasing for
this system. This option allows you to customize the Message number
and assign an alias name to each message (F7). The message feature must
be enabled on the TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen (F4/F4/F4), and the
message mnemonic (MSG) must be assigned on the RADIO WIDE MENU
CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F3/F3/F4).
Site Aliasing
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Site Aliasing. This
option will permit you to customize the site number to assign an alias
name to each site. AMSS or SmartZone must be added on the TRUNKING
SYSTEM screen (F4/F4/F3) and the SITE mnemonic must be assigned on the
RADIO WIDE MENU CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F3/F3/F4) for this
feature to operate properly.
Zone Switch Debounce Timer
(sec)
This field will be displayed only if the OmiLink field is Enabled on the
Trunking System screeen (F4/F4/F3). This field defines the duration
that the radio will be forced to remain at a SmartZone System within
an OmniLink System before being allowed to switch to any other
SmartZone system within the OmniLink System. Keeping subscribers
from bouncing between Zones guarantees that the fixed end databases
160
will keep up with the location of the roaming subscriber units. The
factory default is 5 seconds.
161
Trunking One-Touch
Button Options
DDCIE
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice, F3, F9 and then F5 to access
this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...TRUNKING:SYSTEM:OPTIONS:ONE TOUCH
ONE TOUCH BUTTON OPTIONS
-----------------------Button 1 Feature.......Disabled
Index..........1
Button 2 Feature.......Disabled
Index..........1
Button 3 Feature.......Disabled
Index..........1
Button 4 Feature.......Disabled
Index..........1
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed from the TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS screen
(F4/F4/F3/F9) only when a radio ordered with the One-Touch feature (or a
corresponding codeplug) has been read. The One-Touch Feature is
activated by pressing a control head or handset button programmed
for one-touch operation. These buttons are programmed on the
RADIO WIDE BUTTON CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F3/F3/F2).
When a button programmed for one-touch operation is pressed, the
Phone, Private Call, Call Alert, Status, or Message corresponding to the
One-Touch Index will be initiated. This facilitates quick access to
frequently used functions.
For example, if One-Touch Button 1 feature is selected as Phone, OneTouch Index 1 is set to 2, and a control head or handset button is
programmed as One Touch 1, then pressing the control head or
handset button will cause the radio to transmit the second telephone
number from the phone list.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
162
Field Definitions
Button (number)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the feature that corresponds to
this one-touch button. One-touch buttons 1 through 4 may be
programmed as Trunking buttons on either the control head or the
handset buttons on the RADIO WIDE BUTTON CONFIGURATION
screen (F4/F3/F3/F2).
A control head or mic/handset button programmed for one-touch
button allows Trunking features such as Status, Message, Private Call,
Call Alert and Phone to operate with the touch of a single button.
Call Alert,
Message, And
Status
Pressing the button will cause the radio to automatically enter the selected
feature and transmit the list member corresponding to the one-touch
button index.
Phone
Pressing the button will cause the radio to send a phone request and
transmit a pre-programmed phone list number. The index field indicates
which phone list number to transmit.
Private Call
Pressing the button will cause the radio to enter the Private Call feature at
the Call ID in the Call List corresponding to the one-touch button index.
❒ If the Private Call Type is PC I, PC II or PC I/II, PTT must be pressed to
initiate the Private Call.
❒ If the Private Call Type is Enhanced PC, pressing PTT is not required to
initiate the Private Call.
Pressing a one-touch button while the radio is already in the feature
corresponding to the one-touch button will cause the radio to abort the
feature.
Note: The availability of Phone, Private Call, Call Alert,
Message, and Status on any one-touch button is determined by
the radio wide model options purchased for your radio.
The default value for all one-touch buttons is Disabled.
Index
Enter the value for the index into the list pertaining to the feature
(Phone, Private Call, Call Alert, Status, or Message) assigned to the
one-touch button.
The list size depends on both the radio model and the feature assigned to the
one-touch button. Press F1 while in this field and press PgDn to view the
table showing the different list sizes for each radio model and feature.
163
Trunking Status
Alias
DDCIF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice, F3, F9 and then F6 to access
this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
...SYSTEM:OPTIONS:STATUS ALIAS
TRUNKING STATUS ALIAS
--------------------Num Status Alias Number
--- ------------------1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
ITEM
F3
F4
F5
DELETE
ITEM
Status Alias Text
----------------STATUS 1
STATUS 2
STATUS 3
STATUS 4
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed only if a radio containing the SMARTNET or
SmartZone software option (or a corresponding codeplug) has been read and
the Status Alias field on the TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS screen (F4/F4/
F3/F9) is set to Enabled. This screen pertains to the Trunking Status
Alias List.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD ITEM
Adds a Trunking Status Alias item.
F5 - DELETE ITEM
Deletes the current Trunking Status Alias item. You will be prompted
before the item is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
Status Alias Number
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection. This field indicates
the position number for the Status Alias Text field. The valid range of
values is 1 to 8 for Trunking.
Status Alias Text
Enter the ASCII text that must be displayed when the corresponding
status number is selected.
164
Trunking Message
Alias
DDCIG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice, F3, F9 and then F7 to access
this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
...SYSTEM:OPTIONS:MESSAGE ALIAS
TRUNKING MESSAGE ALIAS
---------------------Num Message Alias Number
--- -------------------1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
ITEM
F3
F4
F5
DELETE
ITEM
Message Alias Text
-----------------MESSAGE 1
MESSAGE 2
MESSAGE 3
MESSAGE 4
MESSAGE 5
MESSAGE 6
MESSAGE 7
MESSAGE 8
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed only if a radio containing the SMARTNET or
SmartZone software option (or a corresponding codeplug) has been read and
the Message Alias field on the TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS screen (F4/
F4/F3/F9) is set to Enabled. This screen pertains to the Trunking
Message Alias List.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD ITEM
Adds a Trunking Message Alias item.
F5 - DELETE ITEM
Deletes a Trunking Message Alias item. You will be prompted before
the item is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
Message Alias Number
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection. This field indicates
the position number for the Message Alias Text Field. The valid range
of values is 1 to 16.
Message Alias Text
Enter the ASCII text that must be displayed when the corresponding
message number is selected.
165
Trunking Site Alias
DDCIH
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice, F3, F9 and then F8 to access
this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
...SYSTEM:OPTIONS:SITE ALIAS
TRUNKING SITE ALIAS
------------------Num
--1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
ITEM
F3
Site Alias Number
----------------1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F4
F5
DELETE
ITEM
Site Alias Text
--------------SITE 1
SITE 2
SITE 3
SITE 4
SITE 5
SITE 6
SITE 7
SITE 8
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed only if the Site Alias field on the TRUNKING
SYSTEM OPTIONS screen (F4/F4/F3/F9) is set to Enabled. This screen
pertains to the Trunking Site Alias List.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD ITEM
Adds a Trunking Site Alias item.
F5 - DELETE ITEM
Deletes a Trunking Site Alias item. You will be prompted before the
item is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
Site Alias Number
This field indicates the position number for the Site Alias Text Field.
The valid range of values is 1 to 64.
Site Alias Text
Enter the ASCII text that must be displayed when the corresponding
site number is selected.
166
Trunking
Personality
DDD
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 three times to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01UGN6PW6AN
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:PERS
Personality........1
TRUNKING PERSONALITY
-------------------Protocol Type..................II
Private Call Type...........PC II
System/ID..................1-0001
Operation..............Resp Only
Type......................II/IIi
Size Code................. None
Call Alert Operation....Unlimited
Fleet ID.........................
Phone Interconnect....Answer Only
Hot Keypad (DTMF)........Disabled
Status...................Disabled
Individual ID..............1-0001
Message..................Disabled
Failsoft Type.............Talkgrp
Call ID List....................1
This Call ID (PCI)...............
This Call ID (PCII)..............
Scan List....................None
Time Out Timer.........360
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
PERS
F3
PREV
PERS
F4
NEXT
PERS
F5
DELETE
PERS
F6
F7
F8
F9
TALK
EMER
MORE
GROUPS OPTIONS OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
Trunking System for Type I (800 MHz)
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01WGM4PW6AN
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:PERS
Personality........1
TRUNKING PERSONALITY
-------------------Protocol Type..................II
Private Call Type.....Enhanced PC
System/ID..................1-0001
Operation..............Resp Only
Type......................II/IIi
Call Alert Operation....Unlimited
Announcement Group...........None
Phone Interconnect......Unlimited
Hot Keypad (DTMF)........Disabled
Status....................Enabled
Individual ID..............1-0001
Message...................Enabled
Failsoft Type.............Talkgrp
Call ID List....................1
A/G Failsoft.............Enabled
A/G Failsoft Frequency..935.0125
Scan List....................None
Time Out Timer.........360
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
PERS
F3
PREV
PERS
F4
NEXT
PERS
F5
DELETE
PERS
F6
F7
F8
F9
SUB
EMER
MORE
FLEETS OPTIONS OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
Trunking System for Type II/IIi (900 MHz)
These screens are used to view and edit the main information for a
Trunking personality, such as the system number and time-out timer
to be used and other options. It also provides access to the other
Trunking screens such as those which relate to talkgroups/subfleets.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
167
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model: M01RFL9PW5AN
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:PERS
Personality........1
TRUNKING PERSONALITY
-------------------Protocol Type..................II
Private Call Type.....Enhanced PC
System/ID..................1-0001
Operation..............Resp Only
Type......................II/IIi
Call Alert Operation....Unlimited
Announcement Group...........None
Phone Interconnect......Unlimited
Hot Keypad (DTMF)........Disabled
Status...................Disabled
Individual ID..............1-0001
Message..................Disabled
Failsoft Type............Disabled
Call ID List....................1
Scan List....................None
Time Out Timer.........3F1
HELP
F2
ADD
PERS
F3
PREV
PERS
F4
NEXT
PERS
60
F5
DELETE
PERS
F6
F7
F8
F9
TALK
EMER
MORE
GROUPS OPTIONS OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
Trunking System for Type II/IIi (UHF)
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD PERS
Adds a personality. This operation is NOT allowed without a system key or
a hardware key present. You will automatically be moved to the new
personality.
F3 - PREV PERS
Accesses the previous personality.
F4 - NEXT PERS
Accesses the next personality.
F5 - DELETE PERS
Deletes the current personality. You will be prompted before the
personality is actually deleted.
F6 - WAC AMSS (not shown)
This function will be visible only if the Failsoft Type field is set to WAC/
AMSS. The Failsoft frequency used depends on which AMSS site the
radio is using at the time. The frequencies are entered on the screen
accessed by pressing this key.
F7 - SUBFLEETS or TALKGROUPS
Brings up a screen where you can edit the position of the subfleets/
talkgroups and associated data such as SECURE strapping and scan
type.
F8 - EMER OPTIONS
(Emergency Options)
This function will be active only when a radio containing the SMARTNET
or SmartZone software option has been read. Brings up a screen where you
can edit and enable emergency information such as default talkgroup
and edit emergency options such as Console Acknowledge Required.
F9 - MORE OPTIONS
Brings up a screen where you can change or view more Trunking
personality parameters including Conversation Type and Access Type.
168
Field Definitions
Personality
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys or use the F3/F4 keys to scroll through
the available personalities and make your selection. Personalities can
be added by pressing F2 or deleted by pressing F5. You will be
prompted before the personality is actually deleted.
Protocol Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to select the Protocol Type. This refers to
the type of Trunking system. The available options are:
Type I
The original MOTOROLA Trunked signalling protocol.
Type II
An enhanced version of the original protocol that
provides additional fleet management flexibility for a
given system via an expanded signalling format.
Type IIi
A hybrid of Type I and II that permits a radio to
operate as a Type II unit on a Type I system.
System/ID
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Trunking system the
current personality is to use. (The system ID is shown according to
system number). The Trunking system should be set up on the TRUNKING
SYSTEM screen (F4/F4/F3) before personality information is entered since
some of these fields depend on Trunking system information.
Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection. The selection in
this field indicates the Trunked signalling protocol used on this
system.
If the Trunking System is Type I, the range of the ID changes for different
size codes. The ID is a three-digit hexadecimal number. If you have
more than one fleet on a system, you may want to use a Universal ID
so that people calling the radio can use a single ID. Press F8 to go to
the UNIVERSAL ID screen where you can enter the information
required to use a universal ID.
If the Trunking System is Type II or IIi, the individual ID is a four-digit
hexadecimal number. For Type II Trunking, your radio will have a
single Individual ID for each system, independent of the number of
talkgroups, user groups or personalities it is affiliated with on that
system.
Size Code
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. Use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to choose the Size Code for this fleet. The Size Code
determines the maximum number of fleets, subfleets and individual
IDs allowed. Valid size codes are: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, M, O and
Q.
Note: The size code and fleet ID chosen must match the
programming of the Central Controller.
169
Fleet ID
Size Code
Prefix
Fleet
Subfleet
Individual
ID
A
0-7
00 - 7F
A-C
000 - 00F
B
0-7
00 - 0F
A-G
000 - 03F
C
0-7
00 - 07
A-G
000 - 07F
D
0-7
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 1FF
E
0-7
00 - 3F
A-C
000 - 01F
F
0-7
00 - 1F
A-G
000 - 01F
G
0-7
00 - 1F
A-C
000 - 03F
H
0-7
00 - 0F
A-C
000 - 07F
I
0-7
00 - 07
A-C
000 - 0FF
J
0-7
00 - 03
A-G
000 - 0FF
K
0-7
00 - 01
A-O
000 - 0FF
M
0-3
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 3FF
O
0-1
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 7FF
Q
0-0
00 - 00
A-O
000 - FFF
A system key or FTR key is required to access this field. The Fleet ID is a
three-digit hexadecimal number where the first digit is the prefix and
the second two digits refer to the fleet. For any size code, the subfleets
for Fleetwide and Dynamic Regrouping are always available.
The valid range for the Fleet I depends on the size code chosen. Examples of
Fleet IDs are 300, 402, 001, and 703.
Announcement Group
Enter a three-digit hexadecimal number for the Announcement
Talkgroup directly. This field contains the user talkgroup for
announcements for the current personality.
Strapping (not shown)
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection: Clear, SECURE, or
Select. This field is used to configure the transmit mode of
Announcement Group or Fleet ID.
170
Clear or SECURE
The Announcement Group or Fleet ID is forced to that
particular transmit mode.
Select
The user is allowed to select the SECURE transmit
modes using the radio's two-position concentric
switch.
Individual ID
Contains the Individual ID number that uniquely identifies your radio
on a particular system. Valid IDs range between 1 and FFFF. The
decimal equivalent of the Individual ID is used for your radio’s Private
Conversation Call ID (7 + ID#), interconnect land-to-portable unit
calls (7 + ID #) and interconnect land-to-portable talkgroup calls (7 +
ID #).
For Type II Trunking, your radio will have a single Individual ID for each
system independent of the number of talkgroups, user groups or personalities
it is affiliated with on that system.
Failsoft Type
When the Central Site Controller fails in a Trunked system, the system
goes into Failsoft operation. Depending on the type of system, there
will be different choices for Failsoft operation:
Disabled
No failsoft used.
Personality/Fleet
Uses the Announcement Group Failsoft frequency for
all talkgroups within the personality.
Talkgroup/
Subfleet
The frequency is determined by the talkgroup selected
and is entered in the TRUNKING TALKGROUP/
SUBFLEET screen (F4/F4/F4/F7).
Failsoft by Talkgroup is NOT available with WAC AMSS
type.
WAC AMSS
The Failsoft frequency depends on which AMSS site
the radio is using at the time. The frequencies are
entered using the F6 function key.
A/G Failsoft
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Failsoft for this
talkgroup. When the Central Site Controller fails in a Trunked system,
the system goes into Failsoft operation. If the radio is set to Failsoft by
Talkgroup, the radio will use these frequencies to transmit and receive
on.
A/G Failsoft Frequency
This field will be visible only if the A/G Failsoft field is set to Enabled. Enter
the Failsoft Frequency directly in MHz. A transmit and receive frequency
each are required if the system is UHF or VHF.
Talk Permit Tone (not shown)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this option. Set this
field to Enabled if you want the Talk Permit tone to sound every time
the PTT key is pressed. The talk permit tone is a series of three quick
tones that sound once the PTT button has been pressed and your radio
has keyed up on the voice channel assigned by the Trunked central
controller. You may begin talking immediately.
The default is Disabled.
Time-Out Timer
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Time-Out Timer
(TOT) value for this personality. The TOT determines the amount of
time the radio can continuously transmit before it must be de-keyed.
When the time is about up the radio beeps and then stops
transmitting. Each personality may choose one of four different TOT
values. The four values for the radio can be changed on the RADIO
WIDE OPTIONS MENU (F4/F3/F2/F9).
The default is 60 seconds.
171
Private Call Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Private Call type
from among the following:
PC I
Limited to selected fleet and pool. (800 MHz, Type I
personalities only).
PC II
Permits calls between fleets and sends an initiator ID so that
the person receiving the call will know who sent it (800
MHz, Type I, II and IIi personalities).
PC I/II
Permits both PC I and PC II calls (Type I personalities only).
Enhanced PC
Telephone-like operation (Type II and IIi personalities only).
Disabled
Deactivates the Private Call feature for this personality.
Note: Radio controls may require additional setup for your Private
Call configuration. Refer to the RADIO WIDE BUTTON/SWITCH
CONFIGURATION MENU (F4/F3/F3) help screen for details.
Operation
This field will be visible only if the Private Call Type field is set to a value
other than Disabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the
operation of the Private Call feature for this personality from among
the following:
Response Only
Allows the radio to only accept calls.
List Only
Allows the user to make calls from the page list.
Unlimited
Requires full keypad. Allows the user to make calls from the
call list and from the keypad, and to modify the call ID list.
Disabled
No Private Call operation is allowed. Select Disabled to
disable paging facilities.
The default is Disabled.
Call Alert Operation
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select Call Alert (Page) operation for
the current personality. Call Alert allows the operator to receive and
transmit pages either by typing in a six-digit decimal ID (Unlimited)
or by selecting one of the IDs in the Trunking Call ID list (List Select).
Response Only
Allows the radio to accept pages only.
List Only
Allows the user to send pages from the page list.
Unlimited
Allows the user to send pages from the page list and from
the keypad. This also allows the radio user to modify the
page ID list. (Requires full keypad.)
Disabled
No Call Alert operation is allowed. Disables paging facilities.
Note: Radio controls may require additional setup for your Call Alert
configuration. Refer to the RADIO WIDE BUTTON/SWITCH
CONFIGURATION MENU (F4/F3/F3) help screen for details.
The default is Disabled.
172
Phone Interconnect
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the type of Phone
Interconnect for this personality. This option allows the radio to
initiate and receive land-to-portable telephone calls and specifies the
type of Interconnect. The choices are:
Answer Only
Allows the radio to accept calls only.
List Only
Allows the radio to make calls only from the phone list.
Unlimited
Allows the radio to make calls both from the phone list and
the keypad. The stored phone number list may also be
modified from the keypad.
Disabled
No phone operation is allowed.
Note: Radio controls may require additional setup for your Phone
Interconnect configuration. Refer to the RADIO WIDE BUTTON/
SWITCH CONFIGURATION MENU (F4/F3/F3) help screen for
details.
The default is Disabled.
Hot Keypad (DTMF)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Hot Keypad (DTMF
while transmitting) operation for the current personality. When this
feature is enabled, the keypad is live during all dispatch operation.
Pressing any digit between 0 (zero) and 9, “*”, or “#” will cause that
digit to be transmitted.
The default is Disabled.
Status
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the transmission of
pre-determined Status messages. This feature lets the user send a status
message to the dispatcher to inform the dispatcher of the current state
of the radio and its owner (“ENROUTE” or “LUNCH” for instance.)
Note: Radio controls may require additional setup for your Status
configuration. Refer to the RADIO WIDE BUTTON/SWITCH
CONFIGURATION MENU (F4/F3/F3). In addition, Status
number and name aliasing can be configured on the TRUNKING
SYSTEM OPTIONS screen (F4/F4/F3/F9).
The default is Disabled.
Message
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the transmission of
pre-determined canned messages. This feature lets the radio user send
messages to the dispatcher. Message transmissions indicate a
temporary condition and/or a response to a query from the dispatcher
(“PLS CALL” or “10-4” for instance).
Note: Radio controls may require additional setup for your Message
configuration. Refer to the RADIO WIDE BUTTON/SWITCH
CONFIGURATION MENU (F4/F3/F3). In addition, Status
number and name aliasing can be configured on the TRUNKING
SYSTEM OPTIONS screen (F4/F4/F3/F9).
The default is Disabled.
173
Call ID List
This field will not be visible if the Operation field is set to Resp Only. Use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Call List ID for the current
personality. This is the number of the Call ID list that this personality
will use for Private Call. The Private Call and Call Alert features must have
a call list assigned for Unlimited and List operation. The Call ID List cannot
be set to None when Call Operation is List or Unlimited.
Note: Radio controls may require additional setup for your Private
Call configuration on the RADIO WIDE BUTTON/SWITCH MENU
(F4/F3/F3). Refer also to the TRUNKING WIDE CALL LIST (F4/
F4/F6) help screen.
The default is one list for each Trunking system.
This Call ID (PC I)
This is the six-digit Private Call I ID of this radio.
This Call ID (PC II)
This is the six-digit Private Call II ID of this radio.
Scan List
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Scan List to be used for this
personality. To change or view the scan list, select the SCAN MENU
(F4/F3/F5). Trunking personalities may use Subfleet, Priority Monitor
and Talkgroup type scan lists.
Note: Radio controls may require additional setup for your Scan
configuration on the RADIO WIDE BUTTON/SWITCH MENU (F4/
F3/F3). Refer to the RADIO WIDE MENU screen (F4/F3/F5).
The default is None.
174
WAC AMSS Failsoft
DDDF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 thrice and then F6 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
..CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:PERS:WAC FLSFT
Personality........1
WAC AMSS FAILSOFT
----------------Number
-----1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F1
HELP
Status
-------Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
F2
F3
Frequency
--------851.01250
F4
F5
Number Control Channel
----------------------1
851.0125
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed only if a System Key is present and the Failsoft
Type field on the TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen (F4/F4/F4) is set to
WAC AMSS. It is used to enter Failsoft frequencies used by Wide Area
AMSS systems. A transmit and a receive frequency are required for the
Other Band Trunking (OBT) protocol. If the Status field on this screen is
enabled and the repeater system fails, the radio will go into Failsoft
mode. This means the radio will act like a Conventional talkaround
radio, transmitting and receiving on the same frequency.
❒ In non-wide area AMSS systems, the radio can select the
talkaround frequency by talkgroup because the groups are
assumed to be within range of each other.
❒ In wide-area AMSS, Failsoft frequencies must be chosen according
to the location of the radio, which is determined according to the
repeater that the radio is using. A frequency is assigned to each
repeater for Failsoft operation.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
Personality
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available
personalities.
Status
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Failsoft for the
current personality. If this field is enabled and the repeater system fails,
the radio will go into Failsoft mode. This means the radio will act like
a conventional talkaround radio, transmitting and receiving on the
same frequency.
The default is Disabled.
175
Frequency
Enter the WAC AMSS frequency for Failsoft operation directly in MHz.
If the radio is set to Failsoft by Talkgroup, it will use these frequencies
to transmit and receive on. Failsoft by Talkgroup is NOT compatible with
WAC AMSS.
Control Channel
Enter the Control Channel frequency directly in MHz. Up to eight
frequencies may be specified with WAC AMSS enabled.
176
Trunking Subfleets
DDDG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 thrice and then F7 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
...CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:PERS:TLK GRP
Personality........1
TRUNKING TALKGROUPS
------------------# Tlk Grp
- ------1
001
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
TLK GP
F3
Rx Freq
-------
F4
Tx Freq
-------
F5
DELETE
TLK GP
F6
Strapping
---------
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to create a list of talkgroups/subfleets. If the radio is
a SECURE-equipped radio, strapping fields will be visible and SECURE
strapping can be set up for each personality. The personality usually has
16 positions (the number of positions on the rotary switch), indicated
by the numbers 1 through 16. The Announcement Talkgroup is
usually in the sixteenth position. Once the Talkgroups/Subfleets are
entered, they are assigned to the Zone/System or Channel/Subfleet
selector at the ZONE/CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen (F4/F8).
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD TLK GP/SUB FLT
Adds a talkgroup/subfleet. This operation is not allowed unless a system
key or hardware key is present.
F5 - DELETE TLK GP/SUB FLT
Deletes a talkgroup/subfleet. You will be prompted before the
talkgroup/subfleet is actually deleted.
177
Field Definitions
Personality
Displays the number of the current personality.
Talkgroup/Subfleet
This screen is used to enter subfleets that will use each personality.
Once the talkgroups/subfleets are entered, they are assigned to a Zone/
System and a Channel/Subfleet selector position on the ZONE/
SUMMARY screen (F4/F8).
Rx Frequency
Enter the Receive frequency directly in MHz. Four Control Channel
Frequencies are standard (eight if Wide Area AMSS is enabled and one for
Local AMSS).
Tx Frequency
Enter the Transmit frequency directly in MHz. Four Control Channel
Frequencies are standard (eight if Wide Area AMSS is enabled and one for
Local AMSS).
Failsoft (not shown)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Failsoft for this
talkgroup. When the Central Site Controller fails in a Trunked system,
the system goes into Failsoft operation. If the radio is set to Failsoft by
Talkgroup, the radio will use these frequencies to transmit and receive
on.
F/S Frequency (not shown)
Enter the Failsoft Frequency directly in MHz. A transmit and receive
frequency each are required if the system is UHF or VHF.
Strapping
This field will be visible only if the radio (or associated codeplug) is SECUREequipped. This field configures the transmit mode of the talkgroup or
subfleet. If set to Clear or SECURE, the talkgroup or subfleet is forced
to that particular transmit mode. When set to Select, the user is
allowed to choose between SECURE and Clear transmit modes using a
button programmed to SECURE on the radio.
178
Trunking
Emergency Data
Configuration
DDDH
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 thrice and then F8 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN arrows to Select Type.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:PERS:EMER
EMERGENCY DATA CONFIGURATION
---------------------------Protocol Type.................IIi
Access Type..................Fast
Emergency Call...........Disabled
Emergency Alarm...........Enabled
Console Ack Required....Disabled
Retry Counter...........
1
Tactical.................Enabled
Revert PTT ID...........Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
Revert Size Code...............A
Revert Fleet ID.............0001
Revert Subfleet..............001
Strapping.................Select
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to configure the Emergency feature for the current
personality. Each Type II/IIi personality may have a unique
configuration if necessary. The Emergency button must be enabled in the
RADIO WIDE BUTTON/SWITCH MENU (F4/F3/F3). In addition, Silent
Emergency must be configured on the RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION
screen (F4/F3/F2/F7).
Note: The radio controls may require additional setup for your Status
Configuration. Values in the status number and name aliasing
fields can be modified on the TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS
screen (F4/F4/F3/F9).
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
Protocol Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Trunking Protocol Type for
the current personality.
Type I
The original Motorola Trunked signalling protocol.
Type II
An enhanced version of the original Trunked Signalling protocol
that provides additional fleet management flexibility for a given
system via an expanded signalling format.
Type IIi
A hybrid of Type I and II that permits a radio to operate a Type II
unit on a Type I system.
179
Access Type
This field will be visible only if the Protocol Type field is set to IIi. Use the
UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Trunking Access Type. This
determines how the radio will access a Type II/IIi system.
❒ Select Tx Fast/Rx Fast for use with fast access systems and Tx Fast/
Rx Slow for slow access protocol emergency subfleets.
❒ New Type I radios operating on fast access systems should be set
for fast access.
❒ Type IIi radios which have to communicate on systems with slow
radios should be set to slow access.
Note: This information must be coordinated with your system
manager to ensure proper operation.
Emergency Call
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this option.
Emergency Call gives the operator priority to access the channel
during an emergency situation.
The Emergency Call condition is entered by pressing a button
configured to initiate emergency. All subsequent PTT transmissions
while in the Call state will be made with high priority access to a voice
channel. Emergency Alarm and Emergency Call may both be enabled,
in which case the Call state is entered when PTT is pressed.
This feature is one of the necessary components for Hot Mic Emergency to
function properly. For Hot Mic Emergency to function properly, all the
following conditions must be met:
1.
The radio must be Hot Mic Emergency capable.
2.
Emergency Call must be enabled.
3.
Emergency Alarm must be enabled.
4.
Revert PTT-ID must be enabled.
5.
Console Ack Req. must be disabled.
The default is Disabled.
Emergency Alarm
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this option.
Emergency Alarm allows the operator to press the Emergency button
to send an alarm to the dispatcher. Emergency Alarm is a coded
transmission made on the control channel in response to pressing a
button configured to initiate an emergency. These alarm transmissions
will be sent until:
❒ the control channel acknowledges the alarm;
❒ the console dispatcher acknowledges the alarm (if console ack is
enabled); or
❒ the alarm retry counter is exhausted.
If normal alarm operation is selected, the display will flash emergency
and valid key chirp will be heard when the alarm condition is entered.
Four full beeps will be heard when the alarm condition is
acknowledged.
180
If silent alarm is selected, there will be no display or audible indication
when the alarm condition is entered. Nor will there be any indication
of alarm acknowledgment. In addition, the radio will mute the
receiver audio so that no radio traffic is heard. This feature is one of the
necessary components for Hot Mic Emergency to function properly.
!
WARNING
Programming of Silent Emergency provides the user NO indication, visible or audible, that the emergency has been
sent. If you program silent emergency in conjunction with
the Long Press Emergency feature users should be trained to
LONG PRESS the emergency press button for an extended duration to ensure that the emergency will be sent.
The default is Disabled.
Console Acknowledgment
Required
This field will be visible only if the Emergency Alarm field is set to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this option. If a
Console Acknowledge is required, an Emergency Alarm is not
considered successful unless a Dispatcher Acknowledge is received.
When an Emergency Alarm is not successful, the full four-beep
Acknowledge Tone is not sounded and the alarm is automatically sent
again until the number of retries specified is exhausted. This feature
must be disabled for Hot Mic Emergency to function properly.
The default is Disabled.
Retry Counter
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the number of Emergency
transmissions to retry should the initial transmission fail. If an
unlimited number of retries is desired, select 0 (that is, Infinite).
Otherwise, enter a value between 1 and 255.
Normally if the radio is unsuccessful in sending a transmission, it will
retry for one ISW sequence before quitting. For Emergency Alarms,
however, the radio will retry for the number of ISW sequences
specified by the Retry Counter.
The default is 1.
Tactical
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable (Tactical) or disable (NonTactical) this emergency option. Emergency Alarms and Calls are made
on the selected talkgroup unless:
❒ Announcement is selected; or
❒ Dynamic Regrouping talkgroup is selected and there is no valid
dynamic ID.
In both cases the default Talkgroup is used. If this field is set to
Disabled, the radio uses the default Talkgroup and default
Announcement group for emergency transmissions.
The default is Disabled.
Revert PTT-ID
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable the default Emergency PTTID option. If this feature is enabled, the default Talkgroup/Subfleet or
Announcement Group/Fleet-wide transmissions will be in PTT-ID
181
style. This feature is one of the necessary components for Hot Mic Emergency
to function properly.
The default is Disabled.
182
Emergency Hot Mic (not shown)
This field will be visible only if all of the five conditions listed below are met.
If this feature is enabled, Emergency Hot Mic operation (also known as
Trunking Emergency with voice to follow) will be activated. When an
Emergency Alarm is generated and emergency alarm acknowledge is
received, the radio will automatically drop into emergency call mode
and begin transmitting with the microphone muted for the time
specified by the Tx Period.
For Hot Mic Emergency to function properly, all the following
conditions must be met:
1.
The radio must be Hot Mic Emergency capable.
2.
Emergency Call must be enabled.
3.
Emergency Alarm must be enabled.
4.
Revert PTT-ID must be enabled.
5.
Console Ack Req. must be disabled.
Note: This feature is mutually exclusive of normal emergency
operation. That is, if this feature is enabled, emergency operation
will always operate in this manner.
The default is Disabled.
Tx Period (sec)
(not shown)
This field will be visible only if the Emergency Hot Mic field is set to Enabled.
The Tx Period determines the time period for which the radio will
transmit with the mic unmuted, without user intervention. The valid
range is 10 to 120 seconds in 10-second increments.
The default is 10 seconds.
Revert Size Code
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose the Size Code for this
personality. Valid Size Codes are: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, M, O and
Q. The Size Code determines the maximum number of fleets, subfleets
and individual IDs allowed.
Note: The Size Code and Fleet ID chosen must match the
programming of the Central Controller.
183
Revert Fleet ID/Subfleet
The Fleet ID is a three-digit hexadecimal number where the first digit
is the Prefix and second two digits are the Fleet. For any size code, the
subfleets for Fleetwide and Dynamic Regrouping are always available.
Size Code
Prefix
Fleet
Subfleet
Individual
ID
A
0-7
00 - 7F
A-C
000 - 00F
B
0-7
00 - 0F
A-G
000 - 03F
C
0-7
00 - 07
A-G
000 - 07F
D
0-7
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 1FF
E
0-7
00 - 3F
A-C
000 - 01F
F
0-7
00 - 1F
A-G
000 - 01F
G
0-7
00 - 1F
A-C
000 - 03F
H
0-7
00 - 0F
A-C
000 - 07F
I
0-7
00 - 07
A-C
000 - 0FF
J
0-7
00 - 03
A-G
000 - 0FF
K
0-7
00 - 01
A-O
000 - 0FF
M
0-2-4-6
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 3FF
O
0-4
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 7FF
Q
0-0
00 - 00
A-O
000 - FFF
Revert Announcement Group
(or Revert Fleet ID)
Enter the Emergency Default Announcement Talkgroup in this field.
This field contains the Emergency User Talkgroup for Announcements
during an emergency for the current personality. The Emergency
Default Announcement Talkgroup is a three-digit hexadecimal
number. While in the emergency call state with tactical emergency
disabled, your radio will monitor this talkgroup for fleetwide
announcement calls.
Revert Announcement Group
(or Revert Fleet ID) Strapping
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to make your selection. This field
configures the transmit mode of Emergency Announcement Group or
Emergency Fleet ID. If set to Clear or SECURE, the Emergency
Announcement Group or Fleet ID is forced to that particular transmit
mode. When set to Select, the user is allowed to select the SECURE or
Clear transmit modes via a radio button programmed to SECURE.
Revert Talkgroup
(or Revert Subfleet)
Enter a three-digit hexadecimal number for Emergency Default
Talkgroup. This field contains the Emergency User Talkgroup for use
during an emergency for the current personality.
❒ If the tactical emergency feature is disabled, all emergency
transmissions will be made on this default talkgroup.
❒ If tactical is enabled, all emergency transmissions are made on the
currently selected talkgroup. The only exception would be when the
radio has been dynamically regrouped and the dynamic regrouping mode
is selected, in which case the emergency transmission would be made on
the dynamic regrouping talkgroup.
184
Revert Talkgroup
(or Revert Subfleet) Strapping
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to make your selection. This field
configures the transmit mode of Emergency Talkgroup or Emergency
Subfleet. If set to Clear or SECURE, the Emergency Talkgroup or the
Emergency Subfleet is forced to that particular transmit mode. When
set to Select, the user is allowed to select the SECURE or Clear transmit
modes using a radio button programmed to SECURE.
185
Trunking
Personality Options
DDDI
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 thrice and then F9 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:PERS:OPT
Personality........1
TRUNKING PERSONALITY OPTIONS
----------------------------
Conversation Type................Message
Talk Permit Tone.................Enabled
VRM100.......................... Enabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
PERS
F4
NEXT
PERS
F5
F6
PREF
SITES
F7
VRM
OPTIONS
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to view and edit additional information for the
current Trunking personality. Press Tab to select the desired field, or
press the desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV PERS
Accesses the previous personality.
F4 - NEXT PERS
Accesses the next personality.
F6 - PREF SITES (not shown)
A system key or FTR key must be present and the Coverage Type field must
be set to SmartZone on the TRUNKING SYSTEM screen (F4/F4/F3) for this
function to be visible. This function accesses the SmartZone Preferred
Sites linked to the current personality.
F7 - VRM OPTIONS
This function will be visible only if:
❒ The VRM500 Capable field on the RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen
(F4/F3/F2) is set to Enabled; or
❒ The VRM100 field on the current screen (TRUNKING
PERSONALITY OPTIONS, F4/F4/F4/F9) is set to Enabled.
Brings up a screen where you can view and edit VRM100 or VRM500
options depending on whether the VRM100 Capable or VRM500
Capable field is set to Enabled on the RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen.
186
Field Definitions
Personality
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available
personalities. Alternately the F3/F4 function keys can be used to
navigate through the available personalities.
Conversation Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Trunking Conversation
type. The available choices are:
Auto Scan (not shown)
Message
Trunked
After the initiator de-keys the radio, the voice channel stays
active (hangtime) so that other members of the talkgroup
can respond on the same channel. If a radio in the
talkgroup transmits during another user's transmission, he
or she will interrupt the original transmission.
Transmission
Trunked
No hangtime and no talk-over. When a radio is de-keyed,
the channel is immediately de-allocated and reassigned. If a
user tries to talk over an active channel, the radio will not
key until the channel is clear.
PTT- ID
PTT-ID systems are similar to message conversation type
systems with hangtime and talk-over, but they send an ID
code to the controller when PTT is pressed. After
transmission of the ID, the radio goes back to the voice
channel to talk to the other users.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the Auto Scan option
for this personality. When this feature is enabled, the radio will
automatically scan when on this personality. To use a scan on/off
switch or button, this option must be disabled.
The default is Disabled.
Proper Code Detect (not shown)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. When
this feature is enabled, the speaker will unmute on SECURE data only
if it is encrypted with the correct key.
Talk Permit Tone
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Talk Permit Tones.
When this feature is enabled, a Talk Permit Tone beep will be made
every time a transmission is made. The tone indicates that the user
may begin the talking.
The default is Enabled.
VRM100
This field cannot be set to Enabled if the VRM500 Capable field on the
RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen has been set to Enabled. Use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the VRM100 option for the
current Trunking personality.
The default is Disabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to Enable or Disable System Wide
Transmit.
System Wide Transmit
When the System Wide Transmit field is set to Enabled, the user will
be allowed to enter 'SYS' (System Wide Talkgroup) into the talkgroup
list of the corresponding personality.
187
When the System Wide Transmit field is set to Disabled, the user will
not be allowed to enter 'SYS' (System Wide Talkgroup) into the
talkgroup list of the corresponding personality. The System Wide
Transmit field cannot be set to Disabled if there is a talkgroup entry
which has 'SYS'.
When the Coverage field is set to SmartZone (F4F4F3), PREF SITES
allows access to the SmartZone Preferred Sites linked to this
personality.
188
SmartZone
Preferred Sites
DDDIF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 thrice, F9 and then F6 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
..TRUNKING:PERS:OPT:PREFERRED SITES
SMART ZONE PREFERRED SITES
-------------------------Ignore Site Resource Preference.....Disabled
#
Site ID
Prefer Status
------------------1
1
None
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
ITEM
F3
F4
F5
DELETE
ITEM
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
A system key or FTR key must be present and the Coverage Type field must
be set to SmartZone on the TRUNKING SYSTEM screen (F4/F4/F3) if this
screen is to be accessed. This screen is used to program the Preferred Site
Status List. You may assign preference to up to 8 sites for each personality associated with a SmartZone system.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD ITEM
Adds a Preferred Site.
F4 - DELETE ITEM
Deletes a Preferred Site. You will be prompted for confirmation before
the Site is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
Ignored Site Resource Preference
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If this
feature is enabled, the radio ignores site resource information.
The factory default is Disabled.
Site ID
The value specifies the ID of the site which has preferred status. The ID
may range from 1 to 64.
Prefer Status
This field denotes the value of the preferred site status for the site.
None
The site will be avoided unless it is the only usable site for operation.
Least
The site is given no preference. If the site is not listed here, the radio
automatically assigns it no preference.
Preferred
The site will be used over all non-preferred sites with similar signal strength.
Always
The site will be used over all non-preferred sites with similar signal strength
even if site loses communication with the zone controller (enters site
trunking).
The default is Non-Preferred.
189
OmniLink
Preferred Sites
DDDIF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 thrice, F9 and then F6 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
..TRUNKING:PERS:OPT:PREFERRED SITES
OMNILINK PREFERRED SITES
-----------------------Ignore Site Resource Preference.....Disabled
#
Site ID
Prefer Status
System ID
--------------------------1
1
None
0001
2
2
Preferred
0001
3
3
Least
0001
4
1
Always
0001
5
2
None
0001
6
3
None
0001
7
1
None
0001
8
2
None
0001
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
ITEM
F3
F4
F5
DELETE
ITEM
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
A system key or FTR key must be present and the Coverage Type field must
be set to SmartZone and the OmniLink field must be set to Enabled on the
TRUNKING SYSTEM screen (F4/F4/F3) if this screen is to be accessed.
This screen is used to program the OmniLink Preferred Site Status
List. You may assign preference to up to 32 sites for each personality
associated with an OmniLink system.There are 4 different levels of
preference: NON-PREFERRED, LEAST-PREFERRED, PREFERRED,
ALWAYS-PREFERRED. The default ranking of a site is NON-PREFERRED. Radio will attempt to use ALWAYS/PREFERRED sites as frequently as possible and LEAST PREFERRED sites as infrequently as
possible.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD ITEM
Adds a Preferred Site.
F4 - DELETE ITEM
Deletes a Preferred Site.
You will be prompted for confirmation before the Site is actually
deleted.
Field Definitions
Ignored Site Resource Preference
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If
enabled, the radio ignores site resources information (i.e., if the site
has ASTRO, 12 Kbit Secure, or Analog Clear repeaters) received in
Adjacent Control Channel OSWs.
If disabled, the radio will select sites based on this site resources
information. For example, if a radio has selected an ASTRO TG, it
will select sites with ASTRO repeaters over sites with only Analog
repeaters.
The factory default is Disabled.
190
Site ID
The value specifies the ID of the site which has preferred status. The ID
may range from 1 to 64.
The factory default is 1.
Prefer Status
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to make your selection. This field
controls the preferred site status for the site. The choices are:
None (NonPreferred)
The site is given no preference. If the site is not listed here, the radio
automatically assigns it no preference.
Least
Preferred
The site will be avoided unless it is the only usable site for operation.
Preferred
The site will be used over all non-preferred sites with similar signal strength.
Always
Preferred
The site will be used over all non-preferred sites with similar signal strength even
if site loses communication with the Zone Controller (that is, enters site
Trunking).
The default is Non-Preferred.
System ID
This field contains the 4-digit hexadecimal number which identifies
the trunked System. This number must match the ID of the Trunking
Repeater System.
191
VRM100 Trunk
Options
DDDIG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 thrice, F9 and then F7 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
...TRUNKING:PERS:OPT:VRM100
Personality........1
VRM100 TRUNK OPTIONS
--------------------
VRM100 Pager ID..............00001
VRM100 Talk Group..............001
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
VRM100 Trunking Options for Type II (800 MHz)
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
...TRUNKING:PERS:OPT:VRM100
Personality........1
VRM100 TRUNK OPTIONS
--------------------
VRM100 Pager ID..............00001
VRM100 Size Code...............001
VRM100 Fleet...................001
VRM100 Sub-Fleet...............001
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
VRM100 Trunking Options for Type IIi (800 MHz)
This screen will vary depending on whether you have enabled VRM100 or
VRM500 operation for the radio and the model of the current radio codeplug.
Only if VRM100 operation has been enabled will this screen display
fields relating to VRM100 operation. (For help information on the
VRM500 TRUNK OPTIONS screen, refer to page 195.)
In order to access the VRM100 TRUNK OPTIONS screen:
❒ The VRM100 field on the RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F2)
must be set to Enabled.
❒ The VRM100 field on the TRUNKING PERSONALITY OPTIONS screen
(F4/F4/F4/F9) must be set to Enabled.
192
Field Definitions
VRM100 Pager ID
This field will be visible only if VRM100 operation has been enabled for the
radio. (Refer to dependencies detailed in the screen description above.) Enter
the Trunking Pager ID. This value represents the Trunking Pager ID of
the radio unit which serves as VRM100 master pager unit in the
VRM100 network. This pager unit may Call Alert the radio to activate
its data mode in order to communicate with the master VRM100.
Valid IDs range between 1 and 65534. The Pager ID is used for the
radio’s Private Conversation Call ID (7 + ID#), interconnect land-toportable unit calls (7 + ID#) and interconnect land-to-portable
Talkgroup calls (7 + ID#).
VRM100 Talkgroup
This field will be visible only for Type II models and only if VRM100
operation has been enabled for the radio. (Refer to dependencies detailed in
the screen description above.) The value in this field represents a
Talkgroup dedicated to VRM100 data operation only. Enter the
Talkgroup IDs (three-digit) for this personality in Hexadecimal.
The default is 001.
VRM100 Size Code
This field will be visible only for Type IIi models and only if VRM100
operation has been enabled for the radio. (Refer to dependencies detailed in
the screen description above.). Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose
the Size Code for this personality. The Size Code determines the
maximum number of fleets, subfleets and individual IDs allowed.
Valid codes are: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, M, O and Q.
Size Code
Prefix
Fleet
Subfleet
Individual
ID
A
0-7
00 - 7F
A-C
000 - 00F
B
0-7
00 - 0F
A-G
000 - 03F
C
0-7
00 - 07
A-G
000 - 07F
D
0-7
00 - 00
A-O
000 - 1FF
E
0-7
00 - 3F
A-C
000 - 01F
F
0-7
00 - 1F
A-G
000 - 01F
G
0-7
00 - 1F
A-C
000 - 03F
H
0-7
00 - 0F
A-C
000 - 07F
I
0-7
00 - 07
A-C
000 - 0FF
J
0-7
00 - 03
A-G
000 - 0FF
K
0-7
00 - 01
A-C
000 - 0FF
M
0, 2, 4, 6
00 - 00
A-C
000 - 3FF
O
0-4
00 - 00
A-C
000 - 7FF
Q
0-0
00 - 00
A-C
000 - FFF
193
The Fleet ID is a three-digit hexadecimal number where the first digit
is the prefix and the second two digits are the Fleet. For any size code,
the subfleets for Fleetwide and Dynamic Regrouping are always
available.
Note: The size code and Fleet ID chosen must match the
programming of the Central Controller.
VRM100 Fleet
This field will be visible only for Type IIi models and only if VRM100
operation has been enabled for the radio. (Refer to dependencies detailed in
the screen description above.) Enter a three-digit hexadecimal number for
VRM Fleet ID where the first digit is the prefix and the next two digits
identify the Fleet. The VRM100 Fleet is used during a VRM100
transmission for the current personality.
The default is 001.
VRM100 Subfleet
This field will be visible only for Type IIi models and only if VRM100
operation has been enabled for the radio. (Refer to dependencies detailed in
the screen description above.) Enter a three-digit hexadecimal number for
VRM100 Subfleet. A Subfleet is a logical grouping of members of an
organization.
The default is 001.
194
VRM500 Trunk
Options
DDDIG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 thrice, F9 and then F7 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
...TRUNKING:PERS:OPT:VRM500
Personality........1
VRM500 TRUNK OPTIONS
--------------------
VRM500 Pager Individual ID..........1
VRM500 Deaffiliation.........Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen will vary depending on whether you have enabled VRM100 or
VRM500 operation for the radio and the model of the current radio codeplug.
This screen will display fields relating to VRM500 operation only if
VRM500 operation has been enabled. In order to access the VRM500
TRUNK OPTIONS screen, the VRM500 field on the RADIO WIDE OPTIONS
screen (F4/F3/F2) must be set to Enabled. (For help information on the
VRM100 TRUNK OPTIONS screen, refer to page 192.)
This screen allows you to define and modify VRM500 radio options.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
VRM500 Pager Individual ID
This field will be visible only if VRM500 operation has been enabled for the
radio. (Refer to dependencies detailed in the screen description above.) Enter
the Trunking Pager ID. This value represents the Trunking Pager ID of
the radio unit which serves as the Robin pager in the VRM500 system.
The Robin pager is used to page the radio on the Trunking system, to
request it to go to Data mode using Call Alert signalling.
The default is 1.
VRM500 Deaffiliation
This field will be visible only if VRM500 operation has been enabled for the
radio. (Refer to dependencies detailed in the screen description above.) If the
Affiliation Type field on the TRUNKING SYSTEM screen (F4/F4/F3) is set
to On PTT, the setting for this field will be forced to Disabled. If the
Affiliation Type field is set to Automatic, this field will be set to Enabled and
you can set this field to Enabled or Disabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable deaffiliation from the
Trunking system before the radio enters the VRM500 data mode.
The default is Disabled.
195
Notes
196
Trunking Call List
Table
DDE
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 twice and then F5 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select List.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:TRUNKING:CALL LIST
Call List......... 1
# Call ID
- ------1
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
LIST
CALL LIST TABLE
---------------
Call Text
--------CALL 1
F3
PREV
LIST
F4
NEXT
LIST
# Call ID
- -------
F5
F6
DELETE
ADD
LIST CALL ID
F7
DELETE
CALL ID
Call Text
---------
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to edit Trunking Call IDs and their associated
names (or aliases). The number of characters for the name will be
determined by the display capability of the radio. Each Trunking system
may have a unique call list. Each list may have a maximum of 10 IDs for
a Model I and 19 for other models.
Note: The call lists defined on this screen are assigned to the
Trunking system on the TRUNKING SYSTEM screen (F4/F4/F3).
This assignment must be made or else the list will not be accessible.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD LIST
Adds a call list.
F3 - PREV LIST
Accesses the previous list.
F4 - NEXT LIST
Accesses the next list.
F5 - DELETE LIST
Deletes a call list. You will be prompted before the list is actually
deleted.
Note: The call list being deleted may be referenced by other
fields. Deleting such a call list may cause the radio to operate
improperly.
F6 - ADD CALL ID
Adds a new call ID.
F7 - DELETE CALL ID
Deletes a call ID. You will be prompted before the ID is actually
deleted.
197
Conventional Menu
DF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4 and then F6 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV
CONVENTIONAL MENU
----------------F1 - HELP
F2 - Conventional Radio Wide Configuration
F3 - Conventional Personalities, Options
F4 - MDC Systems, Options, Call List
F5 F6 F7 - Auxiliary Systems
F8 - Conventional Message Alias List
F9 - Conventional Status Alias List
F10 - EXIT
F1
HELP
F2
CONV
WIDE OPT
F3
CONV
PERS
F4
MDC
CONFIG
F5
F6
F7
AUX
SYSTEM
F8
MSG
ALIAS
F9
STATUS
ALIAS
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to navigate to the Conventional edit screens.
The options in these menus pertain only to Conventional radio features.
Function Key Descriptions
198
F2 - CONV WIDE OPT
(Conventional Radio Wide
Options)
Applicable to all Conventional channels and includes options such as
monitor type.
F3 - CONV PERS
(Conventional Personality)
This screen is used to define Conventional frequencies, coded squelch
type (PL/DPL), and Conventional options (scan, etc.) permitted on
each channel.
F4 - MDC CONFIG
(MDC Configuration)
This function will be visible only when a radio with MDC capabilities has
been read. Not all radios have this capability. This screen is used to define
the MDC signalling configuration for each Conventional personality.
Each system can be defined with a unique PTT-ID, emergency
operation and signalling timing options.
F7 - AUX SYSTEM
(Auxiliary System)
Takes you to a screen where you can define SingleTone system
information, SingleTone Lists, Quick-Call II system information, and
GE Star system information.
F8 - MSG ALIAS
(Message Alias)
This option will be visible only when the Message Alias field is set to
Enabled. Brings up a screen where you can change and view the
parameters associated with the MDC System Message Alias.
F9 - STATUS ALIAS
This option will be visible only when the Status Alias field is set to Enabled.
Brings up a screen where you can change and view the parameters
associated with the MDC System Status Alias.
Conventional Radio
Wide Options
DFB
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6 and then F2 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:WIDE OPTIONS
CONVENTIONAL RADIO WIDE OPTIONS
-------------------------------
Smart PTT Retry Timer (ms).......... 275
Smart PTT Quick Key Timer (ms).......500
Hub Defeats PL...................Enabled
Direct Frequency Enabled........Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
MPL
LIST
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
The options and parameters on this screen apply to all Conventional
channels and personalities. Other Radio wide options that apply to
both Conventional and Trunking operation are located on the RADIO
WIDE OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F2). Trunking options are located on
the TRUNKING RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen (F4/F4/F2).
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - MPL LIST
MPL LIST allows the MPL entries associated with the User-Selectable
PL (MPL) feature to be entered and edited.
Field Definitions
Smart PTT Retry Timer (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select a value for Smart PTT Retry
Timer. When Smart PTT is enabled, this field adjusts the time interval
at which the radio will sample for a clear channel. The valid range of
values is 0 (zero) to 5000 ms in 25-ms increments.
The default is 275 ms.
Smart PTT Quick Key Timer (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select a value for Smart PTT Retry
Timer. When smart PTT is enabled, a quick key (double press) of the
PTT button can override the feature and cause the radio to transmit
although the channel is busy. The timer determines the maximum
amount of time between PTT presses, that is, how fast the user must
press the PTT button to override. The valid range of values is 100 to
5000 ms in 100-ms increments.
The default is 500 ms.
199
Hub Defeats PL
This feature is only applicable to portable radios when a Vehicular Adapter
is used. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the Hang-Up
Box (HUB) Defeats PL feature. When Hub Defeats PL is enabled, PL/
DPL will be disabled when the microphone is removed from the hangup box. In the SECURE mode, the radio will go out of Proper Mode
Detect. This allows for monitoring of a Conventional channel to
prevent transmission during another conversation.
The default is Enabled.
Direct Frequency Enabled
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If the
Direct Frequency flag is enabled, the user can enter the Direct
Frequency in the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen (F4/F6/F3)
and modify it. If the Direct Frequency flag is disabled, the Direct
Frequency will be copied from the Conventional Rx frequency.
The default is Disabled.
200
MPL List
Configuration
DFBB
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F2, and then F2 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select List.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:WIDE OPTIONS:MPL
MPL LIST CONFIGURATION
---------------------MPL Number........ 1
Squelch Type
Code
DPL Invert
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
MPL
F3
PREV
MPL
MPL Name.................MPL 1
Receive
CSQ
F4
NEXT
MPL
F5
DELETE
MPL
Transmit
Disabled
F6
F7
Direct
Disabled
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
The MPL Configuration screen is used to change/view the parameters
that pertain to the MPL List which is used with the User-Selectable PL
(MPL) feature in the Conventional Personality Options Screen (Main>F4->F6->F3->F9). To print the MPL List, press F2 from the Print
Conventional Menu Screen (Main, F5, F6).
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD MPL
ADD MPL is used to add another MPL entry to the MPL List. A total of
16 MPL entries are allowed.
F3 - PREV MPL
PREVIOUS MPL is used to navigate to the previous MPL entry while
remaining in the same data field.
F4 - NEXT MPL
NEXT MPL is used to navigate to the next MPL entry while remaining
in the same data field.
F5 - DELETE MPL
DELETE MPL is used to remove the current MPL entry from the MPL
list.
Field Definitions
MPL Number
This field selects an available MPL entry. Alternately, the F3/F4
function keys can be used to navigate through the MPL entries.
MPL Name
The MPL names will ONLY be displayed when viewing or changing the
radio's currently selected MPL.
Enter the alphanumeric text that will appear on the radio display for
this MPL entry. The maximum number of characters will vary based
on the radio model.
Squelch Type
Refer to the Conventional Personality Screen’s Field Definitions.
201
202
PL Code
Refer to the Conventional Personality Screen’s Field Definitions.
DPL Code
Refer to the Conventional Personality Screen’s Field Definitions.
DPL Invert
Refer to the Conventional Personality Screen’s Field Definitions.
Conventional
Personality
DFC
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6 and then F3 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select System.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:PERS
Personality........1
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY
------------------------
Receive Only..............Disabled
Direct / Talkaround........Enabled
Time Out Timer..........360
Scan List.....................None
Hot Keypad................Disabled
Phone Operation..........Ünlimited
Frequency (MHz)
Squelch Type
Code
DPL Invert
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
PERS
F3
PREV
PERS
Receive
136.06250
CSQ
F4
NEXT
PERS
Signalling....................MDC
MDC System #...................1
PTT ID..................Disabled
Emerg. PTT ID...........Disabled
Revert..........Selected Channel
Quik-Call II System #...Disabled
Transmit
136.01250
Disabled
Direct
136.06250
Disabled
F5
F6
F7
F8
DELETE SECURE
MDC
PHONE
PERS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS
F9
F10
MORE
EXIT
OPTIONS
This screen allows the user to edit information for Conventional
operation. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired
function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD PERS
Adds a Conventional personality. A maximum of 10 Conventional
Personalities may be created. Each personality must be “connected” to
a channel on the ZONE/CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen (F4/F8).
F3 - PREV PERS
Accesses the previous personality.
F4 - NEXT PERS
Accesses the next personality.
F5 - DELETE PERS
Removes the current personality. You will be prompted for
confirmation before the personality is deleted. A minimum of one
Conventional personality must be maintained.
Note: The only way to recover a deleted personality is to immediately
re-read the radio or the archive file. However, any other changes
that were made and not previously saved will still be lost.
F6 - SECURE OPTIONS (not
shown)
This function will be active only when a radio equipped with SECURE
hardware has been read. Accesses the SECURE parameters linked to this
personality.
F7 - MDC OPTIONS
This function will be active only when a radio with MDC capabilities has
been read and the Signalling Type field is set to MDC. Allows access to
MDC parameters linked to this personality. Other system-wide MDC
parameters are located on the MDC SYSTEM screen (F4/F6/F4/F3).
203
F8 - PHONE OPTIONS
This function will be active only when the Phone Operation field has been
set to a value other than None. Allows access to Conventional
interconnect access codes and digit timing parameters for this
personality.
F9 - MORE OPTIONS
Allows you to access additional parameters that can be used to
customize a radio to specific system requirements.
Field Definitions
Personality
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Conventional
Personality. You may also enter the number directly.
Note: Refer to the Motorola Radio Catalog Sheets for the
maximum number of personalities allowed for this model.
Receive Only
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Receive-only
operation on this personality. If this feature is enabled, all
transmissions including signalling are inhibited.
The default is Disabled.
Direct/Talkaround
This field will not be visible if the Receive Only field is set to Enabled. Use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable Talkaround operation on the
current personality. In Talkaround (or Direct) mode, the radio will
transmit on the receive frequency. This is useful when a repeater is not
in operation or is out of range.
Talkaround may be used in a manual or automatic mode. In the
manual mode, a talkaround switch must be defined on the RADIO
WIDE BUTTON SWITCH MENU (F4/F3/F3). The switch may be either
on the top or side of the radio or on the keypad menu (if applicable).
Note: If talkaround operation is enabled and no button/switch
is assigned, the radio will default to talkaround operation on
this personality.
The default is Enabled.
Time-Out Timer (sec)
This field will not be visible if the Receive Only field is set to Enabled. Use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Time-Out Timer (TOT) for this
personality. Time-Out Timer determines the amount of time the radio
can continuously transmit before it must be de-keyed. When the TimeOut Timer is about to expire, the radio beeps and then stops
transmitting.
Each personality may have one of four different TOT values. These
values are: 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120 and 180 seconds and Infinite (that
is, Time-Out Timer disabled). The four values for the radio can be
changed on the RADIO WIDE OPTIONS MENU (F4/F3/F2/F9).
The default is 60 seconds.
204
Scan List
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Scan List to be used for this
personality. To change or view the scan list, access the SCAN LIST
screen (F4/F3/F5). Conventional personalities may use Conventional
or Talkgroup type scan lists.
The default is None.
Hot Keypad
This field will not be visible if the Receive Only field is set to Enabled. Use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Hot Keypad (DTMF while
transmitting) operation for this personality. When this feature is
enabled, the keypad is live during all dispatch operation. Pressing any
digit 0 (zero) through 9, “*”, or “#” will cause that digit to be
transmitted.
The default is Disabled.
Phone Operation
This field will not be visible if the Receive Only field is set to Enabled. Use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the type of phone service for this
personality:
List Only
The user may only call pre-programmed numbers from
the phone list stored in the radio.
Unlimited
The user may call phone numbers from the list, or
directly enter any number via the keypad.
Resp Only
The user may only answer calls directed to the radio.
None
DisableS phone operation for this personality.
The Phone Options function key will be active only when this field has been
set to a value other than None.
Note: If the radio has Manual Access with Live Dialing, this field
must be set to Unlimited to allow keypad access.
The default is None.
Signalling
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable MDC or other signalling types
provided for this personality.
MDC
MDC is a MOTOROLA proprietary, 1200-baud digital
signalling protocol used for unit identification, selective
signalling and emergency features.
GE STAR
A type of signalling protocol which provides features
such as Data Operated Squelch (DOS), Emergency Alarm,
and PTT-ID.
The MDC Options function key will be active only when this field has been
set to MDC.
The default is None.
205
MDC System #/
GE STAR System #
This field will be visible only if the Signalling field is set to a value other than
None. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the MDC/GE STAR
system to be used by this personality. Integer values ranging from 1 to
7 are allowed. The radio supports a maximum of 7 GE STAR systems.
Note: To add and/or configure MDC systems, access the MDC
SYSTEM screen (F4/F6/F4/F3). To add and/or configure GE STAR
systems, access the GE STAR SYSTEM screen (F4/F6/F7/F5).
The default is 1.
PTT-ID
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable the MDC Unit Identification
feature for this personality. When this feature is enabled, the Unit ID
will be broadcast each time the transmitter is keyed and/or de-keyed.
Note: Access the MDC OPTIONS screen (F4/F6/F3/F7) to specify
when the ID must be transmitted.
The default is Disabled.
Emergency (not shown)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the MDC Emergency
feature for this personality.
Note: The Emergency feature for this system can be configured
on the MDC SYSTEMS screen (F4/F6/F4/F3). The radio can also
be set up for silent emergency operation from the RADIO WIDE
OPTIONS MENU (F4/F3/F7).
The default is Disabled.
Quik-Call II System #
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available choices
or directly enter the desired value. Integer values from 1 to the
maximum number of Quik-Call II systems are allowed. The radio will
support a maximum of 15 Quik-Call II systems.
The default is Disabled.
Frequency (MHz)
The Transmit and Direct Frequency fields will not be visible if the Receive
Only field is set to Enabled. The Direct Frequency field will not be visible if
the Direct/Talkaround field is set to Disabled.
Enter the Receive, Transmit or Direct (Talkaround) frequency directly
in MHz. Alternatively, the UP/DOWN arrow keys may be used to scroll
through the valid channels. Blank receive frequency fields are not allowed.
Note: Refer to the MOTOROLA Catalog Sheets/Price Pages for
valid receive frequencies for this model.
206
Squelch Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select Receive, Transmit and/or
Direct (Talkaround) squelch type from among the following:
CSQ
Carrier Squelch (Receive Only)
PL
Tone Private-Line
DPL
Digital Private-Line
Disabled
(Transmit and Direct Only)
A data field for a Receive code will be displayed if PL or DPL is selected.
Code
Enter the PL (Private-Line) code directly in Hz (192.8 for instance) or
use the alphanumeric code (7A for instance). Alternatively, the UP/
DOWN arrow keys may be used to scroll through standard frequencies
and codes. The code can also be selected by pressing the first letter and
then scrolling to select the correct code. Press F1 HELP while in this
field to view a list of standard frequencies and their respective codes.
Standard Private-Line Frequencies/Motorola codes are:
Freq
Code
Freq
Code
Freq
Code
Freq
Code
Freq
Code
67.0
XZ
91.5
ZZ
123.0
3Z
167.9
6Z
225.7
M4
69.3
WZ
94.8
ZA
127.3
3A
173.8
6A
229.1
9Z
71.9
XA
97.4
ZB
131.8
3B
179.9
6B
233.6
M5
74.4
WA
100.0
1Z
136.5
4Z
186.2
7Z
241.8
M6
77.0
XB
103.5
1A
141.3
4A
192.8
7A
250.3
M7
79.7
WB
107.2
1B
146.2
4B
203.5
M1
254.1
OZ
82.5
YZ
110.9
2Z
151.4
5Z
206.5
8Z
85.4
YA
114.8
2A
156.7
5A
210.7
M2
88.5
Y
118.8
2B
162.2
5B
218.1
M3
Note: A low-level hum or buzz in the received audio MAY be
experienced when TPL code OZ (254.1 Hz) is used. This PL code
is at the high end of the sub-audible frequency range and may
be heard in the audio under certain circumstances. Use of this
code should be avoided if possible.
207
DPL Code
DPL Invert
208
Enter the DPL (Digital Private-Line) code directly (023 for instance).
Leading zeros are required. Alternatively, the UP/DOWN arrow keys may
be used to scroll through the standard codes. Press F1 HELP while in
this field to view a list of standard frequencies and their respective
codes. Valid DPL Codes are:
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
023
071
134
223
306
411
503
631
734
025
072
143
226
311
412
506
632
743
026
073
152
243
315
413
516
654
754
031
074
155
244
331
423
532
662
032
114
156
245
343
431
546
664
043
115
162
251
346
432
565
703
047
116
165
261
351
445
606
712
051
125
172
263
364
464
612
723
054
131
174
265
365
465
624
731
065
132
205
271
371
466
627
732
This field will be active (or can be accessed) only if the Squelch Type field is
set to DPL. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to invert the received DPL
code for this personality.
SECURE Options
DFCF
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F3 and then F6 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:PERS:SECURE
Personality........1
CONVENTIONAL SECURE PERSONALITY
-------------------------------
Secure/Clear Strapping.................Secure
XL Transmit.......................... Enabled
Scan Holdoff Strapping...................Both
Rx Modulation.................2 Level Receive
Proper Code Detect....................Enabled
Echo Mute Time (ms)........................ 0
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
PERS
F4
NEXT
PERS
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen can be accessed only when a radio equipped with SECURE
hardware has been read. This screen permits access to SECURE
parameters linked to the current personality. Press Tab to select the
desired field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is
highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice
or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV PERS
Accesses the previous personality.
F4 - NEXT PERS
Accesses the next personality.
Field Definitions
Personality
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired conventional
personality. The number may also be entered directly.
Note: Refer to the Radio Catalog Sheet for the maximum
number of personalities allowed for this model.
Secure/Clear Strapping
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the SECURE/Clear strapping
for this personality. This field configures the personality’s transmit
mode. If this field is set to Clear or SECURE, the current personality is
forced to that particular transmit mode. When set to Select, the user is
allowed to select the SECURE or Clear transmit modes via the radio’s
two-position concentric switch.
The factory default is Select (if switch is programmed for SECURE Tx
Select).
209
XL Transmit
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable XL transmit mode for this
personality. This field configures the transmit mode of the XL chip.
When set to Enabled, XL encrypted data will be transmitted in
SECURE transmit mode. When set to Disabled, Non-XL (Cipher
Feedback) encrypted data will be transmitted in SECURE transmit
mode. The receive mode of the XL chip need not be configured since
it will automatically decrypt both XL and Non-XL data streams.
The default is Enabled.
Scan Select
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the secure scan unsquelch
duration for this personality. When scanning for coded transmissions, this field is used to select the amount of time the radio will wait
for a SECURE detect following a carrier detect. If set to Non-XL, the
radio will wait for the time period specified by the Non-XL (Cipher
Feedback) Scan Unsquelch Duration field in the RADIO WIDE
SECURE OPTIONS screen. If set to Non-XL&XL, the radio will wait for
the time period specified by the XL Scan Unsquelch Duration field in
the RADIO WIDE SECURE OPTIONS screen.
Scan Holdoff Strapping
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice. This feature
is used to optimize the scan search algorithm and is normally based off
on the receive signal type desired during scan operation. The value
selected will determine the duration that the radio will wait on a
channel for valid signal activity during scan. When set to either Clear
Only or Secure Only, the radio will wait the preset time period
specified for the selected signal type. When set to Both, the radio will
use the longest preset time period to ensure that enough time is
allocated to detect both signal types.
The factory default is Both.
Rx Modulation
This field applies only to SECURE radios. The value in this field should be
based on the expected receive data format for the personality. This
field allows the user to configure the radio's personality for:
❒ Strictly binary (two-level) receive operation;
❒ Strictly multi-level (four-level) receive operation; or
❒ Both binary and multi-level receive operation (Auto Receive).
When operating in Auto Receive mode, the radio will automatically
detect the received signal type and process the data accordingly. Twolevel sensitivity is reduced when operating in the Auto Receive mode and thus
should not be used on channels or systems that are strictly binary (two-level).
The factory default is 2 Level Receive.
Proper Code Detect
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable proper code detect operation
for this personality. When this field is set to Enabled, the speaker will
unmute on SECURE data only if it is encrypted with the correct key.
The factory default is Enabled.
Echo Mute Time (ms)
210
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the echo mute time for this
personality. Values between 0 and 1500 ms may be selected in 50 ms
increments. This field defines the time period that the user's radio will
remain muted when dekeying following a secure transmission. In
radio systems having a large amount of data throughput delay, the tail
end of the user's transmitted message could be heard following dekey
if this field is not set correctly to account for systems delays.
The factory default is 0 ms.
211
Personality MDC
Options
DFCG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F3 and then F7 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:PERS:MDC
Personality........1
PERSONALITY MDC OPTIONS
-----------------------
Call Alert Decode......... Enabled
Call Alert Encode..........Enabled
Selective Call Decode......Enabled
Unmute Type..................And
Selective Call Encode......Enabled
Auto Sel Call Transmit...Enabled
MDC Unlimited Calling......Enabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
Tx Inhibit On Busy.........Enabled
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen permits access to additional MDC features and options to
further customize the radio configuration to specific user needs.
!
Caution
Caution should be observed when changing
parameters on this screen. MDC System parameter
changes can substantially degrade system performance
if they are made on one or a few radios, but not all
radios in the system.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
Personality
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Conventional
personality. The number may also be entered directly or selected using
the function keys.
Note: Refer to the Motorola Radio Catalog Sheets for the
maximum number of personalities allowed for this model.
Call Alert Decode
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Call Alert Decode. If
this feature is enabled, the user will be able to receive pages from the
base station as well as from other radios.
The default is Disabled.
212
Call Alert Encode
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Call Alert Encode. If
this feature is enabled, the user will be able to send pages to other
radios.
Note: If this feature is enabled and the user must be able to select
target radio(s) ID(s) via the Call list, data must be programmed into
the appropriate Call List Table.
The default is Disabled.
Selective Call Decode
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the MDC Selective
Call Decode feature for this personality. If this feature is enabled, this
feature allows the user to receive individual and group calls. It is
intended not so much to ensure privacy but to eliminate annoyance
to users when they receive traffic that does not pertain to them.
The default is Disabled.
Unmute Type
This field will be visible only if the Select Call decode field is set to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the muting type from among
the following:
And Muting
Radio must receive both the Selective Call code (or QuikCall II tones) and the proper code (PL/DPL and/or
SECURE) before it will unmute.
Or Muting
Radio will unmute on proper code (PL/DPL and/or
SECURE) or on carrier after the Selective Call code (or
Quik-Call II tone) is decoded.
The radio will mute or become call-squelched again when the radio is
reset by the manual reset option or by the expiration of the auto reset
timer.
The default is Or.
Selective Call Decode
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable the MDC Selective Call
Encode feature for this personality. If this feature is enabled, it allows
the user to send calls to an individual radio or to a group of radios. It
is intended not to ensure privacy but rather to eliminate annoyance to
users when they receive traffic that does not pertain to them.
Note: If this feature is enabled and the user must be able to select
target radio(s) ID(s) via the Call list, data must be programmed into
the appropriate Call List Table
The default is Disabled.
Auto Sel Call Transmit
This field will be visible only if the Selective Call Decode field is set to
Enabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the Auto
Selective Call Transmit option. If this option is enabled, the radio will
remain in Selective Call mode after the PTT switch is released. If not,
it will exit Selective Call mode as soon as the PTT switch is released.
The default is Enabled.
213
MDC Unlimited Calling
This field will be visible only if the Selective Call Encode field is set to
Enabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Unlimited
Calling. If this option is enabled, the user will be able to directly enter
from the keypad IDs of radios he or she wants to call. Target Radio ID
selection via the programmed Call List instead is still a valid option
available for models so equipped.
Note: To be able to take advantage of this feature, a radio must be
equipped with a numeric keypad. This option affects only the Call
Alert Encode and Selective Call Encode features.
The default is Disabled.
Tx Inhibit On Busy
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the MDC Transmit
Inhibit on Busy Channel option for this personality. When this option
is enabled, polite MDC transmissions will be inhibited when a carrier
is present on the channel.
The default is Disabled.
214
Conventional
Personality Phone
Options
DFCH
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F3 and then F8 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select
Personality.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:PERS:PHONE
Personality... 1
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY PHONE OPTIONS
--------------------------------------
Auto Access Code Select..........1 -*1P#
DTMF Access Timing Table...............1
Initial Delay (ms)................1000
Digit Duration (ms)................125
Integer Delay (ms)..................75
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
PERS
F4
NEXT
PERS
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows the user to edit the Conventional phone
configuration for each Conventional personality. Press Tab to select
the desired field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field
is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired
choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV PERS
Accesses the previous personality.
F4 - NEXT PERS
Accesses the next personality.
Field Definitions
Personality
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Conventional
Personality. The number may also be entered directly.
Note: Refer to the Motorola Radio Catalog Sheets for the
maximum number of personalities allowed for this model.
Auto Access Code Select
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select an Auto Access Code for this
personality. The radio contains a table for DTMF Access and Deaccess
code pairs and the personality points to one of the table entries. The
actual four-digit codes are entered on the RADIO WIDE PHONE
CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F3/F4).
The default is 1.
215
DTMF Access Timing Table
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the set of DTMF timing
parameters for this personality. Timing can be changed for Initial
Delay, Digit Duration and Integer Delay. The radio contains a table
with four sets of values for each of these parameters. The actual
parameters are entered on the RADIO WIDE PHONE
CONFIGURATION screen (F4/F3/F4).
The default is DTMF timing parameter set to one.
216
Initial Delay (ms)
This a view-only field. The value shown here depends on the DTMF
Access Timing Table chosen.
Digit Duration (ms)
This a view-only field. The value shown here depends on the DTMF
Access Timing Table chosen.
Integer Delay (ms)
This a view-only field. The value shown here depends on the DTMF
Access Timing Table chosen.
More Conventional
Personality Options
DFCI
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F3 and then F9 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:PERS:OPTIONS
Personality........1
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS
--------------------------------
Smart PTT.......Inhibit On Carrier
Quick Key Override........Enabled
Override Timer (ms)..........500
Tx Power Level................High
Busy LED...................Enabled
Unmute/Mute Type..........Standard
Rx Unmute Delay (ms)........2- 100
Reverse Burst TOC..........Enabled
Squelch (Fine Tune)..............0
Rx Emphasis................Enabled
Tx Emphasis................Enabled
Tx Deviation...............5.0 KHz
Tx Deviation T/A...........5.0 KHz
Channel Spacing..........25.0 KHz
VRM100.....................Enabled
VRM100 High Speed Data...Disabled
User-Selectable PL (MPL)..Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
PERS
F4
NEXT
PERS
F5
F6
F7
RAC
OPTIONS
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
The CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS MENU permits access
to additional features and options to further customize the radio
configuration to your specific communication needs.
!
Caution
Be careful when changing parameters on this screen.
System parameter changes can substantially degrade
radio performance if they are not made system-wide.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV PERS
Accesses the previous personality.
F4 - NEXT PERS
Accesses the next personality.
F7 - RAC OPTIONS
Brings up a screen which contains RAC-related information specific to
the current personality.
Field Definitions
Personality
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Conventional
Personality. The number may also be entered directly.
Note: Refer to the Motorola Radio Catalog Sheets for the
maximum number of personalities allowed for this model.
Smart PTT
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the Smart PTT
function. The radio can inhibit transmission either on detection of a
carrier or on detection of a non-matching PL code. This feature
217
prevents users from listening in on (or transmitting over)
conversations that they are not part of. The Monitor button is Disabled
when this feature is active.
The default is Disabled.
Quick Key Override
This field will be visible only when the Smart PTT field is set to a value other
than Disabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable the Smart PTT
(Push-to-Talk) Override feature. If this override feature is enabled, the
user can transmit on a busy channel by a quick key (double press) of
the PTT switch.
The default is Disabled.
Override Timer (ms)
This field will be visible only when the Quick Key Override field is set to
Enabled. This is the amount of time the user can transmit on a busy
channel by a quick key (double press) of the PTT button.
Tx Power Level
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select High or Low transmit power
for this personality. When set to Low, the transmit power is
approximately half that of High.
The factory default is High.
Busy LED
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the yellow LED to
indicate the presence of a carrier (busy channel).
The default is Enabled.
Unmute/Mute Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the receiver muting and
unmuting characteristics for this personality from the choices below:
Standard
The radio unmutes audio when there is a valid PL (or DPL) signal,
and mutes when the PL (DPL) signal is no longer present. Use
this option for Carrier Squelch operation.
Unmute,
Std Mute
The radio unmutes only when there is a valid PL (or DPL) signal
AND there is a carrier strong enough to break squelch. The radio
mutes when the PL (or DPL) signal is no longer present.
Unmute,
OR Mute
The radio unmutes only when there is a valid PL (or DPL) signal
AND there is a carrier strong enough to break squelch. The radio
mutes when the PL (or DPL) signal is no longer present OR the
squelch closes (weak carrier).
The default is Unmute or Mute.
Rx Unmute Delay
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select a Receive Unmute Delay for
this personality. This is the amount of time the radio waits to unmute
after squelch has been detected. Eight choices between 0 (zero) and
1000 ms are available.
The default is 0 (zero) ms.
Reverse Burst TOC
218
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the Reverse Burst (PL),
or turn-off code (DPL), to be transmitted after the radio is de-keyed.
The Reverse Burst or turn-off code is used to signal the receiving radio
that the transmission is ending and to indicate that audio must be
muted. By muting before the carrier drops, the noise burst (squelch
tail) on the receiving end is substantially reduced.
The default is Enabled.
Squelch (Fine Tune)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to adjust the Squelch Fine Tuning. This
value is combined with the master squelch setting to determine the
overall squelch for this personality. This feature can be used to tighten
the squelch on frequencies that are experiencing interference while
maintaining maximum sensitivity on all other frequencies. The valid
range of values is 0 (zero) to 31 in increments of 1.
The default is 0 (zero).
User-Selectable PL (MPL)
If this feature is enabled, the radio will IGNORE the PL settings in the
Conventional Personality Screen (Main->F4->F6->F3) for this
personality.
Enabling the User-Selectable PL feature, also known as Multiple PL
(MPL), will cause the radio to use the currently selected MPL Number
for this personality's PL settings. The MPL Numbers can be created in
the MPL List Configuration Screen (Main->F4->F6->F2->F2). The
radio's currently selected MPL Number can be viewed and changed by
pressing the MPL button appropriately.
Note: The currently selected MPL Number will be used for ALL
conventional modes with the User-Selectable PL (MPL) feature
enabled.
The factory default is Disabled.
Rx Emphasis
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Receive de-emphasis
on this personality.
Pre-emphasis
Amplifies the higher frequencies so that, when they are
transmitted, the signal-to-noise ratio is better.
De-emphasis
Reverses the pre-emphasis after the signal has been
received.
The default is Rx De-emphasis Enabled.
Tx Emphasis
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable Transmit Emphasis
on this personality.
Pre-emphasis
Amplifies the higher frequencies so that, when they are
transmitted, the signal-to-noise ratio is better.
De-emphasis
Reverses the pre-emphasis after the signal has been
received.
The default is Tx Pre-emphasis Enabled.
219
Tx Deviation
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Transmitter Deviation for
this personality. This is the maximum amount that modulation can
cause the carrier to deviate from its unmodulated frequency. The
choices are:
2.5 kHz
VHF, UHF, and 800 MHz Band Analog (12.5 kHz Channel
Spacing)
4.0 kHz
821 MHz Band (20 kHz Channel Spacing)
5.0 kHz
VHF, UHF, and 800 MHz Bands (30/25/25 kHz Channel Spacing)
Note: The SECURE/Clear Strapping on the CONVENTIONAL
SECURE PERSONALITY screen is forced to “Clear” if 2.5 kHz is
selected.
Tx Deviation T/A
This is a read-only field. It specifies the Tx deviation for Talkaround
(Direct). This deviation will be the same as the normal Tx deviation.
Channel Spacing
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Channel Spacing for this
frequency range. End Frequency minus Start Frequency must be
evenly divisible by the channel spacing so that the range can be
divided into an integer value to assign the control channel number
properly.
VRM100
This field will be visible only if the VRM100 Capable field is enabled on the
RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F2). Use the UP/DOWN arrow
keys to enable/disable Conventional VRM100 data operation.
The default is Disabled.
VRM100 High Speed Data
This field will be visible only if the VRM100 Capable field on the RADIO
WIDE OPTIONS (F4/F3/F2) screen and the VRM100 field on this screen are
set to Enabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable the external
device for fast rate data transfer using the VRM100 type interface with
the radio.
The default is Disabled.
220
Conventional
Personality RAC
Options
DFCIG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F3, F9 and then F7 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:PERS:OPTIONS:RAC
Personality........1
CONV PERS RAC OPTIONS
---------------------
Repeater Access......................Enabled
Tone Signalling System....................1
Access Type..........................Manual
RAB 1 Code Type.................Singletone
RAB 1 Singletone (Hz)............1- 300.0
RAB 2 Code Type................ Singletone
RAB 2 Singletone (Hz)............1- 300.0
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
PERS
F4
NEXT
PERS
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen contains all the personality specific RAC-related
information. The information contained in this screen will change
depending on the current personality. Press Tab to select the desired field,
or press the desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:PERS:OPTIONS:RAC
Personality........1
CONV PERS RAC OPTIONS
---------------------
Repeater Access......................Enabled
Tone Signalling System....................1
Access Type............................Auto
PTT Code Type..........................MDC
PTT MDC Repeater ID..............1- 0001
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
PERS
F4
NEXT
PERS
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
For radios not equipped without RAC options
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV PERS
Accesses the previous personality.
F4 - NEXT PERS
Accesses the next personality.
221
Field Definitions
Personality
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys, enter the system number directly, or
use the F3/F4 function keys to select the desired Conventional
Personality.
Note: Refer to the Motorola Radio Catalog Sheets for the
maximum number of personalities allowed for this model.
Repeater Access
This option enables Repeater Access on this personality. Repeater
Access is used to access a repeater. Typically, upon receiving the
Repeater Access code word the repeater will remain in repeat mode
until the hangtime expires.
Repeater Access can be one of the following:
Tone Signalling System
Manual
The Repeater Access code word will be sent when the side
button designated for Repeater Access is pressed; up to two side
buttons can be designated for Repeater Access. The Repeater
Access code word will also be sent automatically in prior to
user-initiated data transmissions (that is, prior to Emergency,
Status, or Message transmission).
Automatic
The Repeater Access code word will be sent preceding every
user-initiated transmission. Repeater Access can be sent either as
MDC Repeater Access code words or as a Single Tone
transmission. The type of Repeater Access Selected will
determine which Repeater Access list is available.
This field will be visible only if the Repeater Access field is set to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Tone Signalling System to
be used by this personality.
The default is 1.
Access Type
This field will be visible only if the Repeater Access field is set to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the Repeater Access Type.
Choices are Manual or Auto.
The default is Manual.
RAB 1 Code Type
This field will be visible only if the Repeater Access field is set to Enabled and
the Access Type field is set to Manual. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the type of Repeater Access Button operation. Depending on your
radio capabilities, choices will be Single Tone, DTMF or MDC.
The default is Single Tone.
RAB 1 Singletone (Hz)/RAB 1
MDC Repeater ID/RAB 1 DTMF
Code
This field will be visible only if the Repeater Access field is set to Enabled and
the Access Type field is set to Manual. For Single Tone and MDC, enter
the index from the Single Tone List or the MDC Repeater ID List. For
DTMF, enter the tone value; DTMF Tone values are 0 (zero) through 9,
“*” and “#”. Alternatively, the UP/DOWN arrow keys could be used to
scroll through indexes/values.
The default is 300 Hz for Single Tone, 0 (zero) Hz for DTMF, and 1 Hz
for MDC.
222
RAB 2 Code Type
This field will be visible only if the Repeater Access field is set to Enabled and
the Access Type field is set to Manual. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the type of Repeater Access Button operation. Depending on your
radio capabilities, choices will be Single Tone, DTMF, MDC or None.
The default is None.
RAB 2 Singletone (Hz)RAB 2
MDC Repeater ID/RAB 1 DTMF
Code
This field will be visible only if the Repeater Access field is set to Enabled,
the Access Type field is set to Manual
For Single Tone and MDC, enter the index from the Single Tone List or
MDC Repeater ID List. Alternatively, the UP/DOWN arrow keys could
be used to scroll through indexes/values. For DTMF, enter the tone
value. Valid DTMF tone values are 0 (zero) through 9, “*” and “#”.
The default is 300 Hz for Single Tone, 0 (zero) Hz for DTMF, and 1 Hz
for MDC.
PTT Code Type
This field will be visible only if the Repeater Access field is set to Enabled,
and the Access Type field is set to Auto. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the Repeater Access Button operation. Depending on your radio
capabilities, choices will be Single Tone, DTMF or MDC.
The default is Single Tone.
PTT Singletone/PTT MDC
Repeater ID/PTT DTMF Code
This field will be visible only if the Repeater Access field is set to Enabled and
the Access Type field is set to Auto. For Single Tone and MDC, enter the
index into tone table or repeater access ID table. For DTMF, enter the
tone value. DTMF Tone values are 0 (zero) through 9, “*” and “#”.
Alternatively, the UP/DOWN arrow keys could be used to scroll
through indexes/values.
The default is 300 Hz for Single Tone, 0 (zero) Hz for DTMF, and 1 Hz
for MDC.
223
MDC Configuration
Menu
DFD
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, and then F4 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:MDC
MDC CONFIGURATION MENU
---------------------F1 - HELP
F2 F3 - MDC Systems
F4 - MDC Call List Data
F5 - MDC Repeater ID List
F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 - EXIT
F1
HELP
F2
F3
SYSTEM
DATA
F4
CALL
LIST
F5
F6
REPEATER
ID LIST
F7
F8
F9
F10
This screen allows you to edit the MDC options for the radio.
Function Key Descriptions
224
F3 - SYSTEM DATA
Brings up a screen where you can configure the radio to work with
various MDC systems.
F4 - CALL LIST
Brings up the MDC CALL ID LIST screen.
F5 - REPEATER ID LIST
Bring up screen that allows you to select or insert a Repeater ID.
MDC Systems
DFDC
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F4 and then F3 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:MDC:SYSTEMS
MDC System.........1
MDC SYSTEMS
----------Primary ID...................0001
Emergency.................Enabled
Secondary ID.............00000000
Emergency Type.....Alarm and Call
Variable ID...................000
Emer PTT ID Sidetone.....Enabled
Leading PTT-ID............Enabled
Acknowledge Alert Tone...Enabled
PTT-ID Sidetone..........Enabled
Trailing PTT-ID...........Enabled
Revert Table
Radio Check...............Enabled
Radio Inhibit.............Enabled
Num Zone Channel
Status....................Enabled
----------------Status Request............Enabled
1
1
1
Message...................Enabled
2
1
1
3
1
1
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
SYS
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
DELETE
SYS
F6
F7
MORE EMER
OPTIONS
F8
F9
MORE
OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to change or view parameters that pertain to an
MDC system. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired
function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD SYS
Adds a system.
F3 - PREV SYS
Accesses the previous system.
F4 - NEXT SYS
Accesses the next system.
F5 - DELETE SYS
Deletes the selected MDC system. You will be prompted for
confirmation before the system is actually deleted.
F7 - MORE EMER OPTIONS
Brings up a screen where you can configure the MDC Emergency
Feature parameters in addition to the ones located on the MDC
SYSTEMS and MDC SYSTEM OPTIONS screens.
F9 - MORE OPTIONS
Allows you to change or view additional MDC system field parameters.
225
Field Definitions
MDC System
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to change the MDC system or directly
enter the system number.
Primary ID
Enter the four-digit hexadecimal for primary unit ID or use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to select a primary identification code from 1 to
DEEE. The digit F is not allowed in the ID. The primary identification
code (PID) is in Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) format and indicates
which unit on the network sent the message. All out-bound messages
will be sent with this identification code.
The default is 0001.
Secondary ID
Enter a hexadecimal value or use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select a
secondary identification code from 0 (zero) to 0EEE EEEE for the
terminal. The digit F is not allowed in the ID. This is the secondary ID
assigned to the radio unit by the host.
The default is 0000 0000.
Variable ID
Enter the ID directly. The Variable Unit ID is a three-digit hexadecimal
number ranging from 0 (zero) to EEE. The digit F is not allowed in the ID.
The Variable Unit ID is used to group radios so that several radios will
decode the same Selective Call or Call Alert. On a system that uses
fleets and groups, the first digit of the variable ID represents the fleet
and the last two digits of the ID represent the group, that is,
{
Variable ID = FGG
Fleet
Leading PTT-ID
Group
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the unit identification
data packet transmission at the beginning of each transmission (BOT).
If this feature is enabled, the radio will automatically send the radio’s
unit identification code to the dispatcher each time the microphone
PTT is pressed. If PTT-ID sidetones are enabled, a continuous alert tone
will sound as soon as you press PTT and will continue until the data
packet(s) has been sent. The user must wait until the tone stops before
he or she begins talking.
The default is Enabled.
PTT-ID Sidetone
This field will be visible only if the leading PTT-ID field is set to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable PTT-ID Sidetones.
During transmission of data packets, the microphone and all voice
transmission is automatically disabled. PTT-ID Sidetones are used to
indicate to alert the user of end of transmission so that he or she may
begin to talk.
If PTT-ID Sidetones are enabled, a continuous alert tone will sound as
soon as the PTT is pressed and will continue until the data packet(s)
has been sent. The user must wait until the tone stops before he or she
begins talking.
The default is Enabled.
226
Trailing PTT-ID
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the MDC unit
identification data packet transmission at the end of each transmission
(EOT). If the trailing PTT-ID feature is enabled and the microphone
PTT is released, the radio will automatically send the radio’s unit
identification code to the dispatcher.The PTT-ID Sidetone will NOT
sound for trailing PTT-IDs.
The default is Disabled.
Radio Check
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. Enabling
this option allows the dispatcher to check the state of the radio (that
is, turned on or off), as long as the radio is within range of the system
(clear mode).
The default is Disabled.
Radio Inhibit
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. The
Radio Inhibit feature allows the radio to respond to a remote Inhibit
signal which is essentially a shut-down command from the dispatcher.
Upon receipt of this command, the radio transmits a quick
acknowledgment to the dispatch equipment; it then goes into a
dormant state during which the receiver audio is muted and the
transmit audio path is blocked. In addition, all operator controls are
rendered inoperative, channel scan is stopped on the operating Mode
which received the command, and all LEDs are turned off. The radio
will remain in this Inhibited state until it receives an Enable
command. Alternatively, the radio may be uninhibited by reading and
re-writing its codeplug with the RSS.
The default is Disabled.
Status
This field indicates whether or not the Status feature is enabled. The
Status feature, when enabled, allows the user to select and transmit a
specific status from a list pre-programmed into the radio. A complete
activation of the Status feature therefore includes first enabling the
feature and then programming the desired status list to be made
available to the user. Status list programming is performed from the
STATUS ALIAS screen (F4/F6/F9).
The default is Disabled.
Status Request
This field will be visible only if the Status field is set to Enabled. Use the
UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If Status Request
is enabled, the radio responds to a remote status interrogation with the
last attempted status. Disabling the feature prohibits the radio from
responding to a remote status interrogation.
The default is Disabled.
Message
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If this
feature is enabled, the user can select and transmit a specific message
from a list pre-programmed into the radio. A complete activation of
the message feature therefore includes first enabling the feature and
then programming the desired list of messages to be made available to
the user. Message list programming is performed from the MESSAGE
ALIAS screen (F4/F6/F8).
The default is Disabled.
227
Emergency
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature.
The default is Disabled.
Emergency Type
This field will be visible only if the Emergency field is set to Enabled. The
following choices are available:
Alarm Only
An emergency message is repeatedly sent to the base station until it
is cancelled in one of the following ways:
❒ All the allowed retries (both polite and impolite) have been sent;
❒ An acknowledgment is received from the base station;
❒ A first PTT press is executed; or
❒ A long press of the emergency button occurs.
Alarm & Call
An emergency message is repeatedly sent to the base station until:
❒ All the allowed retries (both polite and impolite) have been sent;
or
❒ The radio receives an acknowledgment from the base station.
Once an acknowledgment is received from the base station, the user
can talk to the base station. An emergency PTT ID will be sent with
the voice on each PTT press. The emergency call is cancelled by a
long press of the emergency button.
Both types of emergency support reverting (transmitting emergency
on a predetermined channel).
The default is Alarm Only.
Emer PTT ID Sidetone
This field will be visible only if the Emergency Type field is set to Alarm and
Call. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose whether or not a
sidetone must be sounded when the emergency ID is being sent.
The default is Enabled.
Acknowledge Alert Tone
This field will be visible only if the Emergency field is set to Enabled. Use
the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the emergency
acknowledge beep which sounds when the radio receives
acknowledgment of its emergency call.
The default is Enabled.
Zone & Channel
228
This field will be visible only if the Emergency field is set to Enabled. This
field is part of the Emergency Channel Revert table. The table contains
the channels pointed to in the Conventional personalities to which
the radio reverts when it enters emergency call mode. Enter the zone
numbers and the channel numbers in the table. Each MDC personality
will select one of these channels or choose itself. Emergency revert
channels must Conventional channels which are not receive-only, nor have
Quik-Call II enabled on them.
More Emergency
Options
DFDCG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F4, F3 and then F7 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
...CONV:MDC:SYSTEMS:MORE EMER OPT
MDC System.........1
MORE EMERGENCY OPTIONS
---------------------MDC Hot Mic Emergency...................Enabled
MDC Hot Mic Tx Period (sec).................10
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to configure more MDC Emergency Options in
addition to the ones located on the MDC SYSTEMS and MDC SYSTEM
OPTIONS screens. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the
desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Field Definitions
MDC Hot Mic Emergency
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If this
feature is enabled, this feature will activate the MDC Emergency Hot
Mic Operation (also known as MDC Emergency with Voice to Follow).
After one impolite transmission of emergency alarm, the radio will
automatically drop into Emergency Call mode and begin transmitting
with the microphone unmuted for the time specified by the MDC Hot
Mic Tx Period.
The default is Disabled.
MDC Hot Mic Tx Period (sec)
This field will be visible only if the MDC Hot Mic Emergency field is set to
Enabled. It determines the time period during which the radio will be
transmitting with the microphone unmuted, but without user
intervention. The MDC Hot Mic Tx Period may range from 10 to 120
seconds in increments of 10 seconds each.
The default is 10 seconds.
229
MDC System
Options
DFDCI
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F4, F3 and then F9 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
...CONV:MDC:SYSTEMS:OPTIONS
MDC System.........1
MDC SYSTEM OPTIONS
-----------------Emergency
System Pretime (ms)...........500
Polite Retries..................5
Preamble During Pretime...Enabled
Impolite Retries...............15
Inter-Packet Time (ms)........100
Emer Prio Tx Inhibit......Enabled
Limited Patience (sec).........60
Emer Limited Patience (sec)...60
Global Tx Multiplier..... Enabled
DOS (Data Squelch)........Enabled
Tx Multiplier...................1
Operation...........1200/1800 Hz
RAC (Repeater Access Code)
Coast Time (ms)...........267.00
Pretime (ms).................200
Sel Call Reset.......Auto w/ Carr
Ack Alert Tone...........Enabled
Auto Reset Time (sec)..........5
Preambles......................5
Sidetone................ Enabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
MDC SYS
REMOTE
F10
EXIT
The settings shown on this screen apply only to the MDC system numerically
identified on the screen.This screen contains more options for MDC
systems. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired
function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN
arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV SYS
Accesses the previous system.
F4 - NEXT SYS
Accesses the next system.
F9 - MDC SYS REMOTE
MDC SYS REMOTE - is used to change and view parameters associated
with MDC System Remote Monitor/Radio Trace features.
Field Definitions
MDC System
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to change the MDC system or directly
enter the system number.
System Pretime (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a value or enter the desired
value directly. This is the amount of pre-time used before the first MDC
packet is transmitted. If an RAC packet is transmitted, then the system
pre-time is used before the first MDC packet after the RAC packet.
Valid entries range from 0 (zero) to 6350 ms in 50-ms increments.
The default is 400.
Preamble During Pretime
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the preamble
sequence which will precede voice transmissions.
The default is Disabled.
230
Inter-Packet Time (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a value or enter the desired
value directly. The inter-sequence pre-time is the period of time
between consecutive MDC messages. Valid entries are in the range 0
(zero) to 6350 ms in 50-ms increments.
Note: Due to the rounding that occurs when preamble during
pre-time is enabled, the value shown may change by 50 ms
when a codeplug is read from a radio or file. This adjustment
occurs only in the Radio Service Software and not in the radio.
The default is 100.
Limited Patience (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a value or enter the desired
value directly. This is the amount of time that a polite MDC signal will
be transmitted before an impolite signal is sent. The valid range of
values is 1 to 255 seconds. A value of Infinite is also permitted.
The default is 60.
DOS (Data Squelch)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If this
feature is enabled, the radio will be prevented from unmuting while
data is being received.
The default is Enabled.
Operation
This field will be visible only if the DOS (Data Squelch) field is set to
Enabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection. This field
allows for the adjustment of DOS operating criteria to either only 1800
Hz or to both 1800 Hz and 1200 Hz.
The default is 1200/1800 Hz.
Coast Time (ms)
This field will be visible only if the DOS (Data Squelch) field is set to
Enabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a value or enter the
desired value directly. This is the time delay during which the audio
will remain muted after an MDC message has been received in its
entirety. Valid entries range from 0 (zero) to 1134.75 in 4.45-ms
increments.
The default is 267.
Sel Call Reset
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to make your selection. This determines
how the Select Call mode is reset after receiving a Select Call and the
radio has unmuted. The radio will return from Carrier Squelch mode
to Select Call packet required mode according to the value specified in
this field.
Auto
Causes the reset to occur after the Sel Call Auto Reset timer
has expired.
Auto w/
Car(rier)
Also causes the reset to occur after the reset timer has expired.
However, the timer will resume any/each time a carrier (or
voice) is detected.
Manual
Mode must be reset manually by pressing the Monitor button.
The default is Auto w/Car(rier).
231
Auto Reset Time (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a value or enter the desired
value directly. This is the time duration for which the radio will remain
in Carrier Squelch mode after it has received a Select Call directed to
it. Once the Auto Reset Time has expired, the radio will reset to the
Select Call squelch mode. The valid range of values is 0 (zero) to 255
seconds.
The default is 5.
Polite Retries
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a value or enter the desired
value directly. This is the number of times the radio will attempt to
transmit an MDC emergency message while no one else is
transmitting. A polite attempt is one that transmits only when no one
else is transmitting. The valid range of values is 0 (zero) to 14 seconds.
A value of Infinite is also available.
The default is 5.
Impolite Retries
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a value or enter the desired
value directly. This is the number of times that the radio will attempt
to transmit an emergency message even if someone else is
transmitting. An impolite attempt is one that is transmitted regardless
of whether or not someone else is transmitting. The valid range of
values is 1 to 15 seconds.
The default is 15.
Emer Prio(rity) Tx Inhibit
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If this
feature is enabled, all other radios on the system will decode the
Emergency Acknowledgment or the Emergency PTT code word and
inhibit its transmitter for the time required for the acknowledgment
or until the receive carrier goes away respectively.
The user's call request has priority over all other types of call traffic.
The radio will transmit voice and an Emergency Code Word if:
❒ the user presses the PTT button; or
❒ the dispatcher’s alarm acknowledge has a command to remotely
key up.
The default is Disabled.
Emergency Limited Patience
(sec)
This field will be visible only if the Emer Prio(rity) Tx Inhibit field is set to
Enabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a value or enter the
desired value directly. When the radio is in Emergency Call Mode, this
is the amount of time the radio will wait before impolitely
transmitting voice if voice transmission is inhibited by the Emergency
Priority Inhibit feature. The valid range of values is 0 (zero) to 255
seconds.
The default is 60.
232
Global Tx Multiplier
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. Enabling
this feature causes the default Tx Multiplier field value to double. This
effectively doubles how long the transmitter will key after the radio
exhausts all retries without receiving an Ack during Emergency Call. If
this feature is disabled, no doubling of the Tx Multiplier field value will
occur.
The default is Disabled.
Tx Multiplier
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to choose a value or enter the desired
value directly. This value indicates how long the transmitter will key
after the radio exhausts all retries without receiving an Ack during
Emergency Call. This value is multiplied by the radio's base time. The
valid range of values is 0 (zero) to 3.
The default is 1.
RAC (Repeater Access Code)
Allows the user to send a repeater ID to select a repeater either
manually or automatically. Manual repeater acceess (MRAC) requires
the operator to select and send a reepeater access codeword (RAC) prior
to voice transmissions with
Pretime (ms)
This is the amount of pretime used before the first MDC Repeater
Access Code (RAC) packet is transmitted. Valid entries are 0 to6350 ms
in steps of 50 ms. The factory default is 200 ms.
Ack Alert Tone
If this field is enabled, when a Repeater Access Code (RAC) packet is
transmitted, the repeater will indicate acceptance of the packet by
causing the radio to sound 4 beeps. The factory default is Disabled.
Preambles
This is a view only field.
Sidetone
If this field is enabled, the radio will generate a sidetone upon
Automatic Repeater Access Code transmission to warn the user not to
talk until the transmission is complete.
233
MDC System
Remote Options
DFDCI
I
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F4, F3, F9 and then F9 to access
this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select System.
...MDC:SYSTEMS:OPTIONS:REM OPTIONS
MDC System.........1
MDC SYSTEM REMOTE OPTIONS
-------------------------
Remote Mon/Radio Trace.....Enabled
Remote Radio Mode..Remote Monitor
Tx Base Time (sec).............10
Rx Base Time (sec).............10
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to change/view parameters pertaining to the
MDC system remote capabilities of the radio.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV SYS
Is used to navigate to the previous MDC System while remaining in
the same data field.
F4 - NEXT SYS
NEXT SYS is used to navigate to the next MDC System while
remaining in the same data field.
Field Definitions
234
MDC System
This is the number of the MDC system. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys
to change the system, or directly enter the number of the system.
Remote Mon/Radio Trace
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the MDC Remote
Monitor/Radio Trace feature. When the MDC Remote Monitor/Radio
Trace feature is enabled, the radio will be able to decode an MDC
Remote Monitor or Radio Trace command sent from the dispatch
console. After decoding this command, the radio will key-up its
transmitter for a time period calculated using the 'Tx Base Time' and
another value embedded within the Remote Monitor/Radio Trace
command. The factory default is Disabled.
Remote Radio Mode
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the MDC Decode Operation.
The MDC Decode Operation allows the radio to operate in one of two
possible states when it decodes an MDC Remote Monitor/Radio Trace
command:
-
Radio Trace - The radio will automatically key-up sending
unmodulated carrier.
-
Remote Monitor - The radio will automatically key-up and
unmute the microphone thus sending voice on the channel.
Tx Base Time (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired MDC Tx Base Time.
The value may also be entered directly. The MDC Tx Base Time is a
value used to calculate the period that a radio will key-up after
receiving an MDC Remote Monitor/Radio Trace command. This Tx
Base Time is multiplied by a second value that is sent from the
dispatch console and transmitted to the radio via an MDC Remote
Monitor/Radio Trace command. The range is from 10 to 120 seconds
in 10 second increments.
Rx Base Time (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired MDC Tx Base Time.
The value may also be entered directly. The MDC Rx Base Time is a
value used to calculate the period that a radio will 'listen' after keyingup while it is in the Remote Monitor mode. This Rx Base Time is
multiplied by a second value that is sent from the dispatch console
and transmitted to the radio via a Remote Monitor/Radio Trace
command. The range is from 10 to 120 seconds in 10 second
increments.
235
MDC Call List Table
DFDD
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, and then F7 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
...CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:MDC:MDC CALL LIST
CALL LIST TABLE
--------------# Call ID
- ------1
----
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
CALL ID
Call Text
--------CALL 1
F3
F4
# Call ID
- -------
F5
DELETE
CALL ID
F6
F7
Call Text
---------
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen is used to edit Conventional MDC Call IDs and their
associated names or aliases. The ID entries in this table are stored in
the radio and made available to the radio user in Selective Call or Call
Alert operation. For radio models capable of supporting multiple MDC
Systems, the Call list defined here is made available to all MDC
Systems.
An MDC Call ID is either an Individual Call ID or a Group Call ID. The
RSS interprets each entry which begins with the hexadecimal digit “E”
as a Group ID. Call IDs beginning with a digit other than “E” are treat
as Individual IDs. In addition, the number of characters for the ID alias
labelled “Call Text” is automatically determined according to the
display capability of the radio.
Function Key Descriptions
236
F2 - ADD CALL ID
Adds a Call ID.
F5 - DELETE CALL ID
Deletes the highlighted Call ID. You will be prompted for confirmation
before the ID is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
Call ID
Enter the four-digit (hexadecimal) MDC CALL ID comprised of
hexadecimal digits “A” through “F” for this member of the call list.
The Call ID is used to target a radio when an individual or group call
has to be sent to that radio or set of radios. The valid range of values is
1 through FFFF.
A Call ID preceded by the hexadecimal digit “E” is interpreted by the
RSS as a Group ID. IDs of the form “Exxx” (where x implies any
hexadecimal digit) should therefore be avoided for Individual/Primary ID
specification. Note also that the digit “F” serves as a wild-card character;
it can be strategically placed in a Call ID to make it match other Call
IDs thus creating the effect of a group ID. The string “FFFF” would for
instance specify all radios in system.
Call Text
Enter the alphanumeric name for this Call ID. This name will appear
on the radio display to facilitate ease of operation.
237
MDC Repeater ID
DFDE
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F4 and then F5 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter ID (Only 0-9 Digits Allowed).
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:MDC:RPTR ID
MDC REPEATER ID
--------------#
-1
F1
HELP
Repeater ID
----------0001
F2
ADD
ID
F3
#
--
F4
F5
DELETE
ID
F6
Repeater
--------
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
The MDC Repeater Access Code (RAC) Transmission will be targetted
to the listed Repeater IDs.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD CALL ID
Adds an ID.
F5 - DELETE CALL ID
Deletes the current ID.
Field Definitions
Repeater ID
238
Use the UP/DOWN Arrow Keys to select or directly enter the desired
ID of the Repeater. Valid Entries are from 0001 to 9999 in increments
of 1. A Maximum of 16 IDs is allowed.
Auxiliary Menu
DFG
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, and then F7 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:AUX
AUXILARY SYSTEMS MENU
--------------------F1 - HELP
F2 - Singletone Systems
F3 - Singletone List
F4 - Quik-Call II Systems
F5 - GE STAR Systems
F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 - EXIT
F1
HELP
F2
SINGLE
SYSTEM
F3
SINGLE
TONES
F4
F5
QUIK
GE STAR
CALL-II SYSTEM
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This menu contains the advanced Conventional signalling features
other than MDC.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - SINGLE SYSTEM
(Singletone System)
Brings up the SINGLETONE SYSTEM screen. The Single Tone feature
allows the capability to selectively access repeaters. The Single Tone
Systems defined from this screen can be specified in the CONV PERS
RAC OPTIONS screen (F4/F6/F3/F9/F7) by setting the Repeater Access
field to Enabled.
F3 - SINGLE TONES
(Single Tones List)
Brings up the SINGLE TONE LIST screen which contains the
programmable tone frequencies for the Single Tone Feature.
F4 - QUIK-CALL II
Brings up the QUIK-CALL II SYSTEM screen. The Quik-Call II feature
provides a decoding method for the radio to unmute when receiving
the proper tones programmed in the systems. The systems defined
from this option can be chosen in the CONVENTIONAL
PERSONALITY screen (F4/F6/F3) under the following conditions:
1. If GE STAR is used as the signalling type, DOS must be disabled in the
specified GE STAR system; and
2. If MDC is used as the signalling type, DOS and MDC Demodulator need
to be disabled.
F5 - GE STAR SYSTEM
Brings up the GE STAR SYSTEM screen. GE STAR is a signalling
protocol which provides such features as Data Operated Squelch
(DOS), Emergency Alarm, and PTT-ID. The GE STAR systems defined
from this menu option can be specified in the CONVENTIONAL
PERSONALITY screen (F4/F6/F3) when GE STAR is selected for the
signalling field.
239
Single Tone Systems
DFGB
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F7 and then F2 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select System.
...CONV:AUX:SINGLETONE SYSTEM
System............ 1
SINGLETONE SYSTEM
----------------Tone Pretime (ms)........................250
Tone Duration (ms).......................500
PTT Sidetone.........................Enabled
RAB Sidetone.........................Enabled
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
SYS
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
DELETE
SYS
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to change/view the parameters that pertain to
a Single Tone System. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the
desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD SYS
Adds a system.
F3 - PREV SYS
Accesses the previous system.
F4 - NEXT SYS
Accesses the next system.
F5 - DELETE SYS
Deletes a system. You will be prompted for confirmation before the
system is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
System
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Single Tone system,
enter the system number directly, or use the F3/F4 function keys to
scroll through the available systems. The radio may have a maximum of
16 systems.
Tone Pretime (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select or directly enter the desired
value. The Tone Pretime for Tone Signalling specifies the length of
time that “dead” carrier is transmitted between the initiation of the
Tone (RAC) transmission and the actual Tone (RAC) transmission. The
valid range of values is 25 to 6375 ms in 25-ms increments.
The default is 250.
240
Tone Duration (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select or directly enter the desired
value. Upon expiration of the Single Tone Pretime period, the Single
Tone will be encoded onto the carrier for the duration of the value
specified in this field. The valid range of values is 25 to 6375 ms in 25ms increments.
The default is 500 ms.
PTT Sidetone
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. When
the PTT button is pressed, the radio will generate a continuous
sidetone during transmission of the Automatic Repeater Access code
word (RAC) preceding a voice transmission under the following
conditions:
1. This field is set to Enabled;
2. Repeater Access is set to Enabled; and
3. The Repeater Access Type is set to Automatic RAC.
The default is Enabled.
RAB Sidetone
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this feature. If this
field is set to Enabled, a continuous sidetone will sound during
transmission of the Manual Repeater Access code word (MRAC) when
MRAC is initiated via Repeater Access Button (RAB) #1 or RAB #2.
Termination of the RAB Sidetone indicates that transmission of the
RAC is complete and that the user that he or she may begin talking.
The default is Enabled.
241
Single Tone List
DFGC
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F7 and then F3 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Frequency.
...CONV:AUX:SINGLETONE LIST
SINGLETONE LIST
--------------#
1
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
TONE
Tone (Hz)
--------300.0
F3
F4
#
-
F5
DELETE
TONE
F6
Tone (Hz)
---------
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen pertains to the Single Tone list. Press Tab to select the
desired field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is
highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice
or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD TONE
Adds a tone (Hz).
F5 - DELETE TONE
Deletes the current tone. You will be prompted for confirmation before
the tone is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
Tone (Hz)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired tone frequency or
enter a value directly. The defined tones can be used on a personalityby-personality basis in the CONV PERS RAC OPTIONS screen (F4/F6/
F3/F9/F7) by setting the Repeater Access field to Enabled. The field
“Single Tone (Hz)” should contain a tone from this list. The valid range
of values is 300 to 3000 Hz in 0.1-Hz increments.
The default is 300 Hz.
242
Quik-Call II System
DFGD
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F7 and then F4 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Option.
...CONV:AUX:QUIK-CALL II SYSTEM
System.............1
QUIK-CALL II SYSTEM
------------------System Signalling Type...Motorola
Signalling Muting Type........AND
Initial Squelch Type...Quik Call
Reset Type...................Auto
Auto Reset Carr Ovrd.....Enabled
Auto Reset Duration (sec)......5
Decoder 1 Call Type....Individual
Decoder 2 Call Type.........Group
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
SYS
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
Decoder Option.... (1) A-B, (2) C
Long Tone Duration (sec)......4.0
F5
DELETE
SYS
Tone
Freq (Hz)
A
B
C
288.5
600.9
1950.0
F6
F7
F8
Code
138
121
13
F9
MORE
OPTIONS
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to change/view the parameters that pertain to
a Quick-Call system. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the
desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD SYS
Adds a Quik-Call system.
F3 - PREV SYS
Accesses the previous Quik-Call system.
F4 - NEXT SYS
Accesses the next Quik-Call system.
F5 - DELETE SYS
Deletes the current Quik-Call system. You will be prompted for
confirmation before the system is actually deleted.
F9 - MORE OPTIONS
A system or FTR key is required to access this screen. Brings up a screen
which contains more Quik-Call options.
Field Definitions
System
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Quik-Call II
system. You may also enter a number directly or make a selection using
the F3/F4 function keys. The radio may have a maximum number of 15
systems.
System Signalling Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available
selections. This field dictates the System Signalling Type to be used. It
affects the values in the Code (A, B, C, D) fields. Available choices are:
Motorola, GE, Plectron, and Federal.
The default is Motorola.
243
Signalling Muting Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available
selections. This field dictates the Signalling Muting Type to be used
during Quik-Call II operations:
AND
Both Signalling Unmuting (Quik-Call) and Radio Unmuting
must be satisfied for the radio to unmute.
OR
Either Signalling Unmuting (Quik-Call) or Radio Unmuting
must be satisfied for the radio to unmute.
The default is AND.
Initial Squelch Type
This is a view-only field which will be visible only if the Signalling Muting
Type field is set to AND.
Reset Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available
selections. This field dictates the Quik-Call II Call Reset Type to be
used: Manual or Auto. When Manual Reset is selected, a Monitor
button is required for proper Quik-Call II operation.
The default is Auto.
Auto Reset Carr Ovrd
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available
selections. When this feature is enabled, the Auto Reset Duration will
be re-loaded into the Auto Reset Timer when the radio mutes.
The default is Enabled.
Auto Reset Duration (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll or directly enter the desired
value. This field determines the maximum amount of uninterrupted
time spent in Release Squelch Mode. When this duration expires, the
radio will exit Release Squelch Mode and enter Quik-Call II Squelch
Mode. Integer values from 1 to 255 are allowed.
The default is 5.
Decoder 1 Call Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available
selections. This field dictates the Decoder 1 Call Type: Individual or
Group.
Note: When Group is selected, a steady beep will be heard when
a call is decoded. When Individual is selected, an intermittant
beep will be heard when a call is decoded.
The default is Individual.
Decoder 2 Call Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available
selections. This field dictates the Decoder 2 Call Type: Individual or
Group.
Note: When Group is selected, a steady beep will be heard when
a call is decoded. When Individual is selected, an intermittant
beep will be heard when a call is decoded.
The default is Group.
244
Decoder Option
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available
selections. This field controls the number of decoders (1 or 2) and the
decode sequences to be used on this Quik-Call II system. The available
selections are:
(1) A-B
(1) A-B, (2) A-C
(1) A-B, (2) C-B
(1) A-B, (2) B
(1) A-B, (2) C
(1) A-B, (2) C-D
The default is (1) A-B.
Long Tone Duration
This field will be visible only if the Decoder Option field is set to (1) A-B, (2)
C or (1) A-B, (2) B. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll or directly
enter the desired value. This is the duration that a tone has to last in
order for it to be considered a valid long tone. This value may range
from 4 to 10 seconds in 100-ms increments.
The default is 4.
Frequency (Hz)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll or directly enter the available
tones. This field represents the frequency of the audible tone in 0.1-Hz
increments. Values ranging from 288.5 to 3010.0 in 0.1 Hz increments
are valid.
Code
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll or directly enter the desired
code. This field contains a code that represents a Quik-Call II Tone
frequency. Codes vary depending on the type of Signalling system selected.
245
Quik-Call II System
Options
DFGDI
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F7, F4 and then F9 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select System.
...AUX:QUIK-CALL II SYSTEM:OPTIONS
System.............1
QUIK-CALL II SYSTEM OPTIONS
--------------------------Inter-Tone Duration (sec)................2.0
Observ Window Dur (cycles)..............B400
Detections Required........................6
F1
HELP
F2
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
A system or FTR key is required to access this screen. This screen allows you
to change/view additional Quick-Call II system parameters. Press Tab
to select the desired field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10).
If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the
desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - PREV SYS
Accesses the previous Quik-Call system.
F4 - NEXT SYS
Accesses the next Quik-Call system.
Field Definitions
System
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired Quik-Call II
system. You may enter a number directly or make your selection using
the F3/F4 function keys. The radio may have a maximum number of 15
systems.
Inter-Tone Duration (sec)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available choices
or directly enter the desired value. This is the maximum time duration
allotted to detect the second tone of a two-tone sequence. This time
period begins with the detection of the first tone of the sequence. The
valid range of values is 1 to 6 seconds in 100-ms increments.
The default is 2 seconds.
Observ Window Dur (cycles)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available choices
or directly enter the desired value. This field is used to specify the
number of clock cycles in an observation window divided by four. This
calculation is used to keep the value within an integer size field.
The default is B400.
246
Detections Required
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available choices
or directly enter the desired value. This field dictates the number of
valid tone detections (per observation window) required within the
last 8 observation windows to qualify a Quik-Call II tone detection.
Valid values are integers ranging from 1 to 7.
The default is 6.
247
GE STAR System
DFGE
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, F7 and then F5 to access this
screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Use UP/DOWN Arrows to Select Choice.
..CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:AUX:GE STAR SYSTEM
System.............1
GE STAR SYSTEM
-------------Addressing Mode.........Extended
Radio ID....................0000
PTT ID Type..............Leading
PTT ID Sidetone.........Enabled
Pretime Duration (ms)........500
Baud Rate................400 bps
DOS......................Enabled
Unmute Hold-Off (ms)........550
Coast Time (ms).............100
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
SYS
F3
PREV
SYS
F4
NEXT
SYS
F5
DELETE
SYS
Emergency Alarm......... Enabled
Monitor w Sil Emer.....Disabled
Impolite Retries.............10
Revert Table
Num Zone Channel
---------------1
Blank Blank
2
Blank Blank
3
Blank Blank
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to change/view the parameters that pertain to
a GE STAR system. Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the
desired function key (F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD SYS
Adds a system.
F3 - PREV SYS
Accesses the previous system.
F4 - NEXT SYS
Accesses the next system.
F5 - DELETE SYS
Deletes a system. You will be prompted for confirmation before the
system is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
System
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired GE STAR system.
or entered a number directly. You may also use the function keys to
scroll through the available choices. The radio may have a maximum
number of 7 systems.
Addressing Mode
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select Normal or Extended. The state
of this field determines the range of valid IDs that the radio can use.
Specifies the GE STAR addressing mode for the Radio ID.
The default is Disabled.
248
Radio ID
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll or directly enter the Radio ID.
This field specifies the ID of the radio in decimals. For normal
addressing mode, valid radio IDs range from 0 (zero) to 2047. For the
extended addressing mode, valid radio IDs range from 0 (zero) to 9999.
This ID is used for both PTT-ID and Emergency Alarm data
transmissions.
The default is 0000.
PTT-ID Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to make a selection. The value in this
field specifies the placement of the PTT-ID data in a GE STAR
transmission. The PTT-ID Data can be sent using one of the following
methods:
❒ Immediately after a PTT press and before voice (Leading);
❒ Immediately after a PTT release and after voice (Trailing); or
❒ Both immediately after a PTT press and PTT release (Lead/Trail).
The default is Disabled.
PTT-ID Sidetone
This field will be visible only if the PTT-ID Type field is set to a value other
than Disabled. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable this
feature. This field specifies whether or not the radio generates a
sidetone when sending leading GE STAR PTT-ID data.
The default is Enabled.
Pretime Duration (ms)
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll or directly enter the desired
duration. This field specifies the duration of the pre-time transmission
preceding the PTT-ID and Emergency GE STAR data. The range is 0
(zero) to 2000 ms in 25-ms increments.
The default is 500.
Baud Rate
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select 400 bps or 800 bps. This field
specifies the baud rate of the GE STAR data in bits per second.
The default is 400 bps.
DOS
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to enable/disable the Data Operated
Squelch (DOS) feature for this system.
The default is Enabled.
Unmute Hold-Off (ms)
This field will be visible only if the DOS field is set to Enabled. Use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available choices or enter the
desired time directly. The range is 25 through 2550 in 25-ms
increments. This field specifies the duration that the radio waits with
speaker muted for a DOS detect after a carrier is first detected.
The default is 550.
249
Coast Time (ms)
This field will be visible only if the DOS field is set to Enabled. Use the UP/
DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available choices or directly
enter the desired time. This field specifies the duration that the radio
waits with speaker muted after DOS detect has been lost but prior to
unmuting. The range is 0 (zero) through 500 in 25-ms increments.
The default is 100.
Emergency Alarm
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to select enable/disable GE STAR
Emergency Alarm.
The default is Disabled.
Monitor w/Sil Emer
This field will be visible only if the Emergency Alarm field is set to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to enable/disable this feature. This function
allows the monitor button to function during silent emergency.
The default is Disabled.
Impolite Retries
This field will be visible only if the Emergency Alarm field is set to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to scroll or enter the desired value directly.
This field specifies the number of impolite Emergency Alarm packets
that the radio will send. The valid range of values is 1 to 255.
The default is 10.
Zone
This field will be visible only if the Emergency Alarm field is set to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to scroll through the available zones. This
table specifies three Conventional zone/channel combinations that
the selected Conventional zone/channel can use (or revert to) when
initiating GE STAR Emergency Alarm transmissions. The radio remains
on the revert channel only for the duration of the Emergency Alarm
transmissions.
Channel
This field will be visible only if the Emergency Alarm field is set to Enabled.
Use the UP/DOWN arrows to scroll through the available channels or
enter the number of the desired channel directly. This table specifies
three Conventional zone/channel combinations that the selected
Conventional zone/channel can use (or revert to) when initiating GE
STAR Emergency Alarm transmissions. The radio remains on the revert
channel only for the duration of the Emergency Alarm transmissions.
250
Conventional
Message Alias List
DFH
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, and then F8 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
..CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:MESSAGE ALIAS LIST
CONV MESSAGE ALIAS LIST
----------------------Entry Message Alias Number
----- -------------------1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
MESSAGE
F3
F4
F5
DELETE
MESSAGE
Message Alias Text
-----------------MESSAGE 1
MESSAGE 2
MESSAGE 3
MESSAGE 4
MESSAGE 5
MESSAGE 6
MESSAGE 7
MESSAGE 8
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen contains the Conventional Message Alias List and is used
to view and edit the Message Alias number and corresponding text.
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD MESSAGE
Allows you to add a message to the list.
F5 - DELETE MESSAGE
Allows you to delete a message from the list. You will be prompted for
confirmation before the message is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
Message Alias Number
The Message Alias Number will match the message entry number in
most cases. However, if the first entry in the list should cause the
fourth message to be sent, then four should be assigned to the Message
Alias Number of entry 1.
The default for the Message Alias Number matches the message entry
number.
Message Alias Text
Enter the ASCII text for the message to be displayed for each of the
Message Alias Text fields. The size of the message will be displaydependent.
The default will be either MSG X or MESSAGE X, where X is the entry
number, depending on the display type of the radio.
251
Conventional
Status Alias List
DFI
From the MAIN MENU, press F4, F6, and then F9 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
...CHANGE/VIEW:CONV:STATUS ALIAS LIST
CONV STATUS ALIAS LIST
---------------------Entry Status Alias Number
----- ------------------1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
STATUS
F3
F4
F5
DELETE
STATUS
Status Alias Text
----------------STATUS 1
STATUS 2
STATUS 3
STATUS 4
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen contains the Conventional Status Alias List and is used to
view and edit the Status Alias Number and Status Alias Text. Press Tab
to select the desired field, or press the desired function key (F1 - F10).
If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the
desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD STATUS
Allows you to add a status alias to the list.
F5 - DELETE STATUS
Allows you to delete a status alias from the list. You will be prompted
for confirmation before the status alias is actually deleted.
Field Definitions
Status Alias Number
The Status Alias Number will match the status entry number in most
cases. However, if the first entry in the list should cause the fourth
status to be sent, then 4 should be assigned to the Status Alias Number
of entry 1.
The default for the Status Alias Number matches the status entry number.
Status Alias Text
Enter the ASCII text for the message to be displayed. The size of the
status is display-dependent. This field contains the ASCII text for each of
the Status Alias Text Fields.
The default will be either STS X or STATUS X, where X is the entry
number, depending on the display type of the radio.
252
Zone/Talkgroup
Assignment
DH
At the MAIN MENU, press F4 and then F8 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter or Scroll to Select Value.
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:ZONE/CHAN
Zone Number... 1
ZONE/TALKGROUP (CHANNEL) ASSIGNMENT
-----------------------------------
Zone Name.Z1
Channel Number
-------------1
F1
HELP
F2
ADD
ZONE
Personality
Type
Number
-------------Conv
1
Channel Name
-----------CHAN 1
F3
PREV
ZONE
F4
NEXT
ZONE
F5
DELETE
ZONE
F6
ADD
CHAN
F7
DELETE
CHAN
Talkgroup
Number
---------
F8
Strapping
---------
F9
F10
EXIT
A zone is an artificial grouping of channels (or talkgroups) to permit
ease of operation. Generally, all members of a zone will reflect some
common characteristic such as geographic location, job function,
signalling type, etc.
Each member of a zone is defined by selecting a Conventional
personality, or a Trunking personality and a talkgroup. On radios
equipped with a display, an optional name can also be assigned to each
member of the zone. Each zone can also be named. The number of
characters allotted for the zone name versus the channel name is
defined on the RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F6).
Zones and channels can be added and deleted using the F2/F5 keys.
Zone selection may be via the rotary switch, the toggle switch or the
keypad (if applicable).
Press Tab to select the desired field, or press the desired function key
(F1 - F10). If a field is highlighted, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the desired choice or value.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - ADD ZONE
Adds a zone.
F3 - PREV ZONE
Accesses the previous zone.
F4 - NEXT ZONE
Accesses the next zone.
F5 - DELETE ZONE
Deletes a zone. You will be prompted for confirmation before the zone
is actually deleted.
F6 - ADD CHAN
Adds a channel.
F7 - DELETE CHAN
Deletes a channel. You will be prompted for confirmation before the
channel is actually deleted.
253
Field Definitions
Zone Number
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the desired zone. The number
may also be entered directly.
Zone Name
Each zone may be assigned an alphanumeric name. The number of
characters allotted for the zone name versus the channel name is
defined on the RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F6).
The zone name will appear to the left of the channel name on the
radio display. For single-zone radios, the zone name is optional.
Channel Number
This is a read-only field. A channel number refers to the position in the
list which a particular member occupies. Depending on the radio
model and configuration, channel selection may be via the rotary
switch, the toggle switch, or the keypad.
Channel Name
Each channel may be assigned an alphanumeric name. The number of
characters allotted for the channel name versus the zone name is
defined on the RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen (F4/F3/F6).
The channel name will appear to the right of the zone name on the
radio display.
Personality Type
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select either a Conventional or
Trunked personality for each zone member. Both types may be
assigned within a single zone.
Note: Personalities must be defined before they can be assigned on
this screen. Trunking personalities are entered on the TRUNKING
PERSONALITY
screen
(F4/F4/F4),
and
Conventional
personalities
are
entered
on
the
CONVENTIONAL
PERSONALITY screen (F4/F6/F3).
Personality Number
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the personality number for
this channel. The number may also be entered directly.
Note: Personalities must be defined before they can be assigned on
this screen. Trunking personalities are entered on the TRUNKING
PERSONALITY
screen
(F4/F4/F4)
and
Conventional
personalities
are
entered
on
the
CONVENTIONAL
PERSONALITY screen (F4/F6/F3).
254
Print Menu Functions
6
The print function is used to produce permanent records of codeplug
configurations. A printer is required and should be connected to your
computer according to instructions in the user’s manual that came
with your computer. Graphics capability is NOT required. In order to
print radio configuration data, you must first read or retrieve a codeplug file
using the GET/SAVE MENU and related screens.
Each print-out will contain the following data in addition to
configuration information: radio model and serial number
information, software version numbers, RSS version numbers, and the
date and time of the print-out.
Menu Map
PRINT MENU
C Radio Wide Buttons, Switches, Display, Scan, Phone
B Radio Wide Options
C Buttons, Switches, Menu Items
D Phone Lists and Options
E Scan Lists and Options
F Display Options
G Alarm Options
D Trunking Systems, Personalities, Call Lists, Options
B Trunking Radio Wide Options
C Trunking Systems: System ID, Control Channels, etc.
D Trunking Personality: Talk Groups, Emergency Options, etc.
E Trunking Call List Data
G Control Channels (UHF and VHF only)
F Conventional Systems, Personalities, MDC, Options
B Conventional Radio Wide Configuration
C Conventional Personalities, Options
D MDC Systems, Options
G Auxiliary Systems
H Conventional Message Alias List
I Conventional Status Alias List
H Zone/Channel Assignment
I Radio Codeplug Data Summary
255
Print Menu
E
At the MAIN MENU, press F5 to access the PRINT MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:PRINT
PRINT MENU
---------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
F2
-
HELP
Radio Wide Buttons, Switches, Display, Scan, Phone
Trunking Systems, Personalities, Call Lists, Options
Conventional Systems, Personalities, MDC, Options
Zone/Channel Assignment
Radio Codeplug Data Summary
EXIT, Return to Main Menu
F3
RADIO
CONFIG
F4
TRUNK
DATA
F5
F6
CONV
DATA
F7
F8
F9
ZONE/CHN DATA
ASSIGN SUMMARY
F10
EXIT
Make sure you have read a codeplug file using the GET/SAVE functions
before you attempt to print configuration information. The PRINT function
is used to produce permanent records of codeplug configurations. A
printer is required and should be connected to your computer
according to instructions in the user’s manual that came with your
computer. Graphics capability is NOT required.
Note: When printing, misalignment of page breaks may result if the
printer is not set up properly. For best results, configure the printer
as an IBM ProPrinter or an Epson FX/MX having factory default
settings. The default number of lines per page is 66.
Function Key Descriptions
F3 - RADIO CONFIG
(Radio Configuration)
Brings up a screen from which you can print a summary of Radio
Configuration information, including Button and Switch settings,
Phone Lists, Scan Lists, and Display information.
F4 - TRUNK DATA
(Trunking Data)
Brings up a screen from which you can print a summary of Trunking
information including personalities, call lists, and options.
F6 - CONV DATA
(Conventional Data)
Brings up a screen from which you can print out a summary of
Conventional Personality and MDC system information.
F8 -ZONE/CHANNEL ASSIGN
(Zone/Channel Assignment)
Prints out a summary of current Zone/Channel Assignment
information for the radio.
F9 - DATA SUMMARY (Radio
Codeplug Data Summary)
Prints a summary of key radio programming parameters.
256
Print
Radio Wide Features
Configuration Menu
EC
From the MAIN MENU, press F5 and then F3 to access the RADIO
WIDE CONFIGURATION PRINT MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:PRINT:CONFIG
RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU
----------------------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
-
HELP
Radio Wide Options
Buttons, Switches, Menu Items
Phone Lists and Options
Scan Lists and Options
Display Options
Alarm Options
EXIT, Return to PRINT MENU
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
RADIO FEATURE PHONE
SCAN
DISPLAY ALARM
OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
You must use the GET/SAVE functions to first read or get a codeplug for
printing radio configuration data. The PRINT function is used to produce
permanent records of codeplug configurations. A printer is required
and should be connected to your computer according to instructions
in the user’s manual that came with your computer. Graphics
capability is NOT required.
Note: When printing, misalignment of page breaks may result if the
printer is not set up properly. For best results, configure the printer
as an IBM ProPrinter or an Epson FX/MX having factory default
settings. The default number of lines per page is 66.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - RADIO OPTIONS
Prints a summary of Radio Wide Options settings.
F3 - FEATURE OPTIONS
Prints a summary of Button/Switch/Menu/DEK Options settings.
F4 - PHONE OPTIONS
Prints a summary of Phone Options settings.
F5 - SCAN OPTIONS
Prints a summary of the Scan List and associated Scan Option settings.
F6 - DISPLAY OPTIONS
Prints a summary of Display Options settings.
F7 - ALARM OPTIONS
Prints a summary of Alarm Options settings.
257
Trunking Print Menu
ED
At the MAIN MENU, press F5 and then F4 to bring up the TRUNKING
PRINT MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:PRINT:TRUNKING
TRUNKING MENU
------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
-
HELP
Trunking
Trunking
Trunking
Trunking
Radio Wide Options
Systems: System ID, Control Channels, etc.
Personality: Talk Groups, Emergency options, etc.
Call List Data
Control Channels (UHF and VHF only)
EXIT, Return to PRINT MENU
F2
F3
TRUNK
TRUNK
WIDE OPT SYS
F4
TRUNK
PERS
F5
TRUNK ID
LIST
F6
F7
CONTROL
CHANNEL
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
You must use the GET/SAVE functions to first read or get a codeplug for
printing radio configuration data. The PRINT function is used to produce
permanent records of codeplug configurations. A printer is required
and should be connected to your computer according to the
instructions in the user’s manual that came with your computer.
Graphics capability is NOT required.
Each print-out contains radio model and serial number information,
software version numbers, Radio Service Software version numbers,
and the date and time of the print-out.
Note: When printing, misalignment of page breaks may result if the
printer is not set up properly. For best results, configure the printer
as an IBM ProPrinter or an Epson FX/MX having factory default
settings. The default number of lines per page is 66.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - TRUNK WIDE OPT
Prints information about options which are applicable to all Trunking
operations, regardless of system type.
F3 - TRUNK SYS
Prints Trunking system information.
F4 - TRUNKING PERSONALITY
Prints the Trunking personality and talkgroups.
F5 - TRUNK ID LIST
Prints the screen which documents the Trunking call lists.
F7 - CONTROL CHANNEL
Prints the CONTROL CHANNELS screen (VHF/UHF only).
258
Conventional Print
Menu
EF
At the MAIN MENU, press F5 and then F6 to access the
CONVENTIONAL PRINT MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:PRINT:CONV
CONVENTIONAL MENU
----------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
F2
CONV
WIDE OPT
-
HELP
Conventional Radio Wide Configuration
Conventional Personalities, Options
MDC Systems, Options
Auxiliary Systems
Conventional Message Alias List
Conventional Status Alias List
EXIT, Return to PRINT MENU
F3
CONV
PERS
F4
MDC
SYSTEM
F5
F6
F7
AUX
SYSTEM
F8
MSG
ALIAS
F9
STATUS
ALIAS
F10
EXIT
You must first read or get a codeplug using the GET/SAVE functions in order
to print radio configuration data. The PRINT function is used to produce
permanent records of codeplug configurations. A printer is required
and should be connected to your computer according to instructions
in the user’s manual that came with your computer. Graphics
capability is NOT required.
Each print-out contains radio model and serial number information,
software version numbers, Radio Service Software version numbers,
and the date and time of the print-out.
Note: When printing, misalignment of page breaks may result if the
printer is not set up properly. For best results, configure the printer
as an IBM ProPrinter or an Epson FX/MX having factory default
settings. The default number of lines per page is 66.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - CONV WIDE OPT
(Conventional Radio Wide
Options)
Prints the Conventional Radio Wide information, along with the MPL
List Configuration.
F3 - CONV PERS
(Conventional Personality)
Prints the Conventional Personality information.
F4 - MDC SYSTEM
Prints a summary of the MDC system options.
F7 - AUX SYSTEM
(Auxiliary Systems)
Takes you to a sub-menu from where you can print information about
Single Tone Systems and Lists, Quik-Call II, and GE STAR systems.
F8 - MSG ALIAS
(Message Alias)
Prints the Conventional Message Alias List.
F9 - STATUS ALIAS
(Status Alias)
Prints the Conventional Status Alias List.
259
Notes
260
File Maintenance Menu
Functions
7
This section describes all the functions available from the FILE
MAINTENANCE MENU. To guide you through these functions, related
menus and screens are shown with their paths from the MAIN MENU,
function key descriptions and field definitions.
Menu Map
FILE
MAINTENANCE
B Create Directory Path
E Delete Archive File
261
File Maintenance
Menu
F
At the MAIN MENU, press F6 to access the FILE MAINTENANCE
MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:FILE MAINT
FILE MAINTENANCE MENU
--------------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
F2
DEFINE
PATH
-
HELP
Create Directory Path
Delete Archive File
Exit
F3
F4
F5
DELETE
FILE
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This RSS feature allows you to perform file management tasks from
within the Radio Service Software package. Tasks such as creating
directories and deleting files can be accomplished without exiting the
RSS.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - DEFINE PATH
Allows you to enter a new path name.
F5 - DELETE FILE
Allows you to delete a file from the path. This feature is similar to the
DEL file name command in DOS.
262
Create Directory
Path
FB
From the MAIN MENU, press F6 and then F2 to bring up this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter Path.
MAIN:FILE MAINT:CREATE
CREATE DIRECTORY PATH
---------------------
New Path Name :
F1
HELP
F2
DEFINE
PATH
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to create a new directory on your computer disk
drive. This is similar to the MKDIR command in DOS.
Programming Procedure
1. Type in the new directory path name, or press the desired function
key (F1 - F10).
2. If you entered a new directory path, press F2 to create the
directory.
Function Key Description
F2 - DEFINE PATH
Creates a directory with the path name specified by the New Path
Name field.
263
Delete Archive File
FE
From the MAIN MENU, press F6 and then F5 to bring up this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Enter Path.
MAIN:FILE MAINT:DELETE ARCHIVE
Current Archive
DELETE ARCHIVE FILE
------------------FileName
-------------khh_h38.exe
khl_h38.exe
khm_h37.exe
khn_h38.exe
F1
HELP
F2
CHANGE
ARCHIVE
FileName
--------------
F3
F4
F5
DELETE
FILE
FileName
--------------
F6
F7
FileName
--------------
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
This screen allows you to delete unwanted files. Enter the path of the
directory which holds the unwanted files by typing the path name in
the Current Archive field.
Programming Procedure
1. Enter the path of the directory which holds the unwanted files by
typing the path name in the Current Archive field.
2. Press Tab to select the desired file name.
3. Press F5 to delete the selected file. You will be prompted for
confirmation before the file is actually deleted.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - CHANGE ARCHIVE
Allows you to access a different directory from the current directory.
This function is similar to the CHDIR command in DOS.
F5 - DELETE FILE
Allows you to delete a file from the path. This function is similar to the
DEL file name command in DOS. You will be prompted for
confirmation before the file is actually deleted
Field Definitions
Current Archive
The default archive path will always be the specified default path from
the CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT screen (F9/F3).
File Name
This field holds the name of the file that you wish to delete.
Note: Refer to the owner’s manual that came with your
computer for a complete description of file names.
264
FLASHport Upgrade
8
FLASHport is a revolutionary new method of upgrading the software
in a subscriber radio. It involves enabling downloading new features
to the radio or FLASHing new software into the radio.
This section is a brief preview of FLASHport capabilities. Detailed
procedures can be found in the FLASHport User’s Manual that
accompanies the FLASHport software upgrade kit.
Note: Your screens may vary slightly from the screens shown in this
section. The FLASHport path and key titles (HELP, EXIT, FLASH
RADIO, etc.) may be the same for portable and mobile radios,
but the function keys may be different.
Menu Map
FLASHPORT
UPGRADE
B View Radio Configuration
G Enhancement Options
C View FLASHkey Configuration
E View Features
H Upgrade Radio
265
FLASHport Upgrade
H
At the MAIN MENU, press F8 to access the FLASHport UPGRADE
MENU.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:FLASHport UPGRADE
FLASHPORT UPGRADE MENU
---------------------F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
HELP
F2
VIEW
RADIO
-
HELP
View Radio Configuration
View FLASHkey Configuration
Upgrade Radio
EXIT, Return to Main Menu
F3
VIEW
FLASHKEY
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
UPGRADE
RADIO
F9
F10
EXIT
You must have FLASHport software installed on your computer in order to
access this screen from the MAIN MENU. This is a menu that is used to
view the radio’s configuration, to view the FLASHkey’s contents, to
upgrade the codeplug, and to FLASH the radio. The HELP screen (F1)
and the User’s Manual that came with your FLASHport Upgrade
package will guide you through the upgrade process.
Note: If you have NOT installed the FLASHport software on your
computer, the RSS will display the following error message:
“UNABLE TO OPEN THE SRIB SOFTWARE FILE. PLEASE PRESS
F9 FROM THE MAIN MENU AND CHECK THE PATH”.
Note: After upgrading the radio, you must reset it by pressing the
power button off and on again.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - VIEW RADIO
Displays the radio’s current system and enhancements prior to the
FLASHport upgrade. You must have specified the displayed information
when you order a FLASHport upgrade package from the subscriber. Since the
FLASHport upgrade involves downloading new software to the radio,
the memory size of the radio’s controller board will also be displayed
in order to reveal possible memory limitations in FLASHing the radio.
F3 - VIEW FLASHKEY
Displays the contents of the FLASHkey you will receive with your
FLASHport upgrade package. This screen displays information such as
the FLASH software required, number of purchased and remaining
upgrades, and a side-by-side comparison of the features currently
enabled in the radio and the features that will be enabled when the
radio is FLASHed.
F8 - UPGRADE RADIO
Brings up the screen which displays the names of the files that exist in
the default directory for the FLASH software. You will be asked to select
a FLASH software file. When this is done, press F8 in order to start the
upgrade process.
266
View Radio
Configuration
HB
At the MAIN MENU, press F8 and then F2 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:FLASHport:RADIO CONFIG
RADIO CONFIGURATION
------------------FLASHcode.......................000004-000000-6
Memory.....................................1Meg
System Package..............................H37
System Version..............................1.0
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
ENHANCEMENT
OPTIONS
F9
F10
EXIT
You must have FLASHport software installed on your computer in order to
access this screen. This screen displays the current configuration of your
radio.
Note: All the fields in this screen are view-only fields.
Function Key Descriptions
F7 - ENHANCEMENT OPTIONS
Displays the radio’s enhancement options and their current status
(that is, whether they are enabled or disabled).
267
Enhancement
Options
HBG
At the MAIN MENU, press F8, F2 and then F7 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:FLASHport:RADIO CONFIG:OPTIONS
ENHANCEMENT OPTIONS
------------------SmartZone Operation........Disabled
Stat Alert Decode Feat.....Disabled
SMARTNET Operation.........Disabled
Stat Alert Encode Feat.....Disabled
Startsite Operation........Disabled
Conventional Operation..... Enabled
150 Modes (Model I)........Disabled
250 Modes (Models II/III)..Disabled
GE Star Signaling..........Disabled
Quick Call II/SingleTone...Disabled
Trk One Touch Button.......Disabled
SMARTNET Type I............Disabled
Trk Remote Monitor.........Disabled
MDC Sel. Radio Inhibit.....Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
You must have FLASHport software installed on your computer in order to
access this screen. This screen displays the enhancement options for
your radio and their current status (that is, whether they are enabled
or disabled).
Note: All the fields in this screen are view-only fields.
268
View FLASHkey
Configuration
HC
At the MAIN MENU, press F8 and then F3 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:FLASHport:FLASHkey
FLASHKEY CONFIGURATION
---------------------Model Number.......................M01KHH9PW5AN
Current FLASHcode................00001-000000-9
New FLASHcode....................00001-000000-9
Required FLASH Software................TVN6369A
Upgrades Purchased............................1
Upgrades Remaining............................1
Factory Order Number............4818-0948-40432
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
VIEW
FEATURES
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
You must have FLASHport software installed on your computer in order to
access this screen. This screen displays the contents of your FLASHkey.
Note: All the fields in this screen are view-only fields.
Function Key Descriptions
F5 - VIEW FEATURES
Displays the list of options currently available for your radio and the
list of options that will be available after you perform an upgrade.
Field Definitions
Model Number
This field is a view-only field. This is the model number of the radio that
the upgrade kit was ordered for.
Current FLASHcode
This field is a view-only field. It determines the options that are currently
available on your radio.
New FLASHcode
This field is a view-only field. It determines the options that will be
available on your radio after you perform the upgrade.
Required FLASH Software
This field is a view-only field. This is the kit number of the software
package that was shipped to you with the FLASHkey. In order to perform
a successful upgrade, the kit number on the FLASHkey must match the kit
number in the Upgrade Software kit.
Upgrades Purchased
This field is a view-only field. This is the number of upgrades you have
purchased.
Upgrades Remaining
This field is a view-only field. This is the number of upgrades remaining.
Factory Order Number
This field is a view-only field. It displays your factory order number.
269
View Features
HCE
At the MAIN MENU, press F8, F3 and then F5 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
MAIN:FLASHport:FLASHkey:FEATURES
Current FLASHcode
----------------FLASHcode...........000001-000000-9
System Package..................H35
System Version....................0
New FLASHcode
------------FLASHcode...........000001-000000-9
System Package..................H35
System Version....................0
Enhancements:
SmartZone Operation........Disabled
SMARTNET Operation.........Disabled
Startsite Operation........Disabled
Conventional Operation.....Disabled
150 Modes (Model I)........Disabled
250 Modes (Models II/III)..Disabled
GE Star Signaling..........Disabled
Quick Call II/SingleTone...Disabled
Enhancements:
SmartZone Operation........Disabled
SMARTNET Operation.........Disabled
Startsite Operation........Disabled
Conventional Operation.....Disabled
150 Modes (Model I)........Disabled
250 Modes (Models II/III)..Disabled
GE Star Signaling..........Disabled
Quick Call II/SingleTone...Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
MORE
FEATURES
F10
EXIT
You must have FLASHport software installed on your computer in order to
access this screen. This screen displays the list of options currently
available on your radio and the features that will be available after the
upgrade.
Note: All the fields in this screen are view-only fields.
Function Key Descriptions
F9 - MORE FEATURES
270
Displays more radio options and features.
More Features
HCEI
At the MAIN MENU, press F8, F3, F5 and then F9 to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Select Function F1 - F10.
...FLASHkey:MORE FEATURES
Current FLASHcode
----------------Trk One Touch Button.......Disabled
SMARTNET Type I............Disabled
Trk Remote Monitor.........Disabled
MDC Sel. Radio Inhibit.....Disabled
Stat Alert Decode Feat.....Disabled
Stat Alert Encode Feat.....Disabled
F1
HELP
F2
F3
F4
F5
New FLASHcode
------------Trk One Touch Button.......Disabled
SMARTNET Type I............Disabled
Trk Remote Monitor.........Disabled
MDC Sel. Radio Inhibit.....Disabled
Stat Alert Decode Feat.....Disabled
Stat Alert Encode Feat.....Disabled
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
You must have FLASHport software installed on your computer in order to
access this screen. This screen displays more options currently available
on your radio and the features that will be available after the upgrade.
Note: All the fields in this screen are view-only fields.
271
Upgrade Radio
HH
At the MAIN MENU, press F8 twice to access this screen.
MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
MCS
Model:
Press Enter to Select Upgrade File.
Press F8 to Upgrade the Radio.
MAIN:FLASHport:UPGRADE RADIO
Software Path: C:\MRSS\MCS\UPGRADE
DIRECTORY CONTENTS
------------------
mcsboot.enc
F1
HELP
F2
CHANGE
PATH
F3
F4
F5
F6
CHDIR
UP
F7
CHDIR
DOWN
F8
FLASH
RADIO
F9
F10
EXIT
You must have FLASHport software installed on your computer in order to
access this screen. This screen is used to upgrade your radio. Press Tab
to move to the desired field. Once a file is highlighted, press Enter to
select it and then F8 to upgrade the radio.
Note: The kit number of the selected file must match the kit number
on your FLASHkey. Otherwise, the RSS will not perform the
upgrade. Selecting a file that is not a FLASHport upgrade file will
result in a “CHECKSUM” or “INVALID FILE FORMAT” error.
Function Key Descriptions
F2 - CHANGE PATH
Used to change the directory path in order to locate the directory
where the FLASHport upgrade files are located.
F6 - CHDIR UP
Moves one level up the directory tree.
F7 - CHDIR DOWN
Moves one level down the directory tree.
F8 - FLASH RADIO
Used to upgrade the radio using the selected FLASHport file.
Note: The kit number of the selected file must match the kit number
on your FLASHkey. Otherwise, the RSS will not perform the
upgrade. Selecting a file that is not a FLASHport upgrade file will
result in a “CHECKSUM” or “INVALID FILE FORMAT” error.
Field Definitions
Software Path
272
This field will default to the FLASH software path specified on the
CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT screen (F9/F3).
A
Computer-to-Radio
Communication Error
Codes
Error
Code
Description
Recommended Corrective Action
01
No response from the
radio
Check programming cable connections.
Eliminate background routines on the PC.
Check power to the RIB.
02
Transmit register time-out
Check serial port.
Busy low time-out.
03
Busy low time-out
Check to make sure that the radio is turned on.
Check radio’s battery.
Check COM port selection on the CONFIGURE PATHS
AND PORT screen (F9/F3).
04
Communication collision
Retry operation.
Check COM port selection on the CONFIGURE PATHS
AND PORT screen (F9/F3).
Check power to the RIB.
Check programming cable connections.
05
Programmer not receiving
its own transmission
Check COM port selection on the CONFIGURE PATHS
AND PORT screen (F9/F3).
Check RIB-to-PC cable.
Check power to the RIB.
Check serial card.
Eliminate background routines on the PC.
06
Re-transmission not
acknowledged (NAKed)
Retry operation.
07
CRC error
Retry operation.
08
CRC error
Retry operation.
09
No Acknowledgment
received
Check radio’s battery.
Check power to the RIB.
11
Busy high after pulled low
Check COM port selection on the CONFIGURE PATHS
AND PORT screen (F9/F3).
Check COM port.
Check RIB-to-PC connections.
Check power to the RIB.
Note: A low-level hum or buzz in the received audio MAY be
experienced when TPL code OZ (254.1 Hz) is used. This PL
code is at the high end of the sub-audible frequency range and
may be heard in the audio under certain circumstances. Use of
this code should be avoided if possible.
273
Notes
274
B
TPL Frequencies and
Codes
Frequency (Hz)
Code
Frequency (Hz)
Code
067.0
XZ
136.5
4Z
069.3
WZ
141.3
4A
071.9
XA
146.2
4B
074.4
WA
151.4
5Z
077.0
XB
156.7
5A
079.7
WB
162.2
5B
082.5
YZ
167.9
6Z
085.4
YA
173.8
6A
088.5
YB
179.9
6B
091.5
ZZ
186.2
7Z
094.8
ZA
192.8
7A
097.4
ZB
203.5
M1
100.0
1Z
206.5
8Z
103.5
1A
210.7
M2
107.2
1B
218.1
M3
110.9
2Z
225.7
M4
114.8
2A
229.1
9Z
118.8
2B
233.6
M5
123.0
3Z
241.8
M6
127.3
3A
250.3
M7
131.8
3B
254.1
OZ
275
Notes
276
C
DPL Codes
Code
Code
Code
Code
023
143
315
532
025
152
331
546
026
155
343
565
031
156
346
606
032
162
351
612
043
165
364
624
047
172
365
627
051
174
371
631
054
205
411
632
065
223
412
645
071
226
413
654
072
243
423
662
073
244
431
664
074
245
432
703
114
251
445
712
115
261
464
723
116
263
465
731
125
265
466
732
131
271
503
734
132
306
506
743
134
311
516
754
277
Notes
278
D
MCS 2000 Features
Conventional Signalling System Features
Features
MDC-1200
Data-Operated Squelch
✔
Radio Check
✔
PTT-ID
Encode
Emergency Alarm
Encode
Voice Selective Call
Encode/
Decode
Emergency Revert
DTMF
DTMF/
Phone
✔
Memory Dial (19
Numbers)
✔
Last Number Dial
✔
19 Access/De-Access Codes
✔
Call Alert
Encode/
Decode
✔
Hot Keypad
Mandown
✔
Immediate/Delayed Access
✔
Live/Buffered Dialing
✔
GE STAR
✔
VRM100 Data Operation
✔
Quik-Call II
✔
Single Tone
✔
Radio Inhibit
✔
Emergency with Voice to
Follow (excluding Type I)
✔
Status/Message
✔
Note: Access to many of these features will be model-dependent.
279
Trunking Signalling System Features
Features
Type I
Type II
Universal ID
✔
Failsoft
✔
✔
PTT-ID
✔
✔
✔
Emergency Alarm Call
Private Call
Encode/Decode
Encode/Decode
Call Alert
Encode/Decode
Encode/Decode
Phone Interconnect
Encode/Decode
Encode/Decode
✔
✔
Hot Keypad
Status/Message
Talkgroup Scan
Encode
✔
✔
Priority Monitor
Subfleet Scan
✔
✔
Mandown
✔
Affiliation
✔
Dynamic Regrouping
✔
Radio Inhibit
✔
AMSS
✔
✔
✔
SmartZone
Group Privacy
✔
✔
Full SMARTNET
✔
✔
VRM100 Data Operation
✔
✔
Voice On Control
✔
✔
Remote Monitor
✔
✔
Emergency with Voice to Follow
✔
✔
Note: Access to many of these features will be model dependent.
280
Radio Wide Features
Features
Type I
Type II
Selectable Keypad Mute
✔
✔
Alert Tones
✔
✔
✔
Block Pending CA/PC
Codeplug Self Test
✔
✔
Rotary Switch Function in Scan
Programming
✔
✔
Short/Long Keypress Duration
✔
✔
Radio-to-Radio Cloning
✔
Time-Out Timer Values
✔
✔
Emergency Silent Alarm
✔
✔
Emergency Channel Delay
✔
✔
Mandown Pre/Post Alert
✔
✔
Button Functions
✔
✔
Switch Functions
✔
✔
Menu Item List Functions
✔
✔
Display Scrolling and Name Size
Option
✔
✔
Display Backlight
✔
✔
Scan List Creation
✔
✔
VRM100 Data Operation
✔
✔
281
Trunking Wide Features
Features
Conventional
Trunking
Telephone Interconnect Half/Full
Duplex
✔
Call Alert/PC Response
✔
ISW Window Adjust
✔
Auto Dial Holdoff
✔
RF Modem
✔
Voice On Control
✔
Conventional Wide Features
Features
282
Conventional
Smart PTT Parameters
✔
Hub Defects PL
✔
Direct Frequency Enabled
✔
Trunking
By-Personality Features
Features
Conventional
Trunking
Mode Name (Assigned on Zone/
Channel screen)
✔
✔
Rx Frequency
✔
Tx Frequency
✔
Rx Squelch Type
✔
Rx Squelch Code
✔
Tx Squelch Type
✔
Tx Squelch Code
✔
Talkaround/Direct
✔
Smart PTT
✔
Choose Scan List
✔
✔
Hot Keypad
✔
✔
Tx Power Level (For Applicable
Bands)
✔
✔
MDC Signaling System
✔
GE STAR Signaling System
✔
Tx Deviation
✔
Phone Operation
(DTMF Timing Parameters)
✔
✔
Auto Scan
✔
✔
Mute/Unmute Options
✔
Choose Time-Out Timer Value
✔
Squelch Fine Tune
✔
Channel Spacing
✔
Pre/De-emphasis
✔
✔
Trunking System
✔
Trunking Individual ID
✔
Failsoft Type
✔
Talk Permit Tone
✔
Call Alert
✔
✔
Private Call
✔
Conversation Type (Message,
Transmission, PTT-ID)
✔
Talkgroups
✔
283
By-Personality Features
Features
284
Conventional
Trunking
Quik-Call II Signalling System
✔
Status
✔
✔
Message
✔
✔
Access Type (Fast/Slow)
✔
20-Channel Synthesized
✔
Emergency Parameters
✔
By-Personality Features
Type I
Trunking
Type II
Trunking
System ID
✔
✔
System Type (I, II, IIi)
✔
✔
Features
Conventional
MDC
✔
System ID Aliasing
Individual ID
✔
✔
✔
Universal ID
✔
Connect Tone
✔
✔
Coverage Type
✔
✔
✔
Affiliation Type
Tx Power
✔
✔
Repeater Offset
✔
✔
Channel Assignment Type
(International / Domestic)
✔
✔
Splinter Channel
✔
✔
Phone DTMF Timing
✔
✔
Hot Keypad DTMF Timing
✔
✔
Status/Message Aliasing
✔
PTT-ID Enable
✔
Sidetone Enable
✔
Radio Check Enable
✔
Emergency Type, Parameters
✔
Emergency Revert, Table
Definition
✔
MDC Timing Parameters
✔
DOS Parameters
✔
Sel Call Reset Parameters
✔
✔
285
Notes
286
Field/Menu Navigation
Key Sequences
E
Below is an alphabetized list of all fields and menus available in the RSS. The
list can be reached on-line in the RSS from any Help screen by pressing F6 (A
to P) or F7 (Q to Z).
Note: The availability of individual fields cataloged in the list depends on
the features ordered with the radio and, in some cases, on specific settings of
other fields in the RSS.
150 Modes (Model I).......................... F8➟F2➟F7
150 Modes (Model I).......................... F8➟F3➟F5
250 Modes (Model II/IIi).................... F8➟F2➟F7
250 Modes (Model II/IIi).................... F8➟F3➟F5
A
A/G F/S FREQ (MHz) .......................... F4➟F4➟F4
A/G Failsoft ........................................ F4➟F4➟F4
ALARM OPTIONS............................... F4➟F3➟F7
ARCHIVE FILES ......................................... F3➟F3
AUXILARY SYSTEMS MENU .............. F4➟F6➟F7
Access Code..................................F4➟F3➟F4➟F8
Access Strapping ................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
Access Type ........................................ F4➟F4➟F3
Access Type ..................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Access Type ..................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
Access Type ........................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
Ack Alert Tone....................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Acknowledge Alert Tone ..............F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Addressing Mode .........................F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Aff. Hold Off (sec) ........................F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Affiliation Type .................................. F4➟F4➟F3
Alarm Rearm Option.......................... F4➟F3➟F7
Alert Tone Vol Offset (db) .................. F4➟F3➟F2
Alert Tones ......................................... F4➟F3➟F2
Alias.................................................... F4➟F4➟F3
Alt Display Time (ms) ........................ F4➟F3➟F6
Announcement Group ...................... F4➟F4➟F4
Archive Filename .........................F3➟F5➟F3➟F7
Archive Filename .........................F3➟F5➟F4➟F7
Archive Filename ............................... F3➟F5➟F7
Archive Filename ............................... F3➟F5➟F8
Archive Filename ...................................... F3➟F7
Archive Path.............................................. F9➟F3
Archive: ..................................................... F3➟F3
Archive: ........................................F3➟F5➟F4➟F7
Archive: ........................................F3➟F5➟F4➟F7
Archive: .............................................. F3➟F5➟F7
Archive:...............................................F3➟F5➟F8
Archive:..................................................... F3➟F7
Auto Access Code Select .............. F4➟F6➟F3➟F8
Auto Dial Holdoff (ms) .......................F4➟F4➟F2
Auto Reset Carr Ovrd................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Auto Reset Duration (sec) ............ F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Auto Reset Time (sec)............ F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Auto Scan..................................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
Auto Scan..................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Auto Sel Call Transmit ................. F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
B
BACKGROUND......................................... F9➟F7
Baud Rate ..................................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Block Pending CA/PC .........................F4➟F3➟F2
Bootstrap Code Path & File ...................... F9➟F3
Busy LED...................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Busy Override Chirp Ack ............. F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Busy Override Delay (sec) ............ F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Button 1 Feature ................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F5
Button 2 Feature ................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F5
Button 3 Feature ................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F5
Button 4 Feature ................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F5
C
CALL LIST TABLE................................F4➟F4➟F5
CALL LIST TABLE......................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F4
CCID Delay Timer ..............................F4➟F3➟F2
CCID Registration........................ F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
CHANGE/VIEW MENU ................................... F4
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
DATA......................................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F6
CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT............... F9➟F3
CONTROL CHANNELS................ F4➟F4➟F3➟F6
CONTROL CHANNELS......... F4➟F4➟F3➟F6➟F6
CONTROLLER BOARD INIT
............................................................... F2➟F9
CONV MESSAGE ALIAS LIST..............F4➟F6➟F8
287
CONV PERS RAC
OPTIONS ............................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
CONV STATUS ALIAS LIST................. F4➟F6➟F9
CONVENTIONAL........................ F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
CONVENTIONAL MENU .......................... F4➟F6
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY ...... F4➟F6➟F3
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY
OPT........................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY
PHN .......................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F8
CONVENTIONAL RADIO
WIDE OPT ....................................... F4➟F6➟F2
CONVENTIONAL SECURE
PERS......................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F6
CREATE DIRECTORY PATH ...................... F6➟F2
CURRENT LIMIT ................................ F2➟F2➟F9
Call Alert Decode ........................ F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
Call Alert Encode ........................ F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
Call Alert Operation........................... F4➟F4➟F4
Call ID ................................................ F4➟F4➟F5
Call ID ......................................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F4
Call ID List ......................................... F4➟F4➟F4
Call List .............................................. F4➟F4➟F5
Call Text ............................................. F4➟F4➟F5
Call Text ...................................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F4
Car Radio Mute ........................... F4➟F3➟F2➟F9
Car Radio Mute Timer (sec) ........ F4➟F3➟F2➟F9
Carrier Detect Required............... F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
Chan................................................... F4➟F4➟F3
Channel.............................................. F4➟F3➟F2
Channel.............................................. F4➟F3➟F5
Channel....................................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Channel....................................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Channel Assgn. Type .................. F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Channel Bandwidth.................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Channel Change ID ........................... F4➟F3➟F2
Channel Delay (sec) .................... F4➟F3➟F2➟F7
Channel Grant Polarity............... F4➟F3➟F2➟F5
Channel Spacing ................................ F2➟F2➟F6
Channel Spacing ......................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Channel Text Size............................... F4➟F3➟F6
Chn..................................................... F4➟F3➟F5
Coast Time (ms) ....................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Coast Time (ms) .......................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Code ............................................ F4➟F6➟F2➟F2
Code ................................................... F4➟F6➟F3
Codeplug Self Test .............................. F4➟F3➟F2
Connect Tone (Hz) ............................. F4➟F4➟F3
Console Ack Required ................. F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Control Channel ......................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F6
Control Station Equipped .................. F4➟F3➟F2
CONTOLLER BOARD
INITIALIZATION PROGRAM ................. F2➟F9
Conv Item ................................... F4➟F3➟F4➟F4
Conventional Operation.................... F8➟F2➟F7
Conventional Operation.................... F8➟F3➟F5
Conversation Type ............................. F4➟F4➟F3
288
Conversation Type ...................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
Coverage Type .................................... F4➟F4➟F3
Current Archive......................................... F6➟F5
Current FLASHcode................................... F8➟F3
Current FLASHcode............................ F8➟F3➟F5
Current FLASHcode..................... F8➟F3➟F5➟F9
D
DEFAULT RSSI .................................... F2➟F3➟F7
DEK BUTTON CONFIGURATIONF4➟F3➟F3➟F5
DELETE ARCHIVE FILE ............................. F6➟F5
DIALING OPTIONS ..................... F4➟F3➟F4➟F9
DOS ............................................. F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
DOS (Data Squelch)...............F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
DPL Invert ................................... F4➟F6➟F2➟F2
DPL Invert .......................................... F4➟F6➟F3
DTMF ACCESS/DEACCESS
CODES...................................... F4➟F3➟F4➟F8
DTMF Access Timing Table ......... F4➟F6➟F3➟F8
DTMF Digit Hangtime (ms) ........ F4➟F3➟F4➟F9
DTMF Pause Time (ms) ............... F4➟F3➟F4➟F9
DTMF TRANSMIT DEVIATION .......... F2➟F4➟F2
Data Mode Request Polarity........ F4➟F3➟F2➟F5
Data On Failsoft .......................... F4➟F3➟F2➟F5
Data Overrides Voice................... F4➟F3➟F2➟F5
Deaccess Code ............................. F4➟F3➟F4➟F8
Decoder 1 Call Type .................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Decoder 2 Call Type .................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Decoder Option........................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Designated Tx Mem ........................... F4➟F3➟F5
Detections Required ..............F4➟F6➟F7➟F4➟F9
Digit Duration (ms)..................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Digit Duration (msec) ................. F4➟F6➟F3➟F8
Direct Mode................................. F4➟F3➟F2➟F9
Direct/Talkaround .............................. F4➟F6➟F3
Direct Frequency Enabled .................. F4➟F6➟F2
Directory Contents ................................... F8➟F8
Disconnect On Data.................... F4➟F3➟F2➟F5
Display Site Trunking .................. F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Duplex Phone.............................. F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
Dynamic Priority................................ F4➟F3➟F5
Dynamic Regrouping ......................... F4➟F4➟F3
E
EMERGENCY DATA CONFIG ..... F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
ENHANCEMENT OPTIONS................ F8➟F2➟F7
ENVIRONMENT .......................... F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Echo Mute Time (ms).................. F4➟F6➟F3➟F6
Emer Limited Patience (sec) ..F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Emer PTT-ID Sidetone ................. F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Emer Prio Tx Inhibit .............F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Emerg. PTT-ID .................................... F4➟F6➟F3
Emerg. Steering Channel ............ F4➟F3➟F2➟F9
Emerg. Steering Zone .................. F4➟F3➟F2➟F9
Emergency................................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Emergency Alarm ........................ F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Emergency Alarm ....................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Emergency Call ............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Emergency Hot Mic .....................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Emergency Power Up...................F4➟F3➟F2➟F7
Emergency Receive ............................ F4➟F3➟F6
Emergency Type...........................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Ext Alarm Delay (sec)......................... F4➟F3➟F7
Ext Radio Ignition........................F4➟F3➟F9➟F2
F
F/S Freq (MHz) ................................... F4➟F4➟F4
F/S Frequency...............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
F/W F/S Freq (MHz) ........................... F4➟F4➟F4
F/W Failsoft........................................ F4➟F4➟F4
FILE MAINTENANCE MENU ........................... F6
FLASH Software Path ................................ F9➟F3
FLASHKEY CONFIGURATION .................. F8➟F3
FLASHcode ................................................ F2➟F9
FLASHcode ................................................ F8➟F2
FLASHcode ......................................... F8➟F3➟F5
FLASHport UPGRADE MENU .......................... F8
FRAME....................................................... F9➟F7
FRONT END FILTER ........................... F2➟F3➟F2
Failsoft..........................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
Failsoft Hold Time (sec) ...............F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
Failsoft Inactivity (sec).................F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Failsoft Type ....................................... F4➟F4➟F4
Fast Scroll Rate (ms) ........................... F4➟F3➟F6
FileName ................................................... F6➟F5
Filter Constant K1........................F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Filter Constant K2........................F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Filter Constant K3........................F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Filter Threshold Con T1...............F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Filter Threshold Con T2...............F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Filter Threshold Con T3...............F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Fleet ID............................................... F4➟F4➟F3
Fleet ID............................................... F4➟F4➟F4
Flt/ATG...................................................... F3➟F5
Frequency.....................................F4➟F4➟F3➟F6
Frequency.....................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F6
Frequency (MHz) ............................... F4➟F6➟F3
Full Spectrum CC Scan ................F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Full Spectrum CC Scan Timer......F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
G
GE STAR SYSTEM .........................F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
GE STAR System ................................. F4➟F6➟F3
GE Star Signaling ............................... F8➟F2➟F7
GE Star Signaling ............................... F8➟F3➟F5
GET/SAVE/PROGRAM MENU.......................... F3
Global Tx Multiplier ............. F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
H
HIGHLIGHT .............................................. F9➟F7
HUB Suspends Scan .....................F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
HearClear .....................................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
HearClear ........................................... F2➟F3➟F3
HearClear .....................................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
HiLo Airhorn Tones .....................F4➟F3➟F9➟F2
High Pwr ............................................ F2➟F2➟F3
Home Mode Selection........................ F4➟F3➟F2
Horn & Light Duration ...................... F4➟F3➟F7
Horn And Lights ................................ F4➟F3➟F7
Hot DTMF Timing........................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Hot Keypad ........................................ F4➟F6➟F3
Hot Keypad (DTMF) ........................... F4➟F4➟F4
Hub Defeats PL................................... F4➟F6➟F2
I
ID............................................................... F3➟F5
ISW Window Adjust........................... F4➟F4➟F2
Ignition Switch.............................F4➟F3➟F3➟F3
Ignore Data Display .....................F4➟F3➟F2➟F5
Ignore Site Resource Pref.......F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F6
Impolite Retries .....................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Impolite Retries ............................F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Individual ID...................................... F4➟F4➟F3
Individual ID...................................... F4➟F4➟F4
Indv ID ...................................................... F3➟F5
Initial Delay (ms) .........................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Initial Delay (msec) ......................F4➟F6➟F3➟F8
Initial Squelch Type .....................F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Integer Delay (msec) ....................F4➟F6➟F3➟F8
Inter-Digit Delay (ms) .................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Inter-Packet Time (ms)..........F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Inter-Tone Duration (sec)......F4➟F6➟F7➟F4➟F9
L
Last Programmed .........................F3➟F5➟F3➟F7
Last Programmed .........................F3➟F5➟F4➟F7
Last Programmed ............................... F3➟F5➟F7
Last Programmed ............................... F3➟F5➟F8
Last Programmed ...................................... F3➟F7
Leading PTT-ID.............................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Limited Patience (sec) ...........F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Long Press/Emer Duration (ms)......... F4➟F3➟F2
Long Tone Duration (sec) ............F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Low Pwr.............................................. F2➟F2➟F3
M
MDC CONFIGURATION MENU ........ F4➟F6➟F4
MDC DATA CLONING.............................. F3➟F5
MDC DATA CLONING....................... F3➟F5➟F3
MDC DATA CLONING....................... F3➟F5➟F4
MDC Hot Mic Emergency.....F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F7
MDC Hot Mic Tx
Period (sec).........................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F7
MDC REPEATER ID ......................F4➟F6➟F4➟F5
MDC SYSTEM OPTIONS .......F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
MDC SYSTEMS .............................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
MDC Sel. Radio Inhibit...................... F8➟F2➟F7
MDC System ................................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
MDC System .........................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F7
MDC System .........................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
MDC System ...................................... F4➟F6➟F3
289
MDC Unlimited Calling.............. F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
MERGE FORM ........................................... F3➟F4
MESSAGE TEXT......................................... F9➟F7
MONITOR TYPE ........................................ F9➟F7
MORE EMERGENCY OPTIONSF4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F7
MORE RADIO WIDE OPTIONS.......... F4➟F3➟F9
MPL LIST CONFIGURATION ...... F4➟F6➟F2➟F2
MPL Name................................... F4➟F6➟F2➟F2
MPL Number ............................... F4➟F6➟F2➟F2
Man Acc Live Dialing......................... F4➟F3➟F4
Mandatory Password.......................... F4➟F3➟F6
Manual Tone ............................... F4➟F3➟F9➟F2
Max Password Length ........................ F4➟F3➟F6
Maximum Channels (Talkgroups) ..... F4➟F3➟F2
Memory .............................................. F4➟F3➟F5
Memory Optimization .............................. F9➟F3
Message .............................................. F4➟F4➟F4
Message ....................................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Message Alias Number ..........F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F7
Message Alias Number ....................... F4➟F6➟F8
Message Alias Text.................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F7
Message Alias Text.............................. F4➟F6➟F8
Message Aliasing ......................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Mic AGC...................................... F4➟F3➟F2➟F9
Min Alert Tone Volume...................... F4➟F3➟F2
Model Number .......................................... F2➟F9
Model Number ............................ F3➟F5➟F3➟F7
Model Number ............................ F3➟F5➟F4➟F7
Model Number ................................... F3➟F5➟F7
Model Number ................................... F3➟F5➟F8
Model Number .......................................... F3➟F7
Model Number .......................................... F3➟F9
Model Number .......................................... F8➟F3
Monitor Hold Time (sec)............. F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
Monitor w Sil Emer ..................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Motorcycle Radio ........................ F4➟F3➟F2➟F9
N
NEW TRUNKING IDS................................ F3➟F5
Native Language................................. F4➟F3➟F6
New FLASHcode ........................................ F8➟F3
New FLASHcode ................................. F8➟F3➟F5
New FLASHcode .......................... F8➟F3➟F5➟F9
New Path Name ........................................ F6➟F2
Non-XL Scan Unsquelch
Duration (ms)........................... F4➟F3➟F2➟F6
NonPriority Members ........................ F4➟F3➟F5
Nuisance Mode Delete ................ F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
Number of DEK boxes................. F4➟F3➟F3➟F5
O
ONE TOUCH BUTTON
OPTIONS ............................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F5
Observ Window Due (cycles) F4➟F6➟F7➟F4➟F9
Operation ........................................... F4➟F4➟F4
Operation ..............................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Options Audio Muting................ F4➟F3➟F9➟F2
290
Out Of Range...................................... F4➟F3➟F2
Override Timer (ms) .................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
P
PA Ignition Sense......................... F4➟F3➟F9➟F2
PERSONALITY MDC
OPTIONS .................................. F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
PHONE CONFIGURATION ................ F4➟F3➟F4
POPUP BACKGROUND.............................F9➟F7
PRINT MENU................................................... F5
PROGRAM RADIO
CODEPLUG .............................. F3➟F5➟F3➟F8
PROGRAM RADIO
CODEPLUG .............................. F3➟F5➟F4➟F8
PROGRAM RADIO CODEPLUG ......... F3➟F5➟F8
PROGRAM RADIO CODEPLUG ................F3➟F8
PROGRAMMING HISTORY .......................F3➟F9
PTT Code Type ......................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
PTT DTMF Code ....................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
PTT-ID................................................. F4➟F6➟F3
PTT-ID Sidetone........................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
PTT-ID Type ................................. F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
PTT MDC Repeater ID ...........F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
PTT Sidetone................................ F4➟F6➟F7➟F2
PTT Singletone (Hz)...............F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
PTT-ID Sidetone........................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Password ............................................. F4➟F3➟F6
Periodic Keyfail Alert Tone.......... F4➟F3➟F2➟F6
Permanent Horn & Lights.................. F4➟F3➟F7
Pers ............................................................F3➟F5
Personality.......................................... F4➟F4➟F4
Personality................................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F6
Personality................................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
Personality................................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
Personality.......................................... F4➟F6➟F3
Personality................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F6
Personality................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
Personality................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F8
Personality................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Personality.............................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
Phone DTMF Timing................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Phone Dialing.............................. F4➟F3➟F4➟F9
Phone Interconnect............................ F4➟F4➟F4
Phone Num Display Format............... F4➟F3➟F4
Phone Number ................................... F4➟F3➟F4
Phone Operation ................................ F4➟F6➟F3
Phone Text.......................................... F4➟F3➟F4
Polite Retries..........................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Preamble During Pretime ......F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Preambles ..............................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Prefer Status...........................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F6
Pretime (ms) ..........................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Pretime Duration (ms) ................ F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Primary ID .................................................F3➟F5
Primary ID .......................................... F3➟F5➟F3
Primary ID .......................................... F3➟F5➟F4
Primary ID ................................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Priority 1 Member.............................. F4➟F3➟F5
Priority 1 Type ................................... F4➟F3➟F5
Priority 2 Member.............................. F4➟F3➟F5
Priority 2 Type ................................... F4➟F3➟F5
Priority Chan Marking.................F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
Priority Scan Alert ........................F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
Private Call Type ................................ F4➟F4➟F4
Private Call Type ................................ F4➟F4➟F4
Program Source ...........................F3➟F5➟F3➟F7
Program Source ...........................F3➟F5➟F4➟F7
Program Source .................................. F3➟F5➟F7
Program Source .................................. F3➟F5➟F8
Program Source ......................................... F3➟F7
Program Source ......................................... F3➟F9
Programmed Date ..................................... F3➟F9
Proper Code Detect ......................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
Proper Code Detect ......................F4➟F6➟F3➟F6
Protocol Type ..................................... F4➟F4➟F4
Protocol Type ...............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Public Address ..............................F4➟F3➟F9➟F2
Q
QUIK-CALL II SYSTEM.................F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
QUIK-CALL II SYSTEM
OPTIONS..................................F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Quick-Call II/SingleTone.................... F8➟F2➟F7
Quick-Call II/SingleTone.................... F8➟F3➟F5
Quick Key Override......................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Quik-Call II System ............................ F4➟F6➟F3
R
RAB 1 Code Type .................. F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
RAB 1 DTMF Code ................ F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
RAB 1 MDC Repeater ID ....... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
RAB 1 Singletone (Hz)........... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
RAB 2 Code Type .................. F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
RAB 2 DTMF Code ................ F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
RAB 2 MDC Repeater ID ....... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
RAB 2 Singletone (Hz)........... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
RAB Sidetone................................F4➟F6➟F7➟F2
RADIO WIDE ...............................F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION ............. F4➟F3
RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS...... F4➟F3➟F6
RADIO WIDE EMERGENCY
OPTIONS...................................F4➟F3➟F2➟F7
RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIG..... F4➟F3➟F3
RADIO WIDE MENU ITEM
CONFIG ....................................F4➟F3➟F3➟F4
RADIO WIDE OPTIONS..................... F4➟F3➟F2
RADIO WIDE OPTIONS...............F4➟F3➟F2➟F9
RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS...... F4➟F3➟F6
RADIO WIDE SECURE
OPTIONS...................................F4➟F3➟F2➟F6
RADIO WIDE SWITCH
CONFIG ....................................F4➟F3➟F3➟F3
RATED AUDIO ................................... F2➟F3➟F3
READ RADIO CODEPLUG ........................ F3➟F2
RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU................ F2➟F3
REFERENCE OSCILLATOR ................. F2➟F2➟F2
RF Modem .......................................... F4➟F4➟F2
RIB ............................................................. F9➟F3
RM Base Time (sec) ............................ F4➟F4➟F3
RSSI..................................................... F2➟F3➟F7
RSSI Acceptable Threshold...........F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
RSSI Acceptable Threshold...........F4➟F4➟F2➟F3
RSSI Excellent Threshold .............F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
RSSI Good Threshold ...................F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
RSSI OSW Counter .......................F4➟F4➟F2➟F2
Radio Check .................................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Radio Cloning .................................... F4➟F3➟F2
Radio Codeplug Version ........................... F3➟F9
Radio ID .......................................F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Radio Inhibit ................................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Radio Software Version ............................. F3➟F9
Receive ............................................... F4➟F6➟F3
Receive Only ...................................... F4➟F6➟F3
Remote Monitor................................. F4➟F4➟F3
Repeater Access .....................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
Repeater ID...................................F4➟F6➟F4➟F5
Required FLASH software.......................... F8➟F3
Reset Type ....................................F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Retry Counter...............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Reverse Burst TOC........................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Revert ................................................. F4➟F6➟F3
Revert Announcement Group .....F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Revert Fleet ID..............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Revert Individual ID.....................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Revert PTT-ID ...............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Revert Size Code...........................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Revert Subfleet..............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Revert Talkgroup ..........................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Rotary Alert ........................................ F4➟F3➟F2
Rx Channel Ranges (MHz)...........F4➟F4➟F3➟F6
Rx Emphasis .................................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Rx F/S Freq (MHz) .............................. F4➟F4➟F4
Rx Freq ..................................F4➟F4➟F3➟F6➟F6
Rx Freq .........................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F6
Rx Freq .........................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
Rx Hold Time (sec) .......................F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
Rx Modulation .............................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Rx Modulation .............................F4➟F6➟F3➟F6
Rx Unmute Delay (ms) ................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
S
S/N............................................................. F3➟F4
SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO
ARCHIVE...................................F3➟F5➟F3➟F7
SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO
ARCHIVE...................................F3➟F5➟F4➟F7
SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO
ARCHIVE......................................... F3➟F5➟F7
SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO
ARCHIVE......................................... F3➟F5➟F8
291
SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO
ARCHIVE ................................................ F3➟F7
SCAN LIST .......................................... F4➟F3➟F5
SCAN OPTIONS........................... F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
SCREEN COLORS ...................................... F9➟F7
SECURE RECEIVE
DISCRIMINATOR ............................ F2➟F3➟F8
SECURE TRANSMIT DEVIATION....... F2➟F2➟F8
SELECTED TEXT........................................ F9➟F7
SERVICE MENU................................................F2
SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION .........F9
SIGNALING ALIGNMENT MENU............. F2➟F4
SINGLETONE LIST ...................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F3
SINGLETONE SYSTEM ................ F4➟F6➟F7➟F2
SIREN AND PA OPTIONS ............ F4➟F3➟F9➟F2
SMART ZONE PREFERRED
SITES...................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F6
SMARTNET Operation ....................... F8➟F2➟F7
SMARTNET Operation ....................... F8➟F3➟F5
SMARTNET Type I ..............................F8➟F2➟F7
SMARTNET Type I ....................... F8➟F3➟F5➟F9
SQUELCH (12.5 kHz) ......................... F2➟F3➟F4
SQUELCH (20 kHz) ............................ F2➟F3➟F5
SQUELCH (25/30 kHz) ....................... F2➟F3➟F6
SRIB Software Path & FileName ................ F9➟F3
STATUS TEXT ............................................ F9➟F7
SUBFLEETS .................................. F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
Save Dim State.................................... F4➟F3➟F6
Scan Holdoff Strapping ............... F4➟F6➟F3➟F6
Scan List ............................................. F4➟F3➟F5
Scan List ............................................. F4➟F4➟F4
Scan List ............................................. F4➟F6➟F3
Scan Select ................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F6
Scan Type ........................................... F4➟F3➟F5
Secondary ID ............................................. F3➟F5
Secondary ID ...................................... F3➟F5➟F3
Secondary ID ...................................... F3➟F5➟F4
Secondary ID ............................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Secure Equipped ................................. F4➟F3➟F2
Secure Punch Thru ...................... F4➟F3➟F2➟F6
Secure/Clear Strapping................ F4➟F6➟F3➟F6
Sel Call Reset .........................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Selectable Keypad Mute ..................... F4➟F3➟F2
Selective Call Decode .................. F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
Selective Call Encode .................. F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
Self Test Alert Tone............................. F4➟F3➟F2
Serial Number............................................ F2➟F9
Serial Number............................................ F3➟F5
Serial Number..................................... F3➟F5➟F3
Serial Number.............................. F3➟F5➟F3➟F7
Serial Number..................................... F3➟F5➟F4
Serial Number.............................. F3➟F5➟F4➟F7
Serial Number..................................... F3➟F5➟F7
Serial Number..................................... F3➟F5➟F8
Serial Number............................................ F3➟F7
Serial Number............................................ F3➟F9
Signalling............................................ F4➟F6➟F3
292
Signalling Muting Type ............... F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
Silent Alarm................................. F4➟F3➟F2➟F7
Silent Mode Change........................... F4➟F3➟F2
Siren Ignition Sense..................... F4➟F3➟F9➟F2
Site Alias Number ..................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F8
Site Alias Text ........................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F8
Site Aliasing ................................. F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Site ID ................................................. F4➟F4➟F3
Site ID ....................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F6
Size Code ............................................ F4➟F4➟F3
Size Code ............................................ F4➟F4➟F4
Slow Scroll Count............................... F4➟F3➟F6
Slow Scroll Rate (ms) .......................... F4➟F3➟F6
Smart PTT .................................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Smart PTT Quick Key Timer ............... F4➟F6➟F2
Smart PTT Retry Timer (ms) ............... F4➟F6➟F2
Smartzone Operation ......................... F8➟F2➟F7
Smartzone Operation ......................... F8➟F3➟F5
Software Option ........................................F3➟F9
Software Path.............................................F8➟F8
Spacing ........................................ F4➟F4➟F3➟F6
Speaker Unmute On Data ........... F4➟F3➟F2➟F5
Speed Optimization...................................F9➟F3
Splinter Channel ......................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Squelch (Fine Tune)..................... F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Squelch Type ............................... F4➟F6➟F2➟F2
Squelch Type ...................................... F4➟F6➟F3
Startsite Operation ............................. F8➟F2➟F7
Startsite Operation ............................. F8➟F3➟F5
Stat Alert Decode Feature ................... F8➟F2➟F7
Stat Alert Decode Feature ............ F8➟F3➟F5➟F9
Stat Alert Encode Feature ................... F8➟F2➟F7
Stat Alert Encode Feature ............ F8➟F3➟F5➟F9
Status ........................................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F6
Status .................................................. F4➟F4➟F4
Status ........................................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F6
Status ........................................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Status Alias Number ..............F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F6
Status Alias Number ........................... F4➟F6➟F9
Status Alias Text.....................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F6
Status Alias Text.................................. F4➟F6➟F9
Status Aliasing ............................. F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Status Request.............................. F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Std. Audio ........................................... F2➟F3➟F3
Strapping ............................................ F4➟F4➟F4
Strapping ..................................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
Strapping ..................................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Subfleet ........................................ F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
Subflt ........................................... F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
Supervisor Pool ID.............................. F4➟F4➟F4
Suspend All Scan ......................... F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
Switch Labels ............................... F4➟F3➟F3➟F3
Sys..............................................................F3➟F5
Sys....................................................... F3➟F5➟F3
Sys....................................................... F3➟F5➟F4
System ................................................ F4➟F4➟F3
System ......................................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F6
System ................................... F4➟F4➟F3➟F6➟F6
System ..........................................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
System ..........................................F4➟F6➟F7➟F2
System ..........................................F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
System ................................... F4➟F6➟F7➟F4➟F9
System ..........................................F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
System ID ........................................... F4➟F4➟F3
System Key ................................................ F3➟F5
System Key ......................................... F4➟F4➟F3
System Key ................................................ F9➟F3
System Package ......................................... F8➟F2
System Package .................................. F8➟F3➟F5
System Pretime (ms) ............. F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
System Search Time (sec) .............F4➟F3➟F5➟F8
System Signalling Type ................F4➟F6➟F7➟F4
System Type ....................................... F4➟F4➟F3
System Type I II/IIi.................................... F3➟F5
System Version................................... F8➟F3➟F5
System ID ........................................... F4➟F4➟F4
T
TCMS Path ................................................ F9➟F3
TCMS Path ................................................ F3➟F4
TRANSMIT DEVIATION BALANCE.... F2➟F2➟F4
TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT .......... F2➟F2➟F5
TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT .......... F2➟F2➟F6
TRANSMIT POWER............................ F2➟F2➟F3
TRANSMIT SIGNALING: HIGH ......... F2➟F4➟F3
TRANSMIT SIGNALING:
MDC-1200 ...................................... F2➟F4➟F4
TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU ........ F2➟F2
TRUNKING MENU.................................... F4➟F4
TRUNKING MESSAGE
ALIAS.................................. F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F7
TRUNKING PERSONALITY ................ F4➟F4➟F4
TRUNKING PERSONALITY
OPTIONS...................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
TRUNKING RADIO WIDE
OPTIONS......................................... F4➟F4➟F2
TRUNKING SITE ALIAS......... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F8
TRUNKING STATUS ALIAS ... F4➟F4➟F3➟F9➟F6
TRUNKING SUBFLEETS ...............F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
TRUNKING SYSTEM .......................... F4➟F4➟F3
TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS....F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
TRUNKING TALKGROUPS...........F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
Tactical .........................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Talk Permit Tone ................................ F4➟F4➟F4
Talk Permit Tone ..........................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
Telephone Interconnect..................... F4➟F4➟F2
Temp Msg Display Time (ms) ............ F4➟F3➟F6
Text Justification ................................ F4➟F3➟F6
This Call ID ........................................ F4➟F4➟F3
This Call ID (PC I).............................. F4➟F4➟F4
This Call ID (PC II)............................. F4➟F4➟F4
Time-Out Timer ................................. F4➟F4➟F4
Time-Out Timer ................................. F4➟F6➟F3
Time-Out Timer Table (sec)..........F4➟F3➟F2➟F9
Tlk Grp .........................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F7
Tone (Hz)......................................F4➟F6➟F7➟F3
Tone Signalling System .........F4➟F6➟F3➟F9➟F7
Trailing PTT-ID .............................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Transmit Enable Polarity..............F4➟F3➟F2➟F5
Trk One Touch Button ....................... F8➟F2➟F7
Trk One Touch Button ....................... F8➟F3➟F5
Trunk Remote Monitor ...................... F8➟F2➟F7
Trunk Remote Monitor ................F8➟F3➟F5➟F9
Trunk Item ...................................F4➟F3➟F3➟F4
Trunk Repeater Offset ..................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
Trunking System ID ........................... F4➟F3➟F5
Trunking System Type........................ F4➟F3➟F5
Twenty Channel Synthesized ......F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
Tx Channel Ranges (MHz) ...........F4➟F4➟F3➟F6
Tx Clear Alert Tones.....................F4➟F3➟F2➟F6
Tx Defeat ............................................ F4➟F4➟F3
Tx Deviation ................................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Tx Deviation T/A..........................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Tx Emphasis .................................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Tx F/S Freq (MHz) .............................. F4➟F4➟F4
Tx Freq ..................................F4➟F4➟F3➟F6➟F6
Tx Freq .........................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F6
Tx Inhibit On Busy ......................F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
Tx Multiplier .........................F4➟F6➟F4➟F3➟F9
Tx Period (sec)..............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F8
Tx Power Level .............................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Tx Power Select ............................F4➟F4➟F3➟F9
U
UNIVERSAL ID ................................... F4➟F4➟F3
Unmute Hold-Off (ms) ................F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Unmute Type ...............................F4➟F6➟F3➟F7
Unmute/Mute Type .....................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
Upgrades Purchased .................................. F8➟F3
Upgrading Radio Block ...................... F8➟F8➟F8
User-Selectable PL (MPL) .............F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
V
VOC Activation Time (ms) ..........F4➟F4➟F2➟F3
VOC Capable................................F4➟F4➟F2➟F3
VOC OPTIONS .............................F4➟F4➟F2➟F3
VOC Pended Emer Time (ms) ......F4➟F4➟F2➟F3
VOC Site Lock Time (sec).............F4➟F4➟F2➟F3
VRM100 .......................................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
VRM100 .......................................F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
VRM100 Capable ............................... F4➟F3➟F2
VRM100 Fleet ........................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F7
VRM100 High Speed Data ...........F4➟F6➟F3➟F9
VRM100 OPTIONS .......................F4➟F3➟F2➟F5
VRM100 Pager ID..................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F7
VRM100 Size Code................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F7
VRM100 SubFleet ..................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F7
VRM100 TRUNK
OPTIONS ............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F7
VRM100 Talk Group .............F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F7
VRM500 ............................................. F8➟F2➟F7
293
VRM500....................................... F8➟F3➟F5➟F9
VRM500 Capable................................ F4➟F3➟F2
VRM500 Deaffiliation ...........F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F7
VRM500 Pager
Individual ID ......................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F7
VRM500 Rx DISCRIMINATOR
LEVEL .............................................. F2➟F3➟F9
VRM500 TRUNK
OPTIONS ............................F4➟F4➟F4➟F9➟F7
VSP .............................................. F4➟F4➟F4➟F9
Variable ID................................................. F3➟F5
Variable ID.......................................... F3➟F5➟F3
Variable ID.......................................... F3➟F5➟F4
Variable ID................................... F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
W
WAC AMSS FAILSOFT ................. F4➟F4➟F4➟F6
X
XL IC Present .............................. F4➟F3➟F2➟F6
XL Scan Unsquelch Duration
(ms) .......................................... F4➟F3➟F2➟F6
XL Transmit................................. F4➟F6➟F3➟F6
Z
ZONE TALKGROUP (CHANNEL) .............. F4➟F8
Zn ....................................................... F4➟F3➟F5
Zone.................................................... F4➟F3➟F2
Zone.................................................... F4➟F3➟F5
Zone.................................................... F4➟F4➟F3
Zone............................................. F4➟F6➟F4➟F3
Zone............................................. F4➟F6➟F7➟F5
Zone Name ................................................ F4➟F8
Zone Number ............................................ F4➟F8
Zone Text Size .................................... F4➟F3➟F6
294
295
Name
Channel
Zone
Scan List
Interconnect
Call Alert
Private Call
Talk Permit
Power Level
Connect Tone
Individual ID
Talkgroups
System
Feature
Name
Pers
1
Pers
2
Pers
3
Pers
4
Pers
5
Pers
6
Pers
7
Pers
8
Pers
9
Trunked Radio Personality Chart
Pers
10
Pers
11
Pers
12
Pers
13
Pers
14
Pers
15
Pers
16
F
Notes
296
297
Feature
Name
Mode
1
#_____
Mode
2
#_____
Mode
3
#_____
Mode
4
#_____
Mode
5
#_____
Mode
6
#_____
Mode
7
#_____
Mode
8
#_____
Mode
9
#_____
Mode
10
#_____
Mode
11
#_____
Conventional Radio Personality Chart
Mode
12
#_____
Mode
13
#_____
Mode
14
#_____
Mode
15
#_____
Mode
16
#_____
G
Notes
298
?
Glossary
Active Channel
A channel in which the radio is receiving or transmitting a signal.
Adjustment
A means of tuning a radio parameter to a specified value.
Alignment
A means of adjusting any parameter that can be tuned to obtain
optimum product performance.
ANI
Automatic Number Identification. Used for access/release codes that
are frequently used for system management and billing purposes. ANI
numbers can be programmed by the RSS and cannot be changed in the
field.
Announcement Group
Grouping structure used in a Type II or Type IIi Trunking system. An
Announcement Group is a large group of radio users who, under
normal circumstances, coordinate actions amongst themselves.
Antenna Connector
The UHF/VHF RF coax connector located on the top of the radio and
used to connect the antenna to the radio.
Archive File
The contents of the radio’s codeplug. A computer file that contains the
personality data of a radio. It is standard practice to name archive files
according to the radio serial numbers that they relate to.
Archive File Cloning
The procedure of merging data from two codeplugs to copy a customer
personality from one radio to another. In the case of archive file
cloning, the source of the factory data is an archive file and the source
of the tuning data is the target radio.
Asynchronous Communication
A method of data communication in which information is transmitted
one character at a time with no specific starting time. Each character
is preceded by a start bit and followed by one or more stop bits.
Auto-Affiliation
The ability of radios in a Type II or Type IIi system to automatically
transmit their talkgroup and unit ID information to the Central
Controller. Affiliation occurs after the radio has locked on to the
control channel frequency. It does not require that the radio user press
PTT.
Automatic Retry
The ability of a Portable radio to send up to 16 in-bound signalling
words in a four-second period provided the out-bound signalling word
is not received from the Central Controller after the radio has made a
request to transmit.
Back-up File
A duplicate file of the archive file that can be used if the original
archive file becomes damaged or erased.
299
Base Station Identifier (BSI)
An identifier which is programmed into the Central Controller and
sent out in Morse code ID on the lowest frequency Trunked repeater.
Blank Frequency
A channel that is not assigned a transmit frequency.
Blank PL Code
A channel that is not assigned a receive or transmit PL code.
Busy Channel Lockout (BCL)
A feature on Conventional modes that gives “listening privacy”. The
radio will not key when there is a carrier on channel unless it is the
user’s PL/DPL group. Instead, the user will hear a busy tone while PTT
is held. In addition, the user will not be allowed to monitor the
channel. If all the users who share the channel have BCL enabled, they
have privacy similar to that provided by a Trunked radio system.
Call Alert (CA)
A Stat-Alert signalling feature that is similar to a tone-only or a toneand-voice pager. The “page” can leave a persisting indication on the
target radio. A Call Alert stops the channel scan until the alert is
cleared.
Call Light
A visual indicator that flashes when transmission is received.
Call List
A list of IDs from one or more signalling formats that is used to send a
message to individual groups.
Carrier
A term that represents any channel activity.
Carrier Squelch
A radio receive mode of operation that uses receiver squelch as the
only method of muting the speaker.
Channel
A single path, separated by frequency or time divisions, for
transmitting electrical signals. A receive (one-way) or receive-andtransmit (two-way) frequency path.
Cloning
An RSS function which allows quick duplication programming of a
radio’s codeplug data to many radios. Electronic tuning/alignment
information is the only data not copied.
Cloning Cable
A radio-to-radio connector cable used to program one radio’s
personality into another radio.
Codeplug
The contents of the radio’s EEPROM that determine the radio’s
personality. This personality information consists of system ID, Unit
ID and Fleet/Subfleet/Talkgroup information, as well as the control
channel information. The codeplug contains all the features and
options stored in the codeplug.
COMport
The logical name of the serial port available on personal computers.
They may be COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.
Communications Port
See “COMport”.
Connect Tone
A tone generated by the radio over the voice channel to the Trunked
Repeater. Connect tone is used as a signal to the Central Controller
that a specific voice channel has been assigned. There are eight
different connect tones available: 76.60 Hz, 83.72 Hz, 90.00 Hz, 105.88
Hz, 116.13 Hz, 128.57 Hz and 138.46 Hz.
300
Continuous Assignment
The ability of the Motorola Trunked system to ensure that a radio just
coming into service will be sent to the appropriate voice channel to
join the rest of the Fleet, Subfleet or Talkgroup. Once a group has been
assigned a voice channel, the control channel will continue to
transmit the voice channel information for that call for the duration
of the call.
Control Channel
One of the four highest frequencies in a Trunking system that is used
to provide a continuous two-way communications path between
Central Controller and all radios on the system.
CSQ
See “Carrier Squelch”.
Data Operated Squelch (DOS)
If enabled, DOS will detect an incoming packet of the same signalling
scheme as the radio and squelch the audio for the duration of the
packet. A small blip of data will be heard but most of the packet will
not be heard.
Defaults
Standard settings that the RSS uses for input/output (I/O) port
locations, file locations and display settings. Also, the values a field
will automatically contain if a user does not specifically change it.
Default Drive
The disk or diskette drive that the RSS will use to get or save data or
files. You can change the default drive from the SERVICE SOFTWARE
CONFIGURATION MENU (F9).
DOS
See “Data Operated Squelch”.
DPL
A continuous sub-audible data signal that is transmitted along with a
carrier. A radio that has DPL on the receive frequency will require both
the presence of carrier and the correct DPL code before it will unmute.
In addition, if there is DPL on the transmit frequency, the DPL code
will be continuously relayed during transmissions made on that
channel.
DTMF
Acronym for Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. DTMF is a signalling system
used by the telephone system.
EEPROM
Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Used by the
radio microcomputer system to store the radio’s codeplug data
(personality).
Emergency Alarm
A feature that triggers an alarm output on a console when an
emergency signalling message is received.
Encoder Features
Features relating to the transmit (or encode) portion of a signalling
system(s).
Failsoft
In the event that the Central Controller should fail, the radios in the
system will enter a “Conventional” pre-assigned failsoft channel. Each
Trunked repeater in the system will key and transmit a data word
informing every radio in the system that the system has gone into the
failsoft mode and communication will act as a Conventional radio
repeater.
Field Choices
A set of direct-entry values (or values that can be scrolled) from which
the user may select to populate a field (feature) on an RSS screen.
301
Fleet
A grouping structure used in Type I Trunking. A fleet is a group of radio
users with a common functional responsibility who, under normal
circumstances, coordinate actions among themselves.
Fleet Mapping
The process of identifying who needs to talk to whom and how
individual radio users should be grouped. The fleet map also addresses
expansion needs, that is, how many radios can be added to the system
in future.
Frequency
The location of an RF channel operating in the radio spectrum
(typically measured in MHz).
Function Keys
The ten (or twelve) keys located on the PC keyboard that are labeled
F1 through F10 (or F1 through F12) that perform specific functions
within the RSS.
GET
The computer action that transfers data from a radio codeplug or from
a radio archive file to the computer’s RAM for use by an RSS user.
Synonymous with “read”.
Group
A collection of radios that communicate with each other.
Handshaking
The data interchange that takes place between the radio and the
Central Controller via the control and voice channels. This is to make
sure that each side knows that the other is present on the channel and
is ready to exchange information or allow voice conversation to
proceed.
Hard Disk
An alterable permanent magnetic storage medium with a much larger
storage capacity than a diskette, located inside the computer’s system
unit.
Home Channel
The channel the user was on prior to pushing the SCAN button.
Home Revert
The channel the user will revert to when PTT is pressed while in scan
mode unless the scan talkback feature is enabled. Defines the transmit
channel requirement for a feature. Typically refers to scan mode
operation.
Hz
Hertz, or cycles per second.
kHz
Kilohertz, thousands of cycles per second.
Logic Board
The circuit board within the radio that contains the embedded
microprocessor and other logic-related components.
MDC-1200
A Motorola-proprietary signalling format. It is a binary format using
1200-baud minimum shift keying modulation.
Menu
Contains a list of functions that can be selected and performed by
pressing a function key. Also see “Screen”.
Message
Upon releasing the PTT, a Portable radio will remain on the voice
channel for a pre-programmed period of time. This allows a response
to be made by other members of the talkgroup without returning to
the control channel for another voice channel assignment. Message
Trunking is commonly referred to as Hangtime on the repeater.
Message Trunking Systems generate less control channel traffic per
conversation than Transmission Trunking Systems.
302
MHz
Megahertz, million of cycles per second.
Mode
A mode is a collection of personality values, such as frequency, PL
codes and scan lists, and is assigned a number in the Name field.
Mode Number
The number assigned to a particular mode.
MS-DOS
Microsoft Disk Operating System. DOS is a group of programs that
control the way the computer interfaces with other programs, that
instructs the computer how to use, read and return information to and
from application programs and how to organize/use information on
disks.
OmniLink
When an OmniLink feature is enabled, the radio will be allowed to
roam from one SmartZone System within an OmniLink System to
another SmartZone System within the same OmniLink System.
Operating System
A computer program that coordinates your computer’s activities such
as memory allocation, file management, input and output operations,
communications and interfacing to other application software
packages, such as the RSS.
Path
The location of a sub-directory on a disk or diskette. Paths start at the
root directory of the disk or diskette and end at the directory
containing the desired file. For example, the directory path
C:\MRSS\MCS\ARCHIVE shows the hierarchy or ordering of
directories that the computer must descend to reach a file located
under the ARCHIVE directory.
Path Name
See “Path”.
Personality
A term used to describe the data in the radio’s codeplug or in an
archive file that contains a set of unique, customer-specific features.
Personality File
A file that contains the data to be stored in a radio’s EEPROM. This file
contains information such as receive frequency, transmit frequency,
squelch code, and so on.
PL
Private-Line Coded Squelch. A channel that has PL on the receive
frequency will require both the presence of a carrier as well as the
correct PL code before it will unmute. Also, if PL is on the transmit
frequency, all transmissions on that channel will be modulated at a
sub-audible level by the PL code. Modulation is continuous.
PL Code
A two-digit alphanumeric code for specific sub-audible tones.
Pop-up Window
A message area that overlaps on a data entry/display area; used to
indicate a data entry error or to verify destructive commands and
provide function key choices for the next course of action. Also known
as the Dialog Box.
Port
A parallel or serial hardware interface connection at the back of a
computer used to communicate with other hardware devices such as a
radio, a modem or a printer. A port is normally designated by a slot
position such as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.
Priority Channel
A channel that is deemed more important to the radio operator than
any other. The radio is required to always unmute on activity there
303
even though receiving activity on another channel during priority
scan.
Priority Levels
A number given to each radio user on a Trunked system to allow
system access to the most critical users during busy periods.
Assignment of priority levels is controlled by the System Manager.
Three levels of priority are available on a Privacy Plus System and five
levels are available on Type I SMARTNET system.
Priority Sample Rate
The rate at which the priority channel is checked for activity in
priority scan.
Private-Line
See “PL”.
Privacy Plus
Privacy Plus is a type of Trunking system which is limited in the
options it provides to radio users. The system does not have
emergency or dynamic regrouping capabilities. Most shared (Public)
Trunking Systems are of the Privacy Plus variety.
Program Tree
A figurative term used to describe the organization of a multi-level
menu-driven software program.
PTT
Push-To-Talk feature or button.
PTT-ID
Push-To-Talk IDentification. A feature that sends your radio’s
identification number on each transmission.
Queuing
A method of servicing users which is used when a Trunking system is
busy. The Central Controller stores a radio's request to transmit and
makes determinations as to what radio will be serviced on a First-In
First-Out (FIFO) basis.
Quik- Call II
A two-tone sequential tone signalling system.
Radio Check Software
A signalling feature that lets your radio be polled to see if the radio is
within range and turned on. The user receives no indication of the
poll, except perhaps a brief lighting of the transmit or busy light.
Radio Interface Box
See “RIB”.
Radio Interface Cable
A cable that allows the radio to be connected (interfaced) to a host
computer for programming or tuning purposes.
Radio Service Software
Software purchased by Motorola product resellers through a license
agreement that is delivered on a 3-1/2” diskette(s) and used to program
two-way radios with a unique set of features called personalities.
RAM
Random Access Memory. A computer’s RAM is used to store the
contents of the current workspace. The radio’s RAM is loaded with a
copy of the EEPROM data. The program will sometimes write to the
radio’s RAM to temporarily change certain features such that the user
can get immediate feedback. These changes will not become
permanent in the radio’s codeplug until the radio is programmed.
READ
The means by which a radio’s codeplug information is transferred
from the radio’s EEPROM to the workspace via the RIB.
Receive Frequency
The center of the receive channel in MHz.
304
Recent User Priority
The ability of the Motorola Central Controller to ensure uninterrupted
communications to a recent user of the Trunked system. Recent User
Priority ensures that a group engaged in a conversation will get
priority access even if there is a significant delay between
transmissions.
Repeater
An electric device with transmit and receive capabilities. A repeater
will re-transmit information at 125, 70, or 35 Watts of power. A
Trunked repeater used in 800 MHz Trunking systems will typically
have transmit and receive frequencies separated by 45 MHz depending
upon the original communications system configuration.
RIB
Radio Interface Box. Used to connect a computer system to a radio for
the purpose of communication between the radio and the computer.
The RIB consists of level-shifting circuits that convert the standard RS232 voltage levels of the computer’s asynchronous serial interface to
the single-ended voltage levels present on the Serial Bus contacts of
the radio’s feature connector. An appropriate RIB-to-radio cable and
RIB-to-computer cable must be used in conjunction with the RIB.
RS-232
An asynchronous, serial data transmission standard for computers
that defines the required sequencing, timing and hardware interface.
Scan
The process by which the radio checks receive frequencies stored in a
list for activity. If activity is found, the radio is locked on that
frequency until the frequency is no longer active.
Serial Ports
See “Port”.
Signalling Systems
Systems used to alert radio operators or to perform specific functions
using the radio.
SMARTNET
A type of Trunking system primarily used in support of public safety
and industrial communication systems. This type of system has
emergency and dynamic regrouping capabilities.
Squelch
A radio circuit which eliminates noise from the loudspeaker when a
“received” signal is not present.
Synthesizer
The frequency generating unit of a radio.
System Central
Referred to as Central Controller, this is the heart of Motorola's
Trunking system. The Central Controller is a software controlled,
computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the
Trunked radios assigned to it. The Central Controller is responsible for
monitoring and directing the operations of the Trunked repeaters.
System ID
A number assigned to a Trunked system distinguishing it from other
systems. The system ID is sent out every three seconds on the Control
Channel.
Talkaround Frequency
A frequency used for simplex conversions or radio-to-radio
communications without the use of a repeater.
Talkback
Indicates that a call can be answered by pressing PTT and dispatching
a response.
Talkback scan
Allows the operator to respond to a call on the same channel as the call
during the talkback time in scan.
305
Talkgroup
A group of users in a Type II or Type IIi system.
Talk Permit Tone
A brief series of beeps that provides radio operators with an indication
that a voice channel is available for use and is assigned to them.
Talk Prohibit Tone
An audible tone (honk) heard from the radio's speaker when PTT is
pressed. The tone will be heard when the radio is out of range of the
system or it is programmed with the incorrect system information.
Time-Out Timer (TOT)
A function that limits the transmission period to a pre-defined time.
The radio will automatically stop transmitting when the timer goes off
after the pre-defined time and will generate an alert tone to notify the
user that no transmission is taking place.
Transmission Trunking
Upon releasing the PTT, the radio will return to monitor the Control
Channel if the user desires to initiate another call.
Trunking
The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large
number of users.
Type I
A type of Trunking that is composed of Fleets and Subfleets and is
limited by the size of codes of those groups. A Type I system
handshaking includes sending of the Acknowledge Tone and High
Speed Handshake.
Type II
A type of Trunking system that is composed of Announcement Groups
and Talkgroups. A Type II system is limited on talkgroups and
individual ID combinations to 48,000 IDs and 4,000 talkgroups per
system. The Type II system handshaking does not include sending
Acknowledge tone and High Speed Handshake.
Type IIi
A type of Trunking system composed of Fleets, Subfleets and
Talkgroups. This Trunking type supports both Type I and Type II
Handshaking. This Trunking type also allows Type I radios to
communicate with Type II radios on the same voice channel.
Unit ID
The electronic tuning/alignment information of a particular radio.
Universal ID
A particular personality in a radio unit which is chosen as the one
whose Trunking identity will always be used to address this unit. In
this manner, a unit would respond to an individual call (Private Call,
Call Alert, Phone Interconnect, etc.) regardless of the current
personality chosen.
User Scan
Scan type which is programmable through the front panel buttons on
the radio.
Voice Channel
A Trunked repeater that is used to transmit and receive data and voice
from the radios on the system.
Wide Area Call
A call in a wide area coverage system which utilizes a voice channel in
all sites of the system.
Zone
A collection of channels which have something in common.
306
Index
✑
A
A/G Failsoft ................................................................171
A/G Failsoft Frequency ...........................................171
Acceptable Threshold ..............................................142
Access Codes .....................................................120–121
Access Type ................................................152, 180, 222
Ack Alert Tone ..........................................................233
Acknowledge Alert Tone ........................................228
Add Conventional Item .........................................112
Add DEK Box .............................................................117
Add Number ..............................................................118
Add Truked Item ......................................................112
Addressing .................................................................248
Addressing Mode ......................................................248
Aff. (affiliating) Hold Off .......................................140
Affiliation Type (Type II/IIi) ..................................150
Alarm Options ....................................................89, 135
Alarm Rearm Option ...............................................135
Alert Tone Volume Offset ........................................91
Alert Tones ...................................................................91
Alias .............................................................................149
Alt Display Time .......................................................132
Anatomy of a Menu ..................................................11
Anatomy of a Screen .................................................13
Announcement Group ...........................................170
Archive File Name ......................................................81
Archive File, how to delete ..............................75, 264
Archive Path ................................................................24
How to configure ................................................23
Assembling The Hardware .........................................4
Auto Access Code Select .........................................215
Auto Dial Holdoff ....................................................139
Auto Reset Carr Ovrd ..............................................244
Auto Reset Duration ................................................244
Auto Reset Time .......................................................232
Auto Scan ...................................................................187
Auto Sel Call Transmit ............................................213
Auxiliary Menu .........................................................239
Auxiliary System ......................................................198
B
Background Color ......................................................27
Back-up Path, how to set up ....................................18
Banner Screen .............................................................10
Baud Rate ...................................................................249
➠
Block Pending CA/PC ................................................93
Bootstrap Code Path & File Name .........................24
Busy LED ....................................................................218
Busy Override Chirp Ack ........................................141
Busy Override Delay ................................................140
Button .........................................................................163
Button Configuration .............................................105
C
Call Alert Decode .....................................................212
Call Alert Encode ......................................................213
Call Alert Operation ................................................172
Call ID .........................................................................237
Call ID List .................................................................174
Call Text .....................................................................237
Caller ID .....................................................................134
Car Radio Mute .........................................................102
Car Radio Mute Timer .............................................103
Carrier Detect Required ..........................................129
Caution, what it means ..............................................3
Change Archive ........................................................264
Change/View Menu .............................................19, 87
Changing A Field Value ............................................14
Channel ................................................................94, 150
Channel Assign Type ..............................................159
Channel Assignment .......................................148, 153
Channel Assignment Data .....................................153
Channel Bandwidth ................................................159
Channel Delay ..........................................................101
Channel Grant Polarity ............................................97
Channel Name ..........................................................254
Channel Number .....................................................254
Channel Range .........................................................154
Channel Spacing ......................................................220
Channel Text Size ....................................................131
Clone Radios, how to ....................................35, 73, 77
Cloning
Full Clone .............................................................78
Limited Clone ................................................77–78
Coast Time .........................................................231, 250
Code ....................................................................202, 245
Codeplug Version .......................................................83
Communications Port .........................................23, 25
How to configure ................................................23
Communications Test, how to perform ...............23
Complete Menu Map ................................................15
307
Computer Defaults, how to specify .......................17
Computer-to-Radio Communication
Error Codes ............................................................273
Configuring Paths and Port .....................................23
Connect Tone ...........................................................149
Console Acknowledgement Required .................181
Control Channel ..............................148, 153, 155, 176
Control Station Equipped ........................................92
Controller Board Initialization .........................39, 68
Conventional Data Configuration .........................88
Conventional ID ........................................................77
Conventional Item ..................................................113
Conventional Menu ................................................198
Conventional Message Alias List ..........................251
Conventional Personality ......................198, 203, 217
How to Add ........................................................203
How to Delete ....................................................203
How to Print Data .............................................256
Conventional Personality Phone Options .........215
Conventional Personality RAC Options .............221
Conventional Print Menu ......................................259
Conventional Radio Wide Options .............198–199
Conventional Signalling System Features ..........279
Conventional Status Alias List ..............................252
Conversation Type ...........................................152, 187
Coverage Type ..........................................................149
Current Archive ........................................................264
Current FLASHcode .................................................269
D
Data Mode Request Polarity ....................................97
Data On Failsoft ..........................................................96
Data Operated Squelch (DOS) ...............................231
Deaccess Codes .................................................120–121
Decoder 1 Call Type ................................................244
Decoder 2 Call Type ................................................244
Decoder Option ........................................................245
DEK Configuration ..................................................105
Delete Conventional Item .....................................112
DELETE DEK BOX ....................................................117
Delete Number ..........................................................118
Delete Trunked Item ................................................112
Designated Tx Mem .................................................126
Detections Required ................................................247
Dialing Options ................................................118, 122
Digit Duration ...........................................123, 160, 216
Direct Frequency Enabled ......................................200
Direct/Talkaround ....................................................204
Direct-entry fields ......................................................14
Disconnect On Data ..................................................96
Disk Codeplug Files, how to read ...........................21
Display Options ..................................................89, 131
Display Site Trunking ..............................................141
DOS (Data Squelch) .........................................231, 249
DPL Code ...................................................................202
DPL Codes ..........................................................208, 277
308
DPL Invert ..........................................................202, 208
DTMF Access Codes .................................................118
DTMF Access Timing Table ....................................216
DTMF Access/Deaccess Codes ...............................120
DTMF Deaccess Codes .............................................118
DTMF Digit Hangtime .............................................122
DTMF Pause Time ....................................................122
DTMF Transmit Deviation .......................................64
Duplicate II/IIi ID .......................................................77
Dynamic Priority ......................................................125
Dynamic Regrouping ...............................................150
E
Echo Mute Time (ms) ..............................................210
Electric Stop .................................................................91
Emer Priority TX Inhibit .........................................232
Emergency ..........................................................206, 228
Emergency Alarm .............................................180, 250
Emergency Call .........................................................180
Emergency Data Configuration ............................179
Emergency Hot Mic .................................................183
Emergency Limited Patience .................................232
Emergency Options ...........................................90, 168
Emergency Receive ...................................................132
Emergency Type .......................................................228
End (Channel Range) ..............................................154
Enhancement Options ....................................267–268
Exit the RSS, how to ............................................18, 36
Ext Alarm Delay ........................................................135
F
Factory Order Number ............................................269
Failsoft .........................................................................178
Failsoft Frequency ....................................................178
Failsoft Hold Time ....................................................130
Failsoft Hold Time (sec) ..........................................130
Failsoft Inactivity ......................................................140
Failsoft Type ..............................................................171
Fast Scroll Rate ..........................................................132
Feature Options ..........................................................89
Field Value, how to change .....................................14
File Maintenance Menu ....................................20, 262
File Name ...................................................................264
File, how to delete ..............................................75, 262
Fill in the Scan List
How to ...................................................................33
Filter Constants K1, K2, and K3 ............................143
Filter Threshold Constants T1, T2, and T3 ........144
FLASH Radio ..............................................................272
FLASH Software Path .................................................24
FLASHcode ...................................................................69
FLASHport Upgrade Menu .....................................266
Fleet ID ................................................................151, 170
Frame Color .................................................................27
Frequency ...........................................................176, 206
Front-End Filter Alignment ......................................55
Full Cloning ................................................................78
Full Spectrum CC Scan ...........................................141
Full Spectrum CC Scan Timer ...............................141
Function Key ID Area ................................................11
G
GE STAR System ...............................................239, 248
GE STAR System # ....................................................206
Get Codeplug Data From Archive File ..................75
Get/Save/Program Menu ..............................19, 71–72
Global TX Multiplier ...............................................233
Good Threshold .......................................................142
H
Hard Disk, how to organize .......................................7
Hardware, how to assemble .......................................4
HearClear ...................................................................159
Highlight Color ..........................................................27
Home Mode Selection ...............................................94
Horn & Light Duration ...........................................135
Horn and Lights .......................................................135
Hot DTMF Timing ...................................................160
Hot Keypad ................................................................205
Hot Keypad (DTMF) ................................................173
How to
Add a Conventional Item ...............................112
Add a Conventional Personality ...................203
Add a DEK Box ..................................................117
Add a New Phone Number Entry .................118
Add a Scan List ..................................................124
Add a Trunked Item .........................................112
Add a Trunking Personality ............................168
Add a Trunking System ...................................148
Add a Zone .........................................................253
Adjust Squelch ...............................................57–59
Align Transmit Deviation Limit ................47, 49
Clone Radios ........................................................77
Configure Paths and Port ..................................23
Configure the PC ................................................22
Create a Directory .............................................263
Delete a Conventional Item ...........................112
Delete a Dek Box ...............................................117
Delete a File .......................................... 75, 262, 264
Delete a New Phone Number Entry .............118
Delete a Personality ..........................................203
Delete a Scan List ..............................................124
Delete a Trunked Item .....................................112
Delete a Trunking Personality .......................168
Delete a Trunking System ...............................148
Delete a Zone .....................................................253
Delete an Archive File ......................................264
Exit the RSS ....................................................18, 36
Install the RSS ........................................................8
Load an Archive File ..........................................73
MERGE TCMS ......................................................73
Perform a Communications Test ....................23
Print Alarm Options .........................................257
Print Conventional Data .................................256
Print Display Options ......................................257
Print Feature Options .......................................257
Print Phone Options ........................................257
Print Radio Configuration Data ............255–256
Print Radio Options ..........................................257
Print Scan Options ............................................257
Print Trunking Data .........................................256
Program a Basic MCS 2000 Radio ...................29
Program Data into Radio Codeplug ...............34
Read Codeplug Data from Archive Files ........21
Read Codeplug Data from Radio ...............21, 73
Save an Archive File ............................................73
Save Codeplug Data to Archive File ...............80
Save Configuration Information .....................23
Service the Radio Using the RSS ......................37
Set Screen Colors ...........................................22, 26
Set Up Back-up File Paths ..................................18
Set Up Computer Configuration .....................22
Specify Directory Paths for Archive Files ......75
Use this Manual ....................................................3
View Radio Programming History ..................73
Hub Defeats PL .........................................................200
I
Ignition Switch .........................................................111
Ignore Data Display ...................................................97
Ignored Site Resource Preference ..................189–190
Impolite Retries ................................................232, 250
Index ...........................................................................163
Individual ID .............................................149, 152, 171
Information fields ......................................................14
Initial Delay ...............................................123, 160, 216
Initial Squelch Type .................................................244
Install the RSS, how to ................................................8
Instruction Area ..........................................................11
Integer Delay .............................................................216
Interdigit Delay .................................................123, 160
Inter-Packet Time .....................................................231
Inter-Tone Duration ................................................246
Introduction ..................................................................1
ISW Window Adjust ................................................139
L
Last Programmed .......................................................83
Leading PTT-ID .........................................................226
Limited Clone .............................................................78
Limited Patience Time ............................................231
Long Press/Emer Duration .......................................93
Long Tone Duration ................................................245
M
Main Menu ..................................................................19
Man Acc Live Dialing ..............................................118
309
Mandatory Password ...............................................133
Max Password Length .............................................133
Maximum Channels (Talkgroups) .........................94
MCS 2000 Features ..................................................279
MDC Call ID List ......................................................224
MDC Call List Table ................................................236
MDC Configuration ................................................198
MDC Configuration Menu ....................................224
MDC Emergency Options ......................................225
MDC Hot Mic Emergency ......................................229
MDC Hot Mic TX Period ........................................229
MDC Options ....................................................203, 212
MDC Repeater ID .....................................................238
MDC System ..............................................225–226, 230
MDC System # ..........................................................206
MDC System Options ......................................224, 230
MDC System Remote Options ..............................234
MDC Unlimited Calling .........................................214
Menu Item Configuration ......................................105
Message ...............................................................173, 227
Message Alias .....................................................158, 165
Message Alias Number ....................................165, 251
Message Alias Text ...........................................165, 251
Message Aliasing .......................................................160
Message Text ...............................................................27
Message Trunked ......................................................187
Message Trunked Systems ......................................152
Mic AGC .....................................................................102
Minimum Alert Tone Volume ................................91
Mode/Channel Assignment .....................................88
Model Number ......................................................81, 83
Monitor Hold Time .................................................129
Monitor Type ..............................................................27
Monitor w/Silent Emergency ................................250
More Conventional Options .................................204
More Conventional Personality Options ...........217
More Emergency Options ......................................229
More MDC Options .................................................225
More Quik-Call II Options .....................................243
More Radio Wide Options .......................................90
More Trunking Options ..................................148, 168
MPL List ......................................................................199
MPL List Configuration ..........................................201
MPL Name .................................................................201
MPL Number .............................................................201
N
Native Language .......................................................132
Navigate Through RSS, how to ...............................12
New FLASHcode .......................................................269
New Softpot Value 44, 46, 48, 50–51, 53, 55–62, 64–65,
......................................................................................67
Non-Priority Members ............................................126
Non-Tactical ..............................................................181
Non-XL Scan Unsquelch Duration ........................99
Nuisance Mode Delete ............................................128
310
O
Observ Window Duration ......................................246
OmniLink ...................................................................150
One-Touch Button Options ...........................158, 162
Operation ...................................................................231
Out of Range ................................................................91
Override Timer ..........................................................218
P
Password .....................................................................133
PC, how to configure .................................................22
Periodic Keyfail Alert Tone ......................................98
Permanent Horn & Lights ......................................135
Personality .................................204, 212, 215, 217, 222
How to Add ........................................................203
How to Delete ....................................................203
Personality MDC Options ......................................212
Personality Number .........................................178, 254
Personality Type .......................................................254
Phone Configuration ...............................................118
Phone Dialing ...........................................................122
Phone DTMF Timing ...............................................160
Phone Interconnect .................................................173
Phone Num Display Format ..................................119
Phone Number ..........................................................119
Phone Operation ......................................................205
Phone Options ..................................................204, 215
Phone Text .................................................................119
Phone TX Options .....................................................89
PL Code .......................................................................207
Polite Retries ..............................................................232
Pop-up Background Color ........................................27
Portable Products Test Set ..........................................4
Preamble During Pretime .......................................230
Prefer Status ...............................................................189
Preferred Sites ............................................186, 189–190
Prerequisites ...................................................................2
Pretime (ms) ..............................................................233
Pretime Duration ......................................................249
Primary ID ..................................................................226
Print Alarm Options ................................................257
Print Button and Switch Options .........................257
Print Conventional Data ........................................256
Print Display Options ..............................................257
Print Menu ...........................................................20, 256
Print Phone Options ................................................257
Print Radio Codeplug Data Summary .................256
Print Radio Configuration ......................................256
Print Radio Options .................................................257
Print Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu ....
257
Print Scan Options ...................................................257
Print Trunking Data .................................................256
Print Zone/Channel Assignment Information ..256
Priority 1 Member ....................................................126
Priority 1 Type ...........................................................125
Priority 2 Member ....................................................126
Priority 2 Type ..........................................................125
Priority Chan Marking ............................................129
Priority Scan Alert ....................................................128
Private Call ................................................................163
Private Call Operation ............................................172
Private Call Type ......................................................172
Program ........................................................................34
Program Mode/Channel Features ..........................31
Program Radio ............................................................73
Program Source .....................................................81, 84
Program Zone/Channel Features ............................33
Programmable Features ..............................................1
Programming History ...............................................83
Programming the Radio’s Codeplug .....................82
Proper Code Detect ..........................................187, 210
Protocol Type ....................................................169, 179
PTT Code Type .........................................................223
PTT DTMF Code .......................................................223
PTT- ID .......................................................................187
PTT MDC Repeater ID .............................................223
PTT Sidetone .....................................................228, 241
PTT Singletone ..........................................................223
PTT-ID .........................................................................206
PTT-ID Sidetone ...............................................226, 249
PTT-ID Type ..............................................................249
Q
Quick Key Override .................................................218
Quik-Call II System ..........................................239, 243
Quik-Call II System # ..............................................206
R
RAB 1 Code Type .....................................................222
RAB 1 DTMF Code ...................................................222
RAB 1 MDC Repeater ID .........................................222
RAB 1 Singletone ......................................................222
RAB 2 Code Type .....................................................223
RAB 2 Singletone ......................................................223
RAB Sidetone .............................................................241
RAC (Repeater Access Code) ..................................233
RAC Options .....................................................217, 221
Radio Check ..............................................................227
Radio Cloning .............................................................94
Radio Codeplug Data, how to read ........................21
Radio Codeplug Version ...........................................83
Radio Configuration Data, how to print ............255
Radio ID .....................................................................249
Radio Inhibit .............................................................227
Radio Interface Box .....................................................4
Radio Lock .................................................................133
Radio Options .............................................................89
Radio Software Version .............................................83
Radio Wide Configuration Menu ....................88–89
Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu ........105
Radio Wide Menu Item Configuration ...............112
Radio Wide Options ............................90, 98, 100, 102
Radio Wide Switch Configuration .......................111
Rated Audio Alignment ............................................56
Read Radio Codeplug ..........................................73–74
Read Serial Number ...................................................77
Receive Alignment Menu .........................................54
Receive Only ..............................................................204
Received Signal Strength Indication ..............60, 141
Receiver Alignment ...................................................39
Reference Oscillator Alignment ........................41–42
Reference Oscillator, how to align .........................42
Remote Mon/Radio Trace .......................................234
Remote Monitor .......................................................150
Remote Radio Mode ................................................234
Repeater Access .........................................................222
Repeater ID ................................................................238
Required FLASH Software .......................................269
Reset Type ..................................................................244
Retrieve Archive File ..................................................75
Retry Counter ............................................................181
Reverse Burst TOC ....................................................218
Revert Announcement Group ...............................184
Revert Announcement Group Strapping ............184
Revert Fleet ID ...........................................................184
Revert Fleet ID Strapping ........................................184
Revert Fleet ID/Subfleet ..........................................184
Revert PTT-ID ............................................................181
Revert Size Code .......................................................183
Revert Subfleet ..........................................................184
Revert Subfleet Strapping .......................................185
Revert Talkgroup ......................................................184
Revert Talkgroup Strapping ...................................185
RF Modem ..................................................................139
RIB ..............................................................................4, 25
RIB Power Supply .........................................................4
RIB-to-Radio Cable .......................................................4
RKN4047A ......................................................................4
RLN1015B ......................................................................4
RM Base Time ............................................................150
Rollover Alert ..............................................................91
Rotary Alert ..................................................................91
RSS Location ID Area .................................................11
RSS Service Functions ..................................................1
RSS Start-Up Procedure ...............................................9
RSSI ................................................................................60
RSSI Acceptable Threshold .............................141, 145
RSSI Excellent Threshold ........................................142
RSSI Good Threshold ..............................................142
RSSI OSW Counter ...................................................141
RSSI Threshold Constants ......................................142
Rx Base Time (sec) ....................................................235
Rx Emphasis ..............................................................219
RX Frequency ....................................................156, 178
Rx Hold Time ............................................................129
RX Modulation .................................................159, 210
RX Unmute Delay ....................................................218
311
S
Save Archive ..........................................................73, 80
Save Configuration Information ............................23
Save Dim State ..........................................................132
Scan Holdoff Strapping ...........................................210
Scan List ......................................................125, 174, 205
Scan List and Options .............................................124
Scan Options ...............................................89, 124, 128
Scan Select ..................................................................210
Scan Type ...................................................................125
Scrollable fields ...........................................................14
Secondary ID .............................................................226
SECURE Equipped ......................................................95
SECURE Options .........................................90, 203, 209
Secure Punch Thru .....................................................99
SECURE Receive Discriminator Level ....................61
SECURE Transmit Deviation .............................41, 51
Secure/Clear Strapping ............................................209
Sel Call Reset .............................................................231
Selectable Keypad Mute ............................................93
Selected Text Color ....................................................27
Selective Call Decode ..............................................213
Self Test Alert Tone ....................................................91
Serial Number .......................................................81, 83
How to read ..........................................................77
Service Menu ...................................................19, 38, 40
Setting a Default Port ................................................18
Setting Default Archive and Backup Paths ...........18
Setting RSS Computer Defaults ...............................17
Setting Screen Colors ................................................26
Setup Computer Configuration ..............................22
Setup Configuration Screen .....................................20
Sidetone ......................................................................233
Signalling ...................................................................205
Signalling Alignment ................................................39
Signalling Alignment Menu ....................................63
Signalling Muting Type ..........................................244
Silent Alarm ...............................................................100
Singletone List ..................................................239, 242
Singletone System ............................................239–240
Site Alias .....................................................................158
Site Alias Number .....................................................166
Site Alias Text ............................................................166
Site Aliasing ...............................................................160
Site ID ..........................................................149, 189, 191
Site Path ........................................................................24
Size Code ............................................................151, 169
Slow Scroll Count .....................................................132
Slow Scroll Rate ........................................................132
Smart PTT ...................................................................217
Smart PTT Quick Key Timer ..................................199
Smart PTT Retry Timer ............................................199
Smart Radio Interface Box ..........................................4
Smart RIB Power Supply .............................................4
SMARTZONE Environment ...........................138, 140
SMARTZONE Preferred Sites ..........................186, 189
312
Software Option ..........................................................83
Software Version .........................................................83
Spacing ........................................................................154
Speaker Unmute On Data ........................................96
Splinter Channel (800 MHz Only) .......................159
Squelch (Fine Tune) .................................................219
Squelch Attenuator (12.5 kHz) Alignment ...........57
Squelch Attenuator (20 kHz) Alignment ..............58
Squelch Attenuator (25/30 kHz) Alignment ........59
Squelch Type .....................................................201, 207
SRIB ..................................................................................4
SRIB Software Path & File Name .............................24
STAR System ..............................................................239
Start (Channel Range) .............................................154
Start The RSS, how to ..................................................8
Status ...................................................154, 173, 175, 227
Status Alias .................................................158, 164, 198
Status Alias Number .........................................164, 252
Status Alias Text ................................................164, 252
Status Aliasing ...........................................................160
Status Request ...........................................................227
Status Text Color ........................................................27
Std. Audio .....................................................................56
Strapping ............................................................170, 178
Subfleet ...............................................................177–178
Subfleets ......................................................................168
Suspend All Scan ......................................................129
Switch Configuration ..............................................105
System .................................................148, 154, 158, 248
System ID ...................................................................148
System Key .................................................................148
System Pretime ..........................................................230
System Search Time .................................................130
System Signalling Type ...........................................243
System Type ...............................................................148
System/ID ...................................................................169
T
Tactical ........................................................................181
Talk Permit Tone ..............................................171, 187
Talkgroup ...................................................................178
Talkgroups ..................................................................168
TCMS Merge Procedure .............................................76
TCMS Path ...................................................................76
Telephone Interconnect .........................................139
Temp Msg Display Time .........................................132
Text Color ....................................................................27
Text Justification ......................................................131
This Call ID ................................................................152
This Call ID (PC I) ....................................................174
This Call ID (PC II) ...................................................174
Time-Out Timer (TOT) ....................................171, 204
Time-Out Timer Table .............................................103
Toggle PTT ...................................................................64
Tone .............................................................................242
Tone Duration ...........................................................241
Tone Pretime .............................................................240
Tone Signalling System ..........................................222
TPL Frequencies and Codes ...................................275
Trailing PTT-ID .........................................................227
Transmission Trunked ............................................187
Transmission Trunked Systems ............................152
Transmit Current Limit ......................................41, 52
Transmit Deviation Balance (Compensation)
Alignment ...........................................................41, 45
Transmit Deviation Limit Alignment .............41, 47
Reference Softpot ................................................49
Transmit Enable Polarity ..........................................96
Transmit Power Alignment ...............................41, 43
Transmit Signalling
High Speed ...........................................................65
MDC-1200 ............................................................66
Transmitter Alignment .............................................39
Transmitter Alignment Menu .................................40
Transmitter Deviation Limit Alignment
Reference Softpot ................................................41
Transmitter Power, how to adjust ........43, 46–47, 49
Trunk Item .................................................................115
Trunk Repeater Offset .............................................159
Trunking Call List ....................................................137
Trunking Call List Table .........................................197
Trunking Data Configuration .................................88
Trunking Emergency Data Configuration .........179
Trunking Menu ........................................................137
Trunking Personality ...............................137, 167, 169
Trunking Print Menu ..............................................258
Trunking Radio Wide Options ......................137–138
Trunking Signalling System Features ..................280
Trunking Subfleets ...................................................177
Trunking System ......................................................137
Trunking System ID ................................................127
Trunking System Options ......................................157
Trunking System Type ............................................127
Trunking Systems .....................................................147
Tx Base Time (sec) ....................................................235
Tx Clear Alert Tones ..................................................98
TX Defeat ...................................................................152
Tx Deviation .............................................................220
Tx Deviation T/A ......................................................220
Tx Emphasis ..............................................................219
TX Frequency ....................................................156, 178
TX Inhibit On Busy .................................................214
TX Multiplier ............................................................233
TX Period ...................................................................183
TX Power Level .........................................................218
TX Power Select ........................................................159
Type .............................................................................169
U
Universal ID (Type I Only) ....................................151
Unmute Hold-Off .....................................................249
Unmute Type ............................................................213
Unmute/Mute Type .................................................218
Upgrade Radio ...................................................266, 272
Upgrades Purchased .................................................269
Upgrades Remaining ...............................................269
User-Selectable PL (MPL) ........................................219
Using This Manual .......................................................3
V
Variable ID .................................................................226
VC RSSI ACCpt Threshold (Voice Channel RSSI Acceptable Threshold) ..............................................142
View Features ............................................................270
View FLASHkey Configuration .....................266, 269
View History ................................................................73
View Radio Configuration .............................266–267
VOC Activation Time ..............................................146
VOC Options .....................................................138, 145
VOC Pended Emer Time .........................................146
Voice-On-Control Capable ....................................145
Voice-On-Control Options ............................138, 145
Voice-On-Control Site Lock Time ........................146
Voting Scan ...............................................................130
VRM Options ......................................................90, 186
VRM100 ..............................................................187, 220
VRM100 Capable ........................................................92
VRM100 Fleet ............................................................194
VRM100 High Speed Data ......................................220
VRM100 Options ........................................................96
VRM100 Pager ID .....................................................193
VRM100 Size Code ...................................................193
VRM100 Subfleet ......................................................194
VRM100 Talkgroup ..................................................193
VRM100 Trunk Options .........................................192
VRM500 Capable ........................................................92
VRM500 Deaffiliation .............................................195
VRM500 Pager Individual ID ................................195
VRM500 Receive Discriminator Level ...................62
VRM500 Trunk Options .........................................195
W
WAC AMSS ........................................................168, 175
Warning, what it means .............................................3
What’s On The RSS Diskettes ....................................6
Working Area ..............................................................11
X
XL IC Present ..............................................................98
XL Scan Unsquelch Duration ..................................99
XL Transmit ...............................................................210
Z
Zone .......................................................................94, 150
Zone Name ................................................................254
Zone Number ............................................................254
Zone Switch Debounce Timer (sec) .....................160
313
Zone Text Size ...........................................................131
Zone/Talkgroup (Channel) Assignment .............253
314
✁
RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE
USER'S GUIDE QUESTIONNAIRE
At Motorola, we believe that comments from users provide valuable information for producing highquality User’s Guides. You can help us improve the next revision of this manual by filling out this
form and sending it to us.
With reference to Manual No. 68-81081C15-E
MCS 2000
Use the following scale to answer each question listed below. If you have a specific comment about
any section, please write it in the space below the appropriate question.
Strongly Agree
1
Agree
2
Disagree
3
Strongly Disagree
4
1. The list of required equipment and the setup procedure are clear and complete.
1
2
3
4
2. The procedure for backing up and installing the software is clear and complete.
1
2
3
4
3. The explanations of keyboard commands and screen arrangement are clear.
1
2
3
4
4. The explanation of the Get/Save procedures is clear and complete.
1
2
3
4
5. The explanation of the Change/View procedures is clear and complete.
1
2
3
4
6.The explanation of the Programming procedures is clear and complete.
1
2
3
4
7. The explanation of the Service/Alignment procedures is clear and complete.
1
2
3
4
8. The explanation of how to print the codeplug is clear and complete.
1
2
3
4
9. The Table of Contents and Index are complete and accurate.
1
2
3
4
10. The illustrations and tables added to the understanding of the explanations.
1
2
3
4
11. The Glossary and List of Abbreviations are helpful.
1
2
3
4
12. The User’s Guide is well organized and helpful.
1
2
3
4
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 9040 FT. LAUDERDALE, FL
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Attention: Technical Communications
8000 W. Sunrise Boulevard
Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33322
------------------------------FOLD
-------------------------------FOLD
Please identify any errors you may have found and provide any suggestions you may have for
improving the next version of this manual.
Name: _____________________________________________________________________________________
Company:__________________________________________________________________________________
❒ Customer
❒ COSC
❒ MSS
❒ FTR
❒ Other
Address:____________________________________________________________________________________
City/State/Zip: ______________________________________________________________________________
Phone Number (Please include Area Code): ___________________________________________________
PLEASE USE TAPE TO SEAL
POSTAL REGULATIONS PROHIBIT USE OF STAPLES
*6881081C15*
68P81081C15-E
Motorola, Inc.
8000 West Sunrise Boulevard
Fort Lauderdale, FL 33322
Download PDF
Similar pages